HANDBOOK
This personal space offers advice and other useful information for
the care and maintenance of your vehicle.
On-line handbook
You can find your handbook on the
PEUGEOT
website, under
"Personal space".
Referring to the handbook on-line also gives you access to the
latest information available, easily identified by the bookmark,
associated with this symbol:
If the "Personal space" function is not available on the
PEUGEOT
public website for your country, you can find your handbook at the
following address:
http://public.servicebox.peugeot.com
The Vehicle documentation link in the home page (no registration
is needed),
the language,
the vehicle, its body style,
the print edition of your handbook appropriate for the date of registration of
your vehicle.
Please note the following point:
The fitting of electrical equipment or accessories which are
not recommended by PEUGEOT may result in a failure of your
vehicle’s electronic system. Please note this specific warning.
It is advisable to contact a PEUGEOT dealer to be shown the
recommended equipment and accessories.
Select:
You have access to your handbook on line, together with the latest
information, identified by the symbol:
WELCOME
Key
Warning:
this symbol marks warnings which it
is essential to observe for your own
safety, for the safety of others or to
avoid any risk of damaging your vehicle.
Information:
this symbol draws your attention to
additional information for better use of
your vehicle.
Protection of
the environment:
this symbol accompanies
advice relating to protection of
the environment.
Page reference:
this symbol invites you to refer to
the pages which provide details of
the function.
Thank you for choosing a 5008, a symbol of
confidence, passion and inspiration.
This handbook has been designed to enable
you to make the most of your 5008.
On the first few pages, you will find a detailed
summary, followed by a quick reference guide
intended to make it easier for you to become
familiar with your vehicle.
All of the details specific to your 5008, comfort,
safety, driving, are then presented in this
handbook, to increase your appreciation of the
vehicle and to help you make the most of it.
At the end of the handbook, illustrations of the
interior and exterior of the vehicle will assist
you in locating equipment or a function by
means of the page indexed.
Each model may only be fitted with some of
the equipment mentioned in this handbook,
depending on the trim level, model, version and
the specification for the country in which it is
sold.
.
.
Contents
Interior fi ttings 117
Centre console 119
Rear multimedia 122
Panoramic sunroof 124
Boot fi ttings 5 seat version 125
Boot fi ttings 7 seat version 126
Fittings
Child seats 132
Deactivating the passenger's front airbag 134
ISOFIX mountings 144
Child lock 151
Child safety
Instrument panels 27
Indicator and warning lamps 30
Indicators 39
Adjustment buttons 43
Monitoring
Familiarisation
Screen A without audio equipment 44
Screen A with audio equipment 46
Screen C (PEUGEOT Connect Sound
(RD5)) 48
16/9 retractable colour screen (PEUGEOT
Connect Navigation (RT6) or PEUGEOT
Connect Media Navigation (NG4 3D)) 51
Trip computer 54
Multifunction screens
Heating and Ventilation 58
Manual air conditioning 60
Rear screen demist - defrost 62
Dual-zone digital air conditioning 63
Front seats 66
Rear seats, 2nd row 72
Access to the 3rd row 74
Rear seats, 3rd row 75
Seat modularity 77
Mirrors 78
Steering wheel adjustment 80
Comfort
Remote control key 81
Alarm 87
Electric windows 89
Doors 91
Boot 94
Fuel tank 96
Misfuel prevention (Diesel) 99
Access
Lighting controls 100
Daytime running lamps 104
Automatic illumination of headlamps 106
Headlamp adjustment 107
Directional lighting 108
Wiper controls 109
Automatic rain sensitive wipers 112
Courtesy lamps 114
Interior mood lighting 115
Visibility
Eco-driving
.
.
Contents
Direction indicators 152
Hazard warning lamps 152
Horn 152
Tyre under-infl ation detection 153
ESC system 155
Front seat belts 158
Airbags 162
Safety
Electric parking brake 166
Hill start assist 170
Head-up display 173
Distance alert 175
Speed limiter 178
Cruise control 181
Manual gearbox 184
Gear shift indicator 185
Electronic gearbox 186
Automatic gearbox 191
Stop & Start 195
Parking sensors 198
Reversing camera 200
Parking space sensors 201
Driving
Emergency or assistance 265
PEUGEOT Connect Media Navigation
(NG4 3D) 269
PEUGEOT Connect Navigation (RT6) 313
PEUGEOT Connect Sound (RD5) 367
Audio equipment and telematics
Visual search
Alphabetical index
Bonnet 204
Running out of fuel (Diesel) 205
Petrol engines 206
Diesel engines 207
Checking levels 208
Checks 211
Checks
Temporary puncture repair kit 213
Changing a wheel 223
Snow chains 230
Changing a bulb 231
Changing a fuse 237
12 V battery 244
Energy economy mode 247
Changing a wiper blade 248
Towing the vehicle 248
Towing a trailer 250
Fitting roof bars 252
Very cold climate screen 253
Accessories 254
Practical information
Petrol engines 256
Petrol weights 257
Diesel engines 258
Diesel weights 259
Dimensions 263
Identifi cation markings 264
Technical data
105
195
108
124
Familiarisation
4
Exterior
Welcome lighting
This additional exterior and interior lighting, controlled
This additional exterior and interior lighting, controlled
remotely, makes your approach to the vehicle easier
when the light is poor.
Stop & Start
This system puts the engine temporarily into standby
during stops in the traffic (red lights, traffic jams,
during stops in the traffic (red lights, traffic jams,
etc....). The engine restarts automatically as soon
etc....). The engine restarts automatically as soon
as you want to move off. The Stop & Start system
as you want to move off. The Stop & Start system
reduces fuel consumption and exhaust emissions
reduces fuel consumption and exhaust emissions
and provides the comfort of complete silence when
and provides the comfort of complete silence when
stationary
Directional lighting
This lighting automatically provides additional
This lighting automatically provides additional
visibility when cornering.
Panoramic sunroof
This roof provides incomparable visibility and light
in the passenger compartment.
.
201
213, 219 198
200
Familiarisation
5
Exterior
Visual and audible front and rear
Visual and audible front and rear
parking sensors
parking sensors
This system warns you if an obstacle is detected
This system warns you if an obstacle is detected
behind or in front of the vehicle in reverse or
forward gear.
Parking space sensor
This system measures the size of the parking space
available between two vehicles or obstacles.
Temporary puncture repair kit
Temporary puncture repair kit
This kit is a complete system, consisting of a
This kit is a complete system, consisting of a
compressor and an integrated sealant product, for the
compressor and an integrated sealant product, for the
temporary repair of a tyre.
In an automatic car wash:
- remove the aerial,
- fold back the mirrors.
Reversing camera
This system is activated automatically
when engaging reverse, and provides an
image in the colour screen.
image in the colour screen.
81
105
96
Familiarisation
6
Access
Remote control key
A.
Unfolding / Folding the key.
Normal locking
(press once; fixed lighting of the
direction indicators).
Deadlocking the vehicle
(press twice in succession; fixed
lighting of the direction indicators).
Complete or selective unlocking of
the vehicle
(rapid flashing of the direction
indicators).
or
When the light is poor, detected by a sensor,
the remote switching on of the dipped beam
headlamps and sidelamps makes your
approach to the vehicle easier.
This function can be programmed via the
configuration menu.
Fuel tank
1.
Opening the fuel filler flap.
2.
Opening and hooking the fuel filler cap.
The type of fuel to be used is indicated on the
inner face of the fuel filler flap.
Capacity of the tank: approximately 60 litres.
Welcome lighting
On Diesel vehicles, the fuel filler neck
incorporates a misfuel prevention
device which prevents filling with petrol.
.
94
124
Familiarisation
7
Access
Boot
Panoramic sunroof
1.
Opening the blind.
1.
Unlocking the vehicle.
2.
Opening the boot.
2.
Closing the blind.
166
173
63
269
313
367
292,
348,
374
297,
335,
377
265
Familiarisation
8
Interior
Electric parking brake
This combines the functions of
automatic application
on switching off the engine and
automatic release
on
acceleration.
The driver can intervene at any time to apply or release the
parking brake manually by operating the control lever.
Audio and communication systems
This equipment benefits from the latest technology:
MP3 compatible PEUGEOT Connect Sound (RD5),
PEUGEOT Connect USB, Bluetooth, PEUGEOT
Connect Media Navigation (NG4 3D) or PEUGEOT
Connect Navigation (RT6) with 16/9 retractable
colour screen, JBL audio system, auxiliary sockets.
Head-up display
This system projects certain information into the field
of vision of the driver: speed, cruise control/speed
limiter and Distance alert.
Dual-zone digital air conditioning
This system allows different levels of comfort to be
set for the driver and front passenger. It then controls
these levels automatically according to the ambient
conditions.
PEUGEOT Connect Sound (RD5)
PEUGEOT Connect Navigation (RT6)
PEUGEOT Connect USB
Bluetooth
PEUGEOT Assistance
PEUGEOT Connect Media Navigation (NG4 3D)
.
Familiarisation
9
Instruments and controls
1.
Cruise control / speed limiter switches.
2.
Steering wheel adjustment.
3.
Lighting and direction indicator stalk.
4.
Instrument panel.
5.
Driver's airbag.
Horn.
6.
Gear lever.
7.
Electric parking brake.
8.
12 V accessories socket.
9.
Panoramic sunroof control.
10.
Owner's Handbook storage compartment.
11.
Bonnet release.
12.
Door mirror controls.
Electric window controls.
Child lock.
13.
Manual headlamp height adjustment.
14.
Side switch panel.
15.
Front door window demist/defrost vent.
16.
Windscreen demist/defrost vent.
Familiarisation
10
Instruments and controls
1.
Steering lock and ignition.
2.
Audio and telematics system steering
wheel control.
3.
Wash-wipe / trip computer stalk.
4.
Central adjustable vents.
5.
Head-up display.
6.
Multifunction screen.
7.
Deactivation of the passenger's airbag.
8.
Side adjustable air vent.
9.
Glove box - Audio/video sockets.
10.
Centre console.
11.
12 V accessories socket.
12.
Heating / air conditioning controls.
13.
Audio and telematics system.
14.
Selector buttons.
.
66
67
Familiarisation
11
Sitting comfortably
Driver's seat
Forwards-backwards
Height
Manual adjustment
Electric adjustment
Seat back angle
68, 69
80
119, 122
Familiarisation
12
Sitting comfortably
Front seats
Head restraint height and
angle
Lumbar
Steering wheel adjustment
1.
Releasing the adjustment mechanism.
2.
Adjustment of height and reach.
3.
Locking the adjustment mechanism.
As a safety precaution, these operations must
only be carried out when stationary.
Centre console
This has a large storage area (with recesses
for 2 bottles, ...) for the front passengers and,
according to version, a multimedia system for
the rear passengers.
.
78
79
79 158
Familiarisation
13
Sitting comfortably
Door mirrors
Adjustment
A.
Selection of the mirror to be adjusted.
B.
Adjustment of the position of the mirror in
the four directions.
Rear view mirror
Manual model
1.
Selection of the "day" position of the mirror.
2.
Adjustment of the mirror.
Automatic day/night model
1.
Adjustment of the mirror.
Front seat belts
1.
Fastening the buckle.
2.
Height adjustment.
Also...
C.
Folding / Unfolding.
101
102
152
109
110
Familiarisation
14
Seeing clearly
Lighting
Ring A
Lighting off.
Ring B
Sidelamps.
Dipped / main beam headlamps.
Rear foglamp.
or
Front and rear foglamps.
Automatic illumination of headlamps.
Direction indicators
Raise or lower the lighting stalk passing the
point of resistance; the corresponding direction
indicators will flash for as long as the stalk
remains in this position.
"Three fl ashes" function
Press the lighting stalk up or down once,
without passing the point of resistance; the
corresponding direction indicators will flash
three times.
This function can be used at any speed, but it
is particularly useful when changing lane on
high-speed roads.
Wipers
Stalk A: windscreen wipers
Switching on "AUTO"
Press the stalk down and release it.
Switching off "AUTO"
Push the stalk up and return it to
position
"0"
.
Ring B: rear wiper
Park.
Intermittent wipe.
Wash-wipe.
.
Familiarisation
15
Digital air conditioning:
we recommend use of the fully automatic mode by pressing the
"AUTO"
button.
Ventilation
Recommended interior settings
I require ...
Heating or Manual Air Conditioning
Air distribution
Air flow
Air recirculation /
Air recirculation / Air recirculation /
Intake of outside air
Temperature
Manual A/C
HOT
COLD
DEMISTING
DEFROSTING
27
30
198
156
87
201
195
173
152
175
92
Familiarisation
16
Monitoring
Instrument panels
A.
With the ignition on, the needle should
indicate the level of fuel remaining.
B.
With the engine running, its associated low
level warning lamp should go off.
C.
With the ignition on, the oil level indicator
should display
"OIL OK"
for a few seconds
(depending on version).
If the levels are not correct, top up the levels
which are low.
Warning lamps
1.
With the ignition on, the orange and red
warning lamps come on.
2.
With the engine running, these warning
lamps should go off.
If warning lamps remain on, refer to the section
in question.
Switch panels
Lighting of the indicator lamp indicates the
status of the corresponding function.
A.
Visual and audible parking
sensors.
B.
ASR/DSC OFF
C.
Volumetric alarm.
D.
Parking space sensors.
E.
Stop & Start.
F.
Head-up display.
G.
Hazard warning lamps.
Side
Central
H.
Distance alert.
I.
Central locking.
.
163
159
151
Familiarisation
17
Passenger safety
Passenger's front airbag
1.
Insert the key.
2.
Select the position:
"OFF"
(deactivation), with "rear facing" child seat,
"ON"
(activation), with front passenger or
"forwards facing" child seat.
3.
Remove the key keeping the switch in the
new position.
Seat belts and passenger's
front airbag
A.
Front and/or rear seat belts not fastened /
unfastened warning lamp.
B.
Front left seat belt warning lamp.
C.
Front right seat belt warning lamp.
D.
Rear right seat belt warning lamp.
E.
Rear centre seat belt warning lamp.
F.
Rear left seat belt warning lamp.
G.
Passenger's front airbag deactivated
warning lamp.
H.
Passenger's front airbag activated warning
lamp.
Electric child lock
Lighting of the indicator lamp indicates the
status of the corresponding function.
Locking of the rear doors and deactivation of
the rear electric window controls.
7 seat version (3rd row)
I.
Rear right seat belt warning lamp.
J.
Rear left seat belt warning lamp.
73
74
74
Familiarisation
18
Arranging your seats
Rigid panel
Putting the seats back in place
Raise the seat back and push it rearwards
until it locks.
From the boot
Pull the strap
B
to release the seat and
push the seat back forwards gently.
Folding the seats in
the 2nd row
Pull the strap
A
upwards firmly to release
the seat and continue to pull until the seat
is fully folded.
Access to
the 3rd row seats
Close the aircraft style tables on
the 2
nd
row seats if they are open.
Hold the control
D
up, the seat is released
and the seat base rises to the seat back.
Push the seat back forwards, holding the
control
D
forwards.
7 seat version
After folding the seats, slide the catch
C
.
.
75, 127
75, 127
Familiarisation
19
Arranging your seats (7 seat version)
Pull the strap
E
and guide the seat until the
assembly locks.
Fold the concertina boards forwards.
Lower the head restraints and place the
concertina board in the vertical position
behind the seat.
While pulling the strap
F
, push the seat
F , push the seat F
back forwards gently.
Remove the load space screen from its
storage compartment and position it behind
the 2
nd
row seats.
Place the rigid panels of the 2
nd
row
seats upright and lock them then fold the
concertina boards rearwards.
Remove the load space cover and store it
in its housing.
Changing from 7 to 5 seats
Changing from 5 to 7 seats
195
Familiarisation
20
Driving safely
Stop & Start
Going into engine STOP mode
The
"ECO"
warning lamp comes on
in the instrument panel and the engine
automatically goes into standby, w
ith
an electronic gearbox:
at speeds
below 5 mph (8 km/h), press the brake pedal or
put the gear lever in position
N
.
In some circumstances, STOP mode may not
be available; the
"ECO"
warning lamp flashes
for few seconds, then goes off.
Going into engine START mode
The "
ECO
" warning lamp goes off
and the engine restarts
with an
electronic gearbox
:
In some circumstances START mode may be
invoked automatically; the
"ECO"
warning lamp
flashes for a few seconds, then goes off.
Deactivation / Reactivation
You can deactivate the system at any time by
pressing the
"ECO OFF"
button; the warning
lamp in the button comes on.
The system is reactivated automatically
at every new start using the key.
Before refuelling or doing anything
under the bonnet, you must switch off
the ignition using the key.
- gear lever in position
A
or
M
, release the
brake pedal,
- or with the gear lever in position
N
and the
brake pedal released, move the gear lever
to position
A
or
M
,
- or engage reverse gear.
.
166
Familiarisation
21
Driving safely
Electric parking brake
Manual application / release
The parking brake can be
applied manually
by
pulling
the control lever
A
.
When the ignition is on, the parking brake can
be
released
manually by
pressing the brake
pedal
and
pulling
then
releasing
the control
lever
A
.
Automatic application / release
Press the accelerator, press and and release
the clutch (manual gearbox), the parking brake
is released automatically and progressively on
acceleration.
With the vehicle stationary, when the
engine
is switched off
, the parking brake is
is switched off , the parking brake is is switched off
applied
automatically.
Before getting out of the
vehicle, check that the
braking warning lamp (
red !
)
and the warning lamp
P
,
P , P
located in the control lever
A
are on fixed (not flashing).
If this warning lamp is on in the instrument
panel, the automatic application/release
is
deactivated
, in this case use the
manual application/release.
If you are towing a trailer or a caravan
or if the gradient is likely to change
(transport by ship, lorry, towing, ...),
apply the parking brake manually to
maximum force (long pull on control
lever
A
) to immobilise the vehicle.
A ) to immobilise the vehicle. A
When the door is opened with the engine
running an audible signal is heard, apply
the parking brake manually.
Do not leave a child alone in the vehicle
with the ignition on, they could release the
parking brake.
170
173 175
Familiarisation
22
Your vehicle is equipped with a system which
keeps it immobile for a short time (approximately
2 seconds) to assist you when starting on a hill,
the time required for you to move your foot from
the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal.
This system only operates:
- when the vehicle has been completely
stopped with your foot on the brake pedal,
- on certain gradients,
- when the driver's door is closed.
Driving safely
Head-up display
1.
Head-up display on / off.
2.
Brightness adjustment.
3.
Display height adjustment.
Distance alert
1.
Distance alert on /off.
2.
Alert value increase / decrease.
Hill start assist
The adjustments must be made with the
engine running and the vehicle stationary.
Do not get out of the vehicle during
the hill start assist temporary holding
phase.
.
178 181
Familiarisation
23
Driving safely
Speed limiter "LIMIT"
1.
Limiter mode Selection / Off.
2.
Decrease the programmed value.
3.
Increase the programmed value.
4.
Speed limiter On / Off.
Cruise control "CRUISE"
1.
Cruise control mode Selection / Off.
2.
Programme a speed / Decrease the
programmed value.
3.
Programme a speed / Increase the
programmed value.
4.
Cruise control Off / Resume.
Display in the instrument panel
The cruise control or speed limiter mode
appears in the instrument panel when it is
selected.
Cruise control
Speed limiter
The values must be set with the engine
running.
In order to be programmed or activated,
the vehicle speed must be higher than
25 mph (40 km/h), with at least fourth
gear engaged on the manual gearbox
(second gear for an electronic or
automatic gearbox).
186 191
Familiarisation
24
Driving safely
Electronic gearbox
This 6-speed electronic gear control gearbox offers
a choice between the comfort of fully automatic
operation or the pleasure of manual gear changing.
1.
Gear lever.
2.
Button
"S" (sport)
.
"Porsche Tiptronic System"
automatic gearbox
This six-speed gearbox offers a choice between
the comfort of fully automatic operation or the
pleasure of manual gear changing.
1.
Gear lever.
2.
Button
"S" (sport)
.
3.
Button
"
" (snow)
.
Moving off
Select position
N
and press the brake
pedal firmly while starting the engine.
Engage first gear (position
A
or
M
) or
reverse (position
R
) using the gear lever
R ) using the gear lever R
1
.
Take your foot off the brake pedal then
accelerate.
Moving off
Select position
P
or
N
and press the brake
pedal firmly while starting the engine.
Select position
R
,
D
or
M
.
Take your foot off the brake pedal, then
accelerate.
3.
Steering mounted
"-"
paddle.
4.
Steering mounted
"+"
paddle.
.
Familiarisation
25
Eco-driving
Optimise the use of your
gearbox
With a manual gearbox, move off gently and
change up without waiting. During acceleration
change up early.
With an automatic or electronic gearbox,
give preference to automatic mode and avoid
pressing the accelerator pedal heavily or
suddenly.
The gear shift indicator invites you engage the
most suitable gear: as soon as the indication
is displayed in the instrument panel, follow it
straight away.
With an electronic or automatic gearbox, this
indicator appears only in manual mode.
Drive smoothly
Maintain a safe distance between vehicles,
use engine braking rather than the
brake pedal, and press the accelerator
progressively. These practices contribute
towards a reduction in fuel consumption and
CO
2
emissions and also helps reduce the
background traffic noise.
If your vehicle has cruise control, make use of
the system at speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h)
when the traffic is flowing well.
Remember to make use of equipment that can
help keep the temperature in the passenger
compartment down (sunroof and window
blinds...).
Switch off the air conditioning, unless it has
automatic regulation, as soon as the desired
temperature is attained.
Switch off the demisting and defrosting
controls, if not automatic.
Switch off the heated seat as soon as
possible.
Switch off the headlamps and front foglamps
when the level of light does not require their
use.
Avoid running the engine before moving off,
particularly in winter; your vehicle will warm up
much faster while driving.
Eco-driving is a range of everyday practices that allow the motorist to optimise their fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions.
As a passenger, if you avoid connecting
your multimedia devices (film, music, video
game...), you will contribute towards limiting
the consumption of electrical energy, and so
of fuel.
Disconnect your portable devices before
leaving the vehicle.
Control the use of your
electrical equipment
Before moving off, if the passenger
compartment is too warm, ventilate it by
opening the windows and air vents before
using the air conditioning.
Above 30 mph (50 km/h), close the windows
and leave the air vents open.
Familiarisation
26
Limit the causes of excess
consumption
Spread loads throughout the vehicle; place the
heaviest items in the bottom of the boot, as
close as possible to the rear seats.
Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and
reduce wind resistance (roof bars, roof rack,
bicycle carrier, trailer...). Use a roof box in
preference.
Remove roof bars and roof racks after use.
At the end of winter, remove snow tyres and
refit your summer tyres.
Observe the recommendations on maintenance
Check the tyre pressures regularly, when cold,
referring to the label in the door aperture,
driver's side.
Have your vehicle serviced regularly (engine
oil, oil filter, air filter...) and observe the
schedule of operations recommended by the
manufacturer.
Carry out this check in particular:
- before a long journey,
- at each change of season,
- after a long period out of use.
Don't forget the spare wheel and the tyres on
any trailer or caravan.
When refuelling, do not continue after the third
cut-off of the nozzle to avoid any overflow.
At the wheel of your new vehicle, it is only after
the first 1 800 miles (3 000 kilometres) that
you will see the fuel consumption settle down
to a consistent average.
1
Monitoring
27
Instrument panels
Panel grouping together the vehicle operation indication dials and warning lamps.
Dials
1.
Rev counter.
Indicates the engine speed (x 1 000 rpm).
2.
Coolant temperature.
Indicates the temperature of the engine
coolant (°Celsius).
3.
Fuel level.
Indicates the quantity of fuel remaining in
the tank.
4.
Speedometer.
Indicates the current speed of the moving
vehicle (mph or km/h).
5.
Screen.
6.
Display zero reset or service indicator
re-display button.
Resets the selected function to zero (trip
distance recorder or service indicator) or
displays the service indicator again.
7.
Instrument panel lighting dimmer.
Adjusts the brightness of the lighting of
the instruments and controls, if the vehicle
lighting is on.
For more information, refer to the
section corresponding to the button or
function and its associated display.
Monitoring
28
Screen(s)
Instrument panel navigator
This group of buttons permits:
-
When stationary
, configuration of the
When stationary , configuration of the When stationary
vehicle's equipment and the screen
settings (languages, units...),
-
While driving
, scrolling of the active
functions (trip computer, navigation...).
Controls
There are four buttons to control the screen in
the instrument panel:
1.
Access the main menu, confirm the
selection.
2.
Move up through the menu.
3.
Move down through the menu.
4.
Return to the previous display, exit from the
menu.
A.
Speed limiter
Speed limiter Speed limiter
or
Cruise control.
(mph or km/h)
B.
Trip distance recorder.
(miles or km)
C.
Service indicator.
(miles or km) or,
Engine oil level indicator
(depending on version).
or
distance recorder.
(miles or km)
D.
Gear shift indicator
.
Gear shift indicator . Gear shift indicator
Electronic or automatic gearbox.
E.
Warning messages and function
status messages, trip computer,
GPS navigation information.
1
Monitoring
29
Vehicle parameters
This menu allows you to activate or deactivate
certain driving and comfort equipment * :
- wiper linked with reverse gear (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- selective unlocking (refer to the "Access"
section),
- guide-me-home and welcome lighting
(refer to the "Visibility" section),
- interior mood lighting (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- directional headlamps (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- automatic or manual parking brake (refer to
the "Driving" section).
Choice of units
This menu allows you to select the units:
temperature (°Celsius or °Fahrenheit) and fuel
consumption (l/100 km, mpg or km/l).
Choice of language
This menu allows you to select the display
language.
Main menu
Press button
1
for access to the main menu
and select one of the following functions:
- "Vehicle parameters",
- "Choice of language",
- "Choice of units".
Press button
2
or
3
to move in the screen.
Press button
1
again to confirm the
selection.
The main menu and its associated
functions can only be accessed when
stationary, via buttons
1
to
4
.
A message appears in the screen,
above a certain speed threshold,
indicating that the main menu cannot be
displayed.
The trip computer displays can only be
accessed while driving, via buttons
2
and
3
(refer to the "Trip computer"
section).
* According to country.
Monitoring
30
Left-hand
direction
indicato
r
flashing with buzzer.
The lighting stalk is pushed down.
Right-hand
direction
indicator
flashing with buzzer.
The lighting stalk is pushed up.
Operation indicator lamps
If one of the following indicator lamps comes on, this confirms that the corresponding system has
come into operation.
Warning lamp
is on
Cause
Action/Observations
Sidelamps
fixed.
The lighting stalk is in
the "Sidelamps" position.
Indicator and warning lamps
When the ignition is switched on
Certain warning lamps come on for a few
seconds when the vehicle's ignition is switched
on.
When the engine is started, these same
warning lamps should go off.
If they remain on, before moving off, refer to the
information on the warning lamp concerned.
Associated warnings
The illumination of certain warning lamps may
be accompanied by an audible signal and a
message in the multifunction screen.
Visual indicators informing the driver that a system is in operation (operation or deactivation
indicator lamps) or of the occurrence of a fault (warning lamp).
The warning lamps may come on
continuously (fixed) or flash.
Certain warning lamps may come on
in one of two different modes. Only by
relating the type of illumination to the
operating status of the vehicle can it
be ascertained whether the situation is
normal or whether a fault has occurred.
1
Monitoring
31
Diesel engine
pre-heating
fixed.
The ignition switch is at the
2nd position (ignition on).
Wait until the warning lamp has switched off before starting.
The duration for which the warning lamp is on is determined
by the climatic conditions.
Dipped beam
headlamps
fixed.
The lighting stalk is in the "Dipped
beam headlamps" position.
Main beam
headlamps
fixed.
The lighting stalk is pulled towards
you.
Pull the stalk to return to dipped beam headlamps.
Front foglamps
fixed.
The front foglamps are switched on.
Turn the ring on the stalk rearwards twice
to switch off the front foglamps.
Rear foglamps
fixed.
The rear foglamps are switched on.
Turn the ring on the stalk rearwards to switch off the
rear foglamps.
Electric parking
brake
fixed.
The electric parking brake is applied.
Release the electric parking brake to switch off the
warning lamp: with your foot on the brake pedal, pull
the electric parking brake control lever.
Observe the safety recommendations.
For more information on the electric parking brake,
refer to the corresponding section.
Warning lamp
is on
Cause
Action/Observations
Monitoring
32
Warning lamp
is on
Cause
Action/Observations
Deactivation of
the automatic
functions of the
electric parking
brake
fixed.
The "automatic application" (on
switching off the engine) and
"automatic release" functions are
deactivated or faulty.
Activate the function (according to country) via the vehicle
configuration menu or contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop if automatic application / release is not possible.
The parking brake can be released manually using the
emergency release procedure.
For more information on the electric parking brake, refer to the
corresponding section.
Foot on the
brake pedal
fixed.
The brake pedal must be pressed.
Press the brake pedal to start the engine with an
electronic gearbox (lever in position
N
) or automatic
gearbox (lever in position
P
).
If you wish to release the parking brake without
pressing the brake pedal, this warning lamp will
remain on..
flashing.
In the case of an electronic gearbox,
if you hold the vehicle on an incline
using the accelerator for too long, the
clutch overheats.
Use the brake pedal and/or the electric parking brake.
Parking space
sensors
fixed.
The parking space sensors function
is active.
Press the corresponding button to deactivate it.
flashing.
The system is measuring the space.
Once the measurement has been done, the warning
lamp comes on fixed again.
Stop & Start
fixed.
When the vehicle stops (red lights,
traffic jams, ...) the Stop & Start system
has put the engine into STOP mode.
The warning lamp goes off and the engine restarts
automatically in START mode, as soon as you want
to move off.
flashes for a few
seconds, then goes
off.
STOP mode is temporarily unavailable.
or
START mode is invoked automatically.
For more information on special cases with STOP
mode and START mode, refer to the "Stop & Start"
section.
1
Monitoring
33
Deactivation indicator lamps
If one of the following indicator lamps comes on, this confirms that the corresponding system has been switched off intentionally.
This is may be accompanied by an audible signal and a message on the multifunction screen.
Warning lamp
is on
Cause
Action/Observations
Passenger's
airbag system
fixed.
The control, located in the glove box,
is set to the
OFF
position.
The passenger's front airbag is
deactivated.
In this case you can install
a "rear facing" child seat.
Set the control to the
ON
position to activate the
passenger's front airbag.
In this case, do not fit a child seat in the
rear-facing position.
Monitoring
34
Warning lamps
When the engine is running or the vehicle is being driven, the illumination of one of the following warning lamps indicates a fault which requires action
on the part of the driver.
Any fault resulting in the illumination of a warning lamp must be investigated further by reading the associated message in the multifunction screen.
If you encounter any problems, do not hesitate to contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Warning lamp
is on
Cause
Action/Observations
STOP
fixed, alone or
associated with
another warning lamp,
accompanied by an
audible signal and a
message in the screen.
Illumination of this warning lamp is
associated with a serious fault with
the braking system, power steering,
engine lubrication system or cooling
system.
Stop as soon as it is safe to do so as there is a risk
that the engine will cut out while driving.
Park, switch off the ignition and contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Service
on temporarily.
A minor fault has occurred for which
there is no specific warning lamp.
Identify the fault by reading the message shown in the
screen, such as, for example:
- opening of the doors, boot or bonnet,
- low engine oil level,
- low screenwash level,
- flat remote control battery,
- saturation of the particle emission filter (Diesel)
As soon as traffic conditions permit, regenerate
the filter by driving at a speed of at least 36 mph
(60 km/h) until the service warning lamp goes off.
- a fault with the tyre under-inflation detection
system,
- ...
For any other faults, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
fixed.
A major fault has occurred for which
there is no specific warning lamp.
Identify the fault by reading the message shown
on the screen and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
1
Monitoring
35
Electric parking
brake
flashing.
The electric parking brake is not
applied automatically.
The application/release is faulty.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Park on flat level ground, engage a gear (or place the
lever in position
P
for an automatic gearbox), switch
off the ignition and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Electric parking
brake fault
fixed.
The electric parking brake has a fault.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop
without delay.
For more information on the electric parking brake,
refer to the corresponding section.
Warning lamp
is on
Cause
Action/Observations
Braking
fixed, associated with
the STOP warning
lamp.
The braking system fluid level has
dropped significantly.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Top up with brake fluid recommended by PEUGEOT.
If the problem persists, have the system checked by a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
+
fixed, associated with the
electric parking brake
malfunction warning
lamp, if the parking brake
is released.
The braking system has a fault.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Park, switch off the ignition and contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
+
fixed, associated with
the STOP and ABS
warning lamps.
The electronic brake force distribution
(EBFD) system has a fault.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Anti-lock
Braking System
(ABS)
fixed.
The anti-lock braking system has a
fault.
The vehicle retains conventional braking.
Drive carefully at reduced speed and contact a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop without
delay.
Monitoring
36
Warning lamp
is on
Cause
Action/Observations
Engine
autodiagnosis
system
flashing.
The engine management system has
a fault.
Risk of destruction of the catalytic converter.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
fixed.
The emission control system has a
fault.
The warning lamp should go off when the engine is started.
If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or qualified
workshop without delay.
Low fuel level
fixed with the needle
in the red zone.
When it first comes on there remains
approximately
6 litres
of fuel in the
tank.
At this point, you begin to use the fuel
reserve.
Refuel as soon as possible to avoid running out of
fuel.
This warning lamp will come on every time the ignition
is switched on, until a sufficient addition of fuel is
made.
Fuel tank capacity: approximately
60 litres
.
Never continue to drive until you run out of fuel, as
this could damage the emission control and injection
systems.
Maximum coolant
temperature
fixed with the needle in
the red zone.
The temperature of the cooling
system is too high.
Stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Wait until the engine has cooled down before topping
up the level, if necessary.
If the problem persists, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Dynamic
stability control
(DSC/ASR)
flashing.
The DSC/ASR regulation is
operating.
The system optimises traction and improves the
directional stability of the vehicle.
fixed.
Unless it has been deactivated
(button pressed and its indicator lamp
on) the DSC/ASR system has a fault.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT or a qualified
workshop.
1
Monitoring
37
Engine oil
pressure
fixed.
There is a fault with the engine
lubrication system.
You must stop as soon it is safe to do so.
Park, switch off the ignition and contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Battery charge
fixed.
The battery charging circuit has a
fault (dirty or loose terminals, slack or
cut alternator belt, ...).
The warning lamp should go off when the engine is
started.
If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Warning lamp
is on
Cause
Action/Observations
Front seat belt
not fastened/
unfastened
fixed then flashing
accompanied by an
increasing audible
signal.
The driver and/or the front passenger
has not fastened or has unfastened
their seat belt.
Pull the strap then insert the tongue in the buckle.
Rear seat belt
not fastened/
unfastened
fixed then flashing
accompanied by an
audible signal.
One or more rear passengers have
unfastened their seat belt.
Door(s) open
fixed if the speed is
below 6 mph (10 km/h).
A door, the boot, the lower tailgate
or the bonnet (with alarm only) is still
open.
Close the door or boot.
fixed and accompanied
by an audible signal
if the speed is above
6 mph (10 km/h).
Monitoring
38
Warning lamp
is on
Cause
Action/Observations
Directional
headlamps
flashing.
The directional headlamps system
has a fault.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Under-inflation
fixed.
The pressure in one or more wheels
is too low.
Check the pressure of the tyres as soon as possible.
This check should preferably be carried out when the
tyres are cold.
+
flashing then fixed,
accompanied by the
Service warning lamp.
The tyre pressure monitoring system
has a fault or no sensor is detected
on one of the wheels.
Under-inflation detection is not assured.
Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Airbags
on temporarily.
This lamp comes on for a few
seconds when you turn on the
ignition, then goes off.
This lamp should go off when the engine is started.
If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
fixed.
One of the airbag or seat belt
pretensioner systems has a fault.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Water in Diesel
fixed.
The Diesel fuel filter contains water.
Risk of damage to the injection system on Diesel
engines.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop
without delay.
1
Monitoring
39
Coolant temperature indicator
With the engine running, when the needle is:
- in zone
A
, the temperature is correct,
- in zone
B
, the temperature is too high;
the max temperature warning lamp
1
and
the central
STOP
warning lamp come on,
accompanied by an audible signal and a
message in the screen.
After driving for a few minutes, the temperature
and pressure in the cooling system increase.
To top up the level:
wait for the engine to cool,
unscrew the cap by two turns to allow the
pressure to drop,
when the pressure has dropped, remove
the cap,
top up the level to the "MAX" mark.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Wait a few minutes before switching off the
engine.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Monitoring
40
Service indicator
Between 600 miles (1 000 km)
and 1 800 miles (3 000 km) remain
before the next service is due
For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the
spanner symbolising the service operations comes
on. The distance recorder display line indicates the
distance remaining before the next service is due.
Example:
1 700 miles (2 800 km) remain before
the next service is due.
For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the
screen indicates:
5 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
the spanner goes off
; the distance recorder
the spanner goes off ; the distance recorder the spanner goes off
resumes its normal operation. The screen then
indicates the total and trip distances.
Less than 600 miles (1 000 km)
remain before the next service is due
Example:
560 miles (900 km) remain before
the next service is due.
For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
the screen indicates:
5 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
the distance recorder resumes its normal
operation.
The spanner remains on
to
indicate that a service must be carried out
soon.
More than 1 800 miles (3 000 km)
remain before the next service is due
When the ignition is switched on, no service
information appears in the screen.
System which informs the driver when the
next service is due, in accordance with the
manufacturer's servicing schedule.
The point at which the service is due is
calculated using the distance covered since the
last time the service indicator was reset.
1
Monitoring
41
Service indicator zero reset
After each service, the service indicator must
be reset to zero.
The procedure for resetting to zero is as
follows:
switch off the ignition,
press and hold the trip distance recorder
zero reset button,
switch on the ignition; the distance recorder
display begins a countdown,
when the display indicates
"=0"
,
release the button; the spanner
disappears.
Service overdue
For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
the spanner flashes
to indicate that the service
must be carried out as soon as possible.
Example:
the service is overdue by 186 miles
(300 km).
For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
the screen indicates:
5 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
the distance recorder resumes its normal
operation.
The spanner remains on
.
Retrieving the service
information
You can access the service information at any
time.
Press the trip distance recorder zero reset
button.
The service information is displayed for a
few seconds, then disappears.
Following this operation, if you wish to
disconnect the battery, lock the vehicle
and wait at least five minutes for the
zero reset to be taken into account.
Monitoring
42
Engine oil level indicator *
On versions fitted with an electric oil level
indicator, the state of the engine oil level is
displayed in the instrument panel for a few
seconds when the ignition is switched on,
after the service information.
Oil level correct
Oil level low
Oil level indicator fault
In the event of a fault with the electric indicator,
the engine oil level is no longer monitored.
When the system has a fault, you should check
the engine oil level using the manual dipstick
(located under the bonnet).
This is signalled by the flashing of
"OI L"
, or the
display of a message "Oil level incorrect" in the
instrument panel, accompanied by illumination
of the service warning lamp and an audible
signal.
If the low oil level is confirmed by a check using
the dipstick, the level must be topped up to
prevent damage to the engine.
Refer to the "Checks of levels" section.
This is signalled by the flashing of
"OIL--"
or the display of a message "Oil level
measurement invalid" in the instrument panel
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
The level shown will only be correct if
the vehicle is on level ground and
the engine has been off for more
than 30 minutes.
* Depending on version.
Refer to the "Checks of levels" section.
1
Monitoring
43
Total distance recorder
System which measures the total distance
travelled by the vehicle during its life.
Lighting dimmer
System for manual adjustment of the
brightness of the instrument panel in relation to
the exterior brightness.
The total and trip distances are displayed for
thirty seconds when the ignition is switched off,
when the driver's door is opened and when the
vehicle is locked or unlocked.
Trip distance recorder
System which measures a distance travelled
during a day or other period since it was reset
to zero by the driver.
With the ignition on, press the button until
zeros appear.
Deactivation
When the lighting is off, or in day mode on
vehicles fitted with daytime running lamps,
pressing the button does not have any effect.
Activation
When the vehicle lighting is on:
press the button to change the brightness
of the instrument panel,
when the lighting reaches the minimum
setting, release the button, then press
again to increase it,
or
when the lighting reaches the maximum
setting, release the button, then press
again to reduce it,
when the lighting reaches the level
of brightness required, release the button.
To conform to legislation in the country
you are crossing, change the units
of distance (miles or km) via the
configuration menu.
When the vehicle lighting is on, you
cannot switch the instrument panel
lighting off but you can adjust it to
minimum.
Multifunction screens
44
This displays the following information:
- time,
- date,
- ambient temperature * (this flashes if there
is a risk of ice),
- alert messages,
- trip computer (refer to the end of the
section).
Warning messages (e.g.: "Emission control
system faulty") or information messages (e.g.:
"Boot open") may appear temporarily. Some
can be cleared by pressing the
"ESC"
button.
Monochrome screen A (without audio equipment)
Controls
Main menu
There are three display control buttons:
-
"ESC"
to abandon the operation in
progress,
-
"MENU"
to scroll through the menus or
sub-menus,
-
"OK"
to select the menu or sub-menu
required.
Press the
"MENU"
button to scroll through
the various menus of the
main menu
:
- vehicle configuration,
- options,
- display settings,
- languages,
- units.
Press the
"OK"
button to select the menu
required.
* With air conditioning only.
Displays on the screen
2
Multifunction screens
45
Vehicle confi guration
Options
Once the "Options" menu has been selected,
you can start diagnostics of the status of the
equipment (active, not active, faulty).
Languages
Once the "Languages" menu has been
selected, you can change the language used
by the display (Français, Italiano, Nederlands,
Portugues, Portugues-Brasil, Türkçe, Deutsch,
English, Espanol).
Date and time
Once the "Display settings" menu has been selected,
you can gain access to the following settings:
-
year,
-
month,
-
day,
-
hour,
-
minutes,
-
12 or 24 hour mode.
Units
Once the "Units" menu has been selected, you
can change the units for:
- temperature (°C or °F),
- fuel consumption (l/100 km, mpg or km/l).
Once you have selected a setting, press
the
"OK"
button to change its value.
Wait for approximately ten seconds without
any action to allow the changed data to
be recorded or press the
"ESC"
button to
cancel.
The screen then returns to the normal display.
Once the "Vehicle configuration" menu has
been selected, you can activate or deactivate
the following equipment (according to country):
- wiper linked with reverse gear (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- selective unlocking (refer to the " Access"
section),
- "guide-me-home" and welcome lighting
(refer to the "Visibility" section),
- interior mood lighting (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- directional headlamps (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- automatic or manual parking brake (refer to
the "Driving" section),
- parking space sensors (se the "Driving"
section),
- ...
For safety reasons, configuration of the
multifunction screen by the driver must
only be done when stationary.
Multifunction screens
46
Monochrome screen A (with audio equipment)
Controls
This displays the following information:
- time,
- date,
- ambient temperature * (this flashes if there
is a risk of ice),
- alert messages,
- audio sources (radio, CD, ...),
- trip computer (refer to the corresponding
section).
Warning messages (e.g.: "Emission control
system faulty") or information messages (e.g.:
"Boot open") may appear temporarily. Some
can be cleared by pressing the
" < ] arrow"
button.
Main menu
Press the
"MENU"
button for access to
the
main menu
, then press the "
" or
"
" buttons to scroll through the various
menus:
- radio-CD,
- vehicle configuration,
- options,
- display settings,
- languages,
- units.
Press the
"OK"
button to select the menu
required.
From the audio equipment control panel, you
can:
press the
"MENU"
button to gain access to
the
main menu
,
press the "
" or "
" buttons to scroll
through the items on the screen,
press the
"MODE"
button to change the
permanent application (trip computer,
audio source, ...),
press the "
" or "
" buttons to change a
setting value,
press the
"OK"
button to confirm,
or
Radio-CD
With the audio equipment switched on, once
the "Radio-CD" menu has been selected you
can activate or deactivate the functions linked
with use of the radio (RDS, REG), the CD or the
CD changer (introscan, shuffle, CD repeat).
press this button to abandon the
operation in progress.
* With air conditioning only.
For more information on the "Radio-
CD" application, refer to the "Audio
equipment and telematics" section.
Displays in the screen
2
Multifunction screens
47
Date and time
Once the "DATE AND TIME" menu has been
selected, you can gain access to the following settings:
-
year,
-
month,
-
day,
-
hour,
-
minutes,
-
12 or 24 hour mode.
Languages
Once the "Languages" menu has been
selected, you can change the language used
by the display.
Units
Once the "Units" menu has been selected,
you can change the units of the following
parameters:
- temperature (°C or °F),
- fuel consumption (l/100 km, mpg or km/l).
Once you have selected a setting, press
the "
" or "
" buttons to change its value.
Press the "
" or "
" buttons to switch
respectively to the previous or next setting.
Press the
"OK"
button to record the
change and return to the normal display or
press the
" < ] arrow"
button to cancel.
Vehicle confi guration
Once the "Vehicle Configuration" menu has
been selected, you can activate or deactivate
the following equipment (according to country):
- wiper linked with reverse gear (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- selective unlocking (refer to the "Access"
section),
- guide-me-home and welcome lighting
(refer to the "Visibility" section),
- interior mood lighting (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- directional headlamps (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- automatic or manual parking brake (refer to
the "Driving" section),
- ...
Options
Once the "Options" menu has been selected,
you can start diagnostics of the status of the
equipment (active, not active, faulty).
For safety reasons, configuration of the
multifunction screen by the driver must
only be done when stationary.
Multifunction screens
48
Monochrome screen C (with PEUGEOT Connect Sound (RD5))
Main menu
Displays according to context:
- time,
- date,
- ambient temperature with air conditioning
(the value displayed flashes if there is a
risk of ice),
- audio functions,
- trip computer (see the corresponding
section),
- alert messages,
- screen and vehicle equipment parameter
setting menus.
"Audio functions"
menu
Controls
From the audio equipment control panel, you
can:
press the "
MENU
" button for access to the
main menu
,
press the "
" or "
" buttons to scroll
through the items on the screen,
press the "
MODE
" button to change the
permanent application (trip computer,
audio source...),
press the "
" or "
" buttons to change a
setting value,
press the "
OK
" button to confirm,
or
Press the
"MENU"
button for access to
the
main menu
:
- audio functions,
- trip computer (see the corresponding
section),
- personalisation-configuration,
- telephone (Bluetooth system).
With the audio equipment switched on, once
this menu has been selected you can activate
or deactivate the functions linked with use
of the radio (RDS, REG, RadioText) or CD
(introscan, shuffle, CD repeat).
press this button to abandon the
operation in progress.
Press the "
" or "
" button to select the
menu required, then confirm by pressing
the "
OK
" button.
For more information on the "Audio
functions" application, refer to the
PEUGEOT
Connect Sound (RD5) section.
PEUGEOT Connect Sound (RD5) section. PEUGEOT
Displays in the screen
2
Multifunction screens
49
"Trip computer" menu
Alert log
This summarises the active warning messages,
displaying them in succession in the
multifunction screen
Status of functions
This summarises the status of the functions
present on the vehicle.
Press the
"MENU"
button to gain access
to the general menu.
Press the arrows, then the
"OK"
button to
select the
"Trip computer"
menu.
Once this menu has been selected, you can
consult information concerning the status of the
vehicle (alert log, status of the functions...).
Defi ne the vehicle parameters
Once this menu
has been selected, you can
activate or deactivate the following equipment
(according to country):
- wiper linked with reverse gear (see
"Visibility" section),
- selective unlocking (see the "Access"
section),
- guide-me-home lighting (see the "Visibility"
section),
- interior mood lighting (see the "Visibility"
section),
- directional headlamps (see the "Visibility"
section),
- automatic or manual parking brake (see
the "Driving" section),
- ...
"Personalisation-
Configuration" menu
Once this menu has been selected, you can
gain access to the following functions:
- define the vehicle parameters,
- display configuration,
- choice of language.
On the
"Trip computer"
menu, select one
of the applications:
This allows you to enter an approximate value
for the distance to the final destination.
Enter the distance to the
destination
Multifunction screens
50
Display confi guration
Once this menu has been selected, you have
access to the following settings:
- brightness-video setting,
- date and time setting,
- selection of the units.
Adjusting the date and time
Press the "
" or "
" button to select the
"Display configuration" menu, then the
"OK"
button.
Press the "
" or "
" button, to select the
"Adjust date and time" line, then on the
"OK"
button.
Press the "
" or "
" button to select the
setting to modify. Conform by pressing the
"OK"
button then adjust the setting and
confirm again to save the modification.
Example: setting of the duration of the guide-
me-home lighting
Press the "
" or "
" buttons, then the "
OK
"
button to select the menu required.
Press the "
" or "
" buttons, then the
"
OK
" button to select the "Guide-me-home
headlamps" line.
Press the "
" or "
" buttons to set the
value required (15, 30 or 60 seconds), then
press the "
OK
" button to confirm.
Press the "
" or "
" buttons, then the "
OK
"
button to select the "
OK
" box and confirm
or press the "
< ] arrow
" button to cancel.
"Telephone" menu
With the audio equipment switched on, once
this menu has been selected you can configure
your Bluetooth hands-free kit (pairing), consult
the various telephone directories (calls log,
services...) and manage your communications
(pick up, hang up, call waiting, secret mode...).
For more information on the telephone
application, refer to the
PEUGEOT
Connect Sound (RD5) section.
For safety reasons, configuration of the
multifunction screen by the driver must
only be done when stationary.
Choice of language
Once this menu has been selected, you can
change the screen display language.
Adjust the settings one by one, confirming
with the "
OK
" button.
Press the "
" or "
" button, then the
"OK"
button to select the
"OK"
box and confirm,
or the
"Back"
button to cancel.
2
Multifunction screens
51
When the screen is unfolded, it displays the
following information:
- time,
- date,
- altitude,
- ambient temperature (the value displayed
flashes if there is a risk of ice),
- audio functions,
- satellite navigation system information.
- visual parking assistance,
- the result of the measurement of free
space,
- contacts and telephone information,
- configuration menus for the screen and the
navigation system,
From the navigation system control panel:
press the dedicated
"RADIO"
,
"MUSIC"
,
"NAV"
,
"TRAFFIC"
,
"SETUP"
or
"PHONE"
button for access to the
corresponding menu,
16/9 retractable colour screen (with PEUGEOT Connect Navigation (RT6) or PEUGEOT Connect Media Navigation (NG4 3D))
Controls
and with
PEUGEOT
Connect Navigation (RT6):
- alert messages,
- the image from the reversing camera,
- trip computer information,
- the configuration menu for vehicle systems.
press the this button to abandon
the current operation and return
to the previous display.
For more information on these
applications, refer to the "Audio
equipment and telematics" section.
For operation of the retractable screen
(opening, closing, adjustment of the
position, etc.), refer to the paragraph
"Access to the retractable screen".
Displays in the screen
turn the navigator to move the selection,
press the navigator to confirm the
selection,
or
Multifunction screens
52
"SETUP" menu (
PEUGEOT
Connect
PEUGEOT Connect PEUGEOT
Media Navigation (NG4 3D))
Press the
"SETUP"
menu for access to
the
"SETUP" menu
. It allows you to adjust
settings for the following functions:
- "Languages and voice functions"
- "Date and time",
- "Display screen",
- "Units",
- "System parameters".
Languages (
PEUGEOT
Connect
Navigation (RT6))
This menu allows you to select the language
used by the display.
Languages and voice functions
(
PEUGEOT
Connect Media
Navigation (NG4 3D))
This menu allows you to:
- select the language used by the display,
- select the settings for voice recognition
(on/off, instructions on use, personal voice
training...),
- adjust the volume of the voice synthesiser.
Date and time
Press "SETUP".
Select "Display configuration" and confirm.
Select "Adjust date and time" and confirm.
Select "Synchronise minutes with GPS" for the
adjustment of minutes to be done automatically
by satellite reception.
Select the setting to modify. Conform by
pressing "OK", then adjust the setting and
confirm again.
Adjust the settings one by one.
Select "OK" in the screen then confirm to
save the settings.
Display
This menu allows you to set the brightness of
the screen, the screen colour scheme and the
colour of the map (day/night or auto mode).
Units
This menu allows you to select the units:
temperature (°C or °F) and fuel consumption
(km/l, l/100 or mpg).
System parameters
This menu allows you to restore the factory
configuration, display the software version and
activate scrolling text.
For safety reasons, configuration of the
multifunction screen by the driver must
only be done when stationary.
* According to country.
Vehicle parameters (
PEUGEOT
Connect Navigation (RT6))
This men
u allows you to activate or deactivate
certain driving and comfort equipment * :
- wiper linked with reverse gear (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- selective unlocking (refer to the "Access"
section),
- guide-me-home and welcome lighting
(refer to the "Visibility" section),
- interior mood lighting (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- directional headlamps (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- automatic or manual parking brake
(refer to the "Driving" section),
- ...
Press the
"SETUP"
button for access to
the
"SETUP"
menu. This allows you to
select from the following functions:
- "Languages",
- "Date and time",
- "Display",
- "Vehicle parameters",
- "Units",
- "System".
"SETUP" menu (
PEUGEOT
Connect Navigation (RT6))
PEUGEOT Connect Navigation (RT6)) PEUGEOT
2
Multifunction screens
53
The screen opens automatically when the ignition
is switched on. It closes automatically three
seconds after switching off the ignition if the
audio and telematics system is switched off.
You can open or close the screen at any time,
with the ignition on, using control
A
.
- Press button
A
: the screen folds.
- Press button
A
again: the screen opens
again.
Adjusting the angle of the screen
You can adjust the angle of the screen to one of
four defined positions, by repeated presses on
the front or back of the control
B
. The position
of the screen is memorised on closing.
If you have closed the screen, it will
open again automatically:
- on switching on the of the audio
and navigation system (unless it
had been closed manually while the
system was in operation),
- when an outgoing telephone call is
made,
- when a voice command is given,
- when a warning message linked
with the STOP warning lamp is
displayed (
PEUGEOT
Connect
Navigation (RT6)).
Access to the retractable
screen
Multifunction screens
54
Trip computer
Press the button, located at the end of the
wiper stalk
, to display the various items of
trip computer data in succession.
The trip computer provides the following
information:
System that gives you information on the journey in progress (range, fuel consumption…).
Press the control for more than two
seconds to reset to zero the distance
travelled, the average fuel consumption
and the average speed.
Monochrome screen A
Zero reset
Information displays
- range,
- current fuel consumption,
- distance travelled,
- average fuel consumption,
- average speed.
The next press returns you to the normal
display.
2
Multifunction screens
55
Monochrome screen C
Instrument panel screen
16/9 colour screen
Trip computer
Information displays
On the screen C or the colour screen
Press the button, located at the end of
the
wiper stalk
, to display the various trip
computer tabs in succession.
On the instrument panel screen
Press the up and down arrows on the
navigator to display the various trip
computer tabs in succession.
System which provides current information concerning the trip (range, consumption…).
Depending on your vehicle's equipment,
the trip computer information appears
on the multifunction screen or on the
instrument panel screen.
Multifunction screens
56
Trip zero reset
With the screen C or the colour screen
When the trip required is displayed, press
the control for more than two seconds.
With the instrument panel screen
When the required trip is displayed, press
the
"OK"
button on the navigator for more
than two seconds.
Trips
"1"
and
"2"
are independent but their use
is identical.
For example, trip
"1"
can be used for daily
figures, and trip
"2"
for monthly figures.
- The current information tab
with:
● t h e r a n g e ,
● the current fuel
consumption,
● the distance remaining to be
travelled.
- The trip
"1"
tab with:
● the distance travelled,
● the average fuel
consumption,
● the average speed,
for the first trip.
- The trip
"2"
tab with:
● the distance travelled,
● the average fuel
consumption,
● the average speed,
for the second trip.
Pressing the button again takes you to a
black screen.
A further press returns you to the normal
display.
2
Multifunction screens
57
Trip computer, a few definitions
When the range falls below 20 miles (30 km),
dashes are displayed. After filling with at least
5 litres of fuel, the range is recalculated and is
displayed when it exceeds 60 miles (100 km).
Range
(miles or km)
The distance which can still be
travelled with the fuel remaining in the tank.
Related to the average fuel consumption over
the last few miles (kilometres) travelled.
Current fuel consumption
(mpg or l/100 km or km/l)
Calculated over the last few seconds.
Average fuel
consumption
(mpg or l/100 km or km/l)
Calculated since the last trip
computer reset.
Distance travelled
(miles or km)
Calculated since the last trip
computer reset.
Average speed
(mph or km/h)
Calculated since the last trip
computer reset.
Stop & Start time counter
(minutes/seconds or hours/minutes)
If your vehicle is fitted with Stop &
Start, a time counter calculates the
time spent in STOP mode during a journey.
It resets to zero every time the ignition is
switched on with the key.
Distance remaining to
destination
(miles or km)
This is the distance remaining to be travelled
to the final destination. It is either calculated
instantly by the navigation system, if guidance
is activated, or entered by the user.
If the distance is not entered, dashes are
displayed in place of the digits.
If dashes are displayed continuously
while driving in place of the digits,
contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
This value may vary following a change
in the style of driving or the relief,
resulting in a significant change in the
current fuel consumption.
This function is only displayed from
20 mph (30 km/h).
Comfort
58
Heating and Ventilation
Controls
The incoming air follows various routes
depending on the controls selected by the
driver, the front passenger and rear passengers,
according to the level of equipment.
The temperature control enables you to obtain
the level of comfort required by mixing the air of
the various circuits.
The air distribution control enables you to select
the air vents used in the passenger compartment
by the combined use of the associated buttons.
The air flow control enables you to increase or
reduce the speed of the ventilation fan.
These controls are grouped together on control
panel
A
on the centre console.
Air intake
The air circulating in the passenger
compartment is filtered and originates either
from the outside via the grille located at the
base of the windscreen or from the inside in air
recirculation mode.
Air distribution
1.
Windscreen demisting/defrosting vents.
2.
Front side window demisting/defrosting
vents.
3.
Side adjustable air vents.
4.
Central adjustable air vents.
5.
Air outlets to the front footwells.
6.
Adjustable air vents for the rear
passengers.
7.
Air outlets to the rear footwells.
System which creates and maintains good
conditions of comfort and visibility in the
vehicle's passenger compartment.
3
Comfort
59
The air conditioning system does not
contain chlorine and does not present
any danger to the ozone layer.
Recommendations for ventilation and air conditioning
In order for these systems to be fully effective, follow the operation and maintenance
guidelines below:
If the interior temperature remains very high after the vehicle has been parked in the sun for
a considerable time, first ventilate the passenger compartment for a few minutes.
Place the air flow control at a sufficient level to provide an adequate renewal of air in the
passenger compartment.
To obtain an even air distribution, take care not to obstruct the exterior air intake grilles
located at the base of the windscreen, the nozzles, the vents and the air outlets, as well
as the air extractor located in the boot.
Use in preference the intake of exterior air as prolonged use of the air recirculation may
cause misting of the windows and side windows.
Do not cover the sunshine sensor, located on the dashboard; this is used for regulation
of the automatic air conditioning system.
Operate the air conditioning system for 5 to 10 minutes, once or twice a month to keep it
in good working order.
Ensure that the passenger compartment filter is in good condition and have the filter
elements replaced regularly (refer to the "Checks" section).
We recommend the use of a combined passenger compartment filter. Thanks to its
second special active filter, it contributes to the purification of the air breathed by the
occupants and the cleanliness of the passenger compartment (reduction of allergic
symptoms, bad odours and greasy deposits).
The air conditioning uses power from the engine while operating. This results in an
increase in the vehicle's fuel consumption.
When towing at or near maximum capacity or on steep slopes in high ambient temperatures,
switching off the air conditioning saves engine power and so improves towing capacity.
Condensation created by the air conditioning results in a discharge of water under the
vehicle when stationary, which is perfectly normal.
To ensure correct operation of the air conditioning system, you are also advised to have it
checked regularly.
If the system does not produce cold air, do not use it and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or
a qualified workshop.
Rear ventilation
adjustment
After pressing the "REAR" button, turn the
adjustment dial of the rear side vents to
decrease or increase the flow of air.
Take care not to obstruct the side vents and the
air outlets on the floor.
To shut off the flow of air, close the vents and
set the dial to 0.
Comfort
60
2. Air fl ow adjustment
Turn the dial from position
1
to position
5
to obtain a
comfortable air flow.
Windscreen, side windows and
front-rear footwells.
Footwells, front-rear
(closing the vents increases the
flow to the footwells).
Central, side and rear vents.
Turn the dial from blue
(cold) to red (hot) to adjust
the temperature to your
requirements.
Windscreen and side windows.
1. Temperature adjustment
The air distribution can be
adapted by placing the dial in an
intermediate position.
The air conditioning can only operate with the
engine running.
4. Air intake/Air recirculation
The intake of exterior air limits misting of the
windscreen and side windows.
The recirculation of interior air insulates the
passenger compartment from exterior odours and
smoke.
Return to exterior air intake as soon as possible
to prevent deterioration of the air quality and
demisting performance.
3. Air distribution adjustment
Press the button to recirculate
the interior air. The indicator
lamp comes on to confirm this.
Press the button again to permit the intake
of exterior air. The indicator lamp goes off
to confirm this.
Manual air conditioning
If you place the air flow control
in position
0
(deactivation of the
system), the temperature is no
longer maintained at a comfortable
level. However, a slight flow of air,
due to the movement of the vehicle,
can still be felt.
3
Comfort
61
Demisting/defrosting
5. Air conditioning On / Off
The air conditioning is designed to
operate effectively in all seasons,
with the windows closed.
It enables you to:
- lower the temperature, in summer,
- increase the effectiveness of the demisting
in winter, above 3 °C.
Switching on
Press the
"A/C"
button, the button's
indicator lamp comes on.
The air conditioning does not operate when the
air flow adjustment control
2
is in position "
0
".
To obtain cooled air more quickly, you can use
recirculation of interior air for a few moments.
Then return to fresh air intake.
The marking on the control panel
indicates the position of the
controls to quickly demist or defrost
the windscreen and side windows:
place the air intake control
4
in the "Exterior
air intake" position (indicator lamp off),
place the air distribution dial
3
in the
"Windscreen position",
place the air flow dial
2
in position 5
(maximum),
place the temperature dial
1
in the red
position (hot).
Switching off
Press the
"A/C"
button again, the button's
indicator lamp goes off.
Switching off may affect comfort levels
(humidity, condensation).
With Stop & Start, when demisting has
been activated, the STOP mode is not
available.
Comfort
62
The control button is located on
the air conditioning system control
panel.
Rear screen demist - defrost
Switching on
Switching off
The demist/defrost switches off automatically to
prevent an excessive consumption of current.
It is possible to stop the demist/defrost
operation before it is switched off
automatically by pressing the button again.
The indicator lamp associated with the
button goes off.
Press this button to demist/defrost the rear
screen and, depending on version, the door
mirrors. The indicator lamp associated with
the button comes on.
The rear screen demist - defrost can only
operate when the engine is running.
Switch off the demist/defrost of the
rear screen and door mirrors as
soon as it is no longer needed as
lower current consumption results in
reduced fuel consumption.
3
Comfort
63
The air conditioning only operates when the engine is running.
The driver and front passenger can
each adjust the temperature to their
requirements.
Turn control
2
or
3
to the left or to the right
respectively to decrease or increase this
value.
A setting around the value 21 provides
optimum comfort. However, depending on your
requirements, a setting between 18 and 24 is
normal.
You are advised to avoid a left / right setting
difference of more than 3.
4. Automatic visibility
programme
The automatic comfort programme
may not be sufficient to quickly
demist or defrost the windscreen
and side windows (humidity, several
passengers, ice, etc.).
In this case, select the automatic visibility
programme.
The system automatically controls the air
conditioning, the air flow and the air intake and
provides optimum distribution of the ventilation
to the windscreen and side windows.
Automatic operation
Press the
"AUTO"
button. The
indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Dual-zone digital air conditioning
We recommend the use of this mode: it permits
automatic and optimised adjustment of all
of the functions, passenger compartment
temperature, air flow, air distribution and air
recirculation, in accordance with the comfort
value that you have chosen.
This system is designed to operate effectively in
all seasons, with the windows closed.
The value indicated on the display corresponds
to a level of comfort and not to a temperature in
degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit.
To switch it off, press the
"visibility"
button
again or press the
"AUTO"
button, the indicator
lamp in the button goes off or the indicator lamp
on the
"AUTO"
button comes on.
1. Automatic comfort programme
2-3. Driver-passenger side
adjustment
When the engine is cold, to prevent
too great a distribution of cold air, the
air flow will reach its optimum level
gradually.
In cold weather, it favours the
distribution of warm air to the
windscreen, side windows and footwells
only.
On entering the vehicle, if the interior
temperature is much colder or warmer
than the comfort value, there is no
need to change the value displayed in
order to obtain the comfort required
more quickly. The system corrects the
difference in temperature automatically
and as quickly as possible.
Comfort
64
Manual operation
Press this button to switch off
the air conditioning.
6. Air distribution adjustment
Press one or more buttons to
direct the air flow towards:
5. Air conditioning On / Off
- the windscreen and side windows
(demisting or defrosting),
- the windscreen, the side windows and the
vents,
- the windscreen, the side windows, the
vents and the footwells,
- the vents and the footwells,
- the vents,
- the footwells,
- the windscreen, the side windows and the
footwells.
Switching the system off could result in
discomfort (humidity, condensation).
Press this button again to return to
automatic operation of the air conditioning.
The indicator lamp in the
"A/C"
button
comes on.
To obtain cool air sooner, you can use air
recirculation for a few moments. Then return to
exterior air intake.
In winter, we recommend that you close the
rear vents.
If you wish, you can make a different choice
from that offered by the system by changing a
setting. The other functions will still be controlled
automatically.
Pressing the
"AUTO"
button returns the
system to completely automatic operation.
For maximum cooling or heating of the
passenger compartment, it is possible
to exceed the minimum value 14 or the
maximum value 28.
Turn control
2
or
3
to the left until
"LO"
(low) is displayed or to the
right until
"HI"
(high) is displayed.
3
Comfort
65
Switching the system off/on
Turn the air flow control to the left until all of
the indicator lamps go off.
This action switches off all of the functions of
the system.
Temperature related comfort is no longer
guaranteed but a slight flow of air, due to the
movement of the vehicle, can still be felt.
Turn the air flow dial to the right or press
the
"AUTO"
button to reactivate the
system with the values set before it was
switched off.
9. Rear ventilation (Rear)
Press this button to allow the air
to circulate towards the rear. The
temperature will be equal to the
left-hand comfort value for the rear
left passengers and equal to the
right-hand comfort value for the
rear right passengers. The indicator
lamp in the button comes on.
8. Air recirculation
Press this button to recirculate
the interior air. The indicator
lamp comes on.
- Air closed/intake (automatic
mode). Press this button, the
warning lamp comes on.
7. Air fl ow adjustment
Turn this control to the left to
decrease the air flow or to the
right to increase the air flow.
The air flow indicator lamps, between the two
fans, come on progressively according to the
value requested.
With Stop & Start, when demisting has
been activated, the STOP mode is not
available.
Avoid driving for prolonged periods with
the system off.
- Forced closing of the air intake
(manual mode). Press this
button to recirculate the interior
air, the warning lamp come on.
Air recirculation enables the passenger
compartment to be isolated from exterior
odours and smoke.
As soon as possible, press the "auto"
button to allow the intake of exterior air and
avoid the misting of windows.
Comfort
66
Front seats with manual adjustments
Height
Pull the control upwards to raise or push
it downwards to lower, as many times as
required, to obtain the position required.
Seat back angle
Push the control rearwards.
Forwards-backwards
Raise the control and slide the seat
forwards or backwards.
Seat consisting of a seat cushion, a seat back and a head restraint which can all be adjusted to adapt your position for ease of driving and comfort.
Before moving the seat backwards, ensure that there is nothing that might prevent the full travel of the seat, so as to avoid the risk of of
jamming the seat caused by the presence of objects on the floor behind the seat or rear passengers. If the seat jams, stop the movement
immediately.
3
Comfort
67
Driver's electric seat
Forwards-backwards
Push the control forwards or rearwards to
slide the seat.
Cushion height and angle
Tilt the rear part of the control upwards or
downwards to obtain the required height.
Tilt the front part of the control upwards or
downwards to obtain the required angle.
Backrest angle
Tilt the control forwards or rearwards to
adjust the angle of the seat back.
Seat consisting of a seat cushion, a seat back and a head restraint which can all be adjusted to adapt your position for ease of driving and comfort.
Comfort
68
Before moving the seat backwards,
ensure that there is nothing that might
prevent the full travel of the seat, so
as to avoid the risk of of jamming the
seat caused by the presence of objects
on the floor behind the seat or rear
passengers. If the seat jams, stop the
movement immediately.
The electrical functions of the driver's
seat are active approximately one
minute after opening the front door.
They are deactivated approximately one
minute after the ignition is switched off
and in economy mode.
To reactivate them, switch on the
ignition.
To raise the head restraint, pull it forwards
and upwards at the same time.
To remove the head restraint, press the
lug
A
and pull the head restraint upwards.
To put the head restraint back in place,
engage the head restraint stems in the
openings keeping them in line with the seat
back.
To lower the head restraint, press the lug
A
and the head restraint at the same time.
To adjust the angle of the head restraint, tilt
its lower part forwards or rearwards.
Head restraint height and
angle adjustment
The head restraint is fitted with a frame
with notches which prevents it from
lowering; this is a safety device in case
of impact.
The adjustment is correct when the
upper edge of the head restraint is
level with the top of the head.
Before moving off, check the
adjustment of the head restraint; adjust
it if the seat has been occupied by
someone of different size.
Never drive with the head restraints
removed; they must be in place and
adjusted correctly.
3
Comfort
69
Heated seats control
With the engine running, the front seats can be
heated separately.
Use the adjustment dial, placed on the side
of each front seat, to switch on and select
the level of heating required:
0
: Off.
1
: Low.
2
: Medium.
3
: High.
Manual lumbar adjustment
Turn the knob manually to obtain the
desired level of lumbar support.
Comfort
70
Table position, front passenger seat
This position, associated with that of the rear
seats, allows you to transport long objects inside
the vehicle.
The maximum weight on the seat is 30 kg.
Folding the seat backrest
Raise the armrest and fold up the "aircraft"
style table, fixed on the back of the seat.
Check that no object, either on or
underneath the seat, could hinder its
movement.
To make the operation easier, place the
head restraint in the low position (if the
seat is in the fully forward position).
If your vehicle is fitted with the video pack,
place the protective cover on the head
restraint.
Lift the control, located behind the seat,
then guide the seat back forwards.
Returning the seat to the normal
position
Guide the seat backrest rearwards until it
locks in place.
When the seat backrest is in this
position, only the 2
nd
row passenger
seat located behind the driver can be
used.
3
Comfort
71
Rear head restraints
The rear head restraints can be removed and have
two positions:
- high, position for use,
- low, storage position.
To raise a head restraint, pull it upwards.
To lower it, press the lug then the head
restraint.
To remove it, place it in the high position, push
the lug and pull it upwards.
To refit it, engage the head restraint rods in the
holes taking care to remain in line with the seat
back.
Never drive with the head restraints
removed, they must be in place and
correctly adjusted.
Comfort
72
2
nd
row seats
Forwards-backwards adjustment
Lift the control
A
Lift the control A Lift the control
, located at the front of the
seat, then adjust the seat to the position
desired.
"Comfort" position
The three 2
nd
row seats are independent of
each other and all the same width. They all
have a "comfort" position.
Placing a seat in the "comfort"
position
Pull on the control
B
and guide the seat
rearwards.
The backrest reclines and the seat base moves
forward slightly.
Returning the seat to the initial
position
Pull on the control
B
and allow the seat to
come forwards.
Always supervise any movements of
seats by children.
3
Comfort
73
Flat floor
Each seat can be folded onto the floor to
enable you to modify your vehicle’s interior
space.
Folding the seat from the 2
nd
row
Place the seats as far towards the rear as
possible.
Pull firmly upwards on strap
C
, to unlock
the seat; keep pulling until the seat is fully
folded.
Push the backrest slightly forwards so that
the backrest pivots, folding onto the seat
base. The assembly then lowers onto the
floor.
Folding the seat from the boot
When loading, for example, you can fold the
seat or seats directly from the boot, once you
have folded the 3
rd
row seats (7 seat version).
Place the seats as far towards the rear as
possible.
Pull on the strap
D
to release the chosen
seat and push the backrest gently
forwards.
Repositioning seat
If necessary, return the 2
nd
row seat rigid
panels to their initial position and lock
them.
Raise the backrest and push it rearwards
until it locks.
Supervise any movement of seats by
children.
Before moving the 3
rd
row seats (7 seat
version), return the 2
nd
row seat rigid
panels to their initial position and lock
them.
Emergency exit: if the first system
(strap
C
) fails, strap
D
enables the
3
rd
row passengers to exit quickly.
To avoid damaging the mechanism, the
strap
D
unclips under excessive force.
Simply reclip it to restore the system to
working order.
Comfort
74
Rigid panel
Each 2
nd
row seat backrest has a rigid panel
attached.
This panel enables you:
- to have a continuous load surface in the
boot, whatever the positions of the seats,
- to avoid having objects sliding under the
2
nd
row seats. 30 kg maximum on each
panel.
Releasing/Locking the rigid panel
Before deploying the rigid panels, check
that the 2
nd
row seats are positioned as far
towards the rear as possible.
Slide the latch
E
on the panel upwards, to
release it.
Return the panel to its initial position, then
slide the latch
E
downwards, to lock it in
place.
Entering/Exiting the 3
rd
row
(7 seat version)
Repositioning the seat,
from the outside, with the
door open
If there are passengers seated in the 3
rd
row
(7 seat version):
Manually return the assembly as far as
possible rearwards; the seat does not return
as far as the maximum rearwards position
so as to retain leg space for the 3
rd
row
passengers.
Fold the seat base.
Raise the aircraft style table on the
2
nd
row seat if it is down.
Hold the control
F
in the raised position, the
seat unlocks and the seat base comes up
against the backrest.
Push the seat backrest forwards, holding
the control
F
forwards.
3
Comfort
75
3
rd
row seats (7 seat version)
Concertina boards
Two rigid concertina boards, which cannot
be separated from the vehicle, cover the two
3
rd
row seats, when these are in the folded
position.
Folding the concertina boards
Pull on the control, the 3 sections of the
board will fold like a concertina.
When the 3
rd
row seats are upright, these
concertina boards can be left either:
- flat behind the seats,
- in the vertical position,
thereby leaving a storage area available.
The two rigid boards can each support a
maximum of 100 kg.
Installing a seat
Remove the load space screen.
If necessary, return the 2
nd
row rigid panels
to their initial position and lock them.
Correctly position the concertina board
vertically behind the seat.
Pull on the control
G
, located behind the
seat backrest. The backrest tilts rearwards
pulling the seat base with it. The seat locks
in the open position.
Comfort
76
Storing a seat
Lower the head restraints.
Correctly position the concertina board
vertically behind the seat.
Pull on the control
H
, located at the bottom
of the seat backrest. The seat is released.
Next push the backrest gently forwards.
The backrest pivots folding onto the seat
base. The seat base then folds into the
stowage area provided for that purpose.
Reposition the concertina boards over the
folded seats.
Before moving the 3
rd
row seats, return
the rigid panels of the 2
nd
row seats to
the upright position and lock them in
place.
Do not try to fold a 3
rd
row seat that has
not first had the backrest fully locked
in place.
Do not leave objects either on or
underneath the seat bases of the
3
rd
row seats when you are folding them.
Do not leave your hand on the
control
H
as you fold the seats, as you
risk trapping your fingers.
3
Comfort
77
Seat modularity and the various seat confi gurations
Examples of configurations
7 seats
Transporting long objects
5 seats
Transport (4 seats)
Loading a large volume
Designed to be modular, your vehicle offers
numerous seat installation and loading
configurations.
Operations to change the existing configuration
must only be carried out when stationary
(see paragraphs "Rear seats".
Comfort
78
Mirrors
Each fitted with an adjustable mirror glass
permitting the lateral rearward vision necessary
for overtaking or parking. They can also be
folded for parking in confined spaces.
Folding
- Automatic: lock the vehicle using the
remote control or the key.
- Manual: with the ignition on, pull control
A
- Manual: with the ignition on, pull control A - Manual: with the ignition on, pull control
rearwards.
Unfolding
- Automatic: unlock the vehicle using the
remote control or the key.
- Manual: with the ignition on, pull control
A
- Manual: with the ignition on, pull control A - Manual: with the ignition on, pull control
rearwards.
Adjustment
Move control
A
to the right or to the left to
A to the right or to the left to A
select the corresponding mirror.
Move control
B
in all four directions to
adjust.
Return control
A
to the central position.
Demisting - Defrosting
If your vehicle is fitted with heated mirrors, the
demisting-defrosting operates by switching
on the heated rear screen (refer to the "Rear
screen demist-defrost" page).
The rear screen demist - defrost can
only operate when the engine is running.
The objects observed are, in reality,
closer than they appear.
Take this into account in order to
correctly judge the distance of vehicles
approaching from behind.
If the mirrors are folded using control
A
,
they will not unfold when the vehicle is
unlocked. Pull again on control
A
.
The folding and unfolding of the door
mirrors using the remote control can be
deactivated by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Fold the mirrors when putting your
vehicle through an automatic car wash.
Door mirrors
If necessary, it is possible to fold the
mirrors manually.
3
Comfort
79
Adjustment
Adjust the mirror so that the glass is directed
correctly in the "day" position.
Manual day/night model
Day/night position
Pull the lever to change to the "night" anti-
dazzle position.
Push the lever to change to the normal "day"
position.
Rear view mirror
Adjustable mirror providing a central rearward
view.
Equipped with an anti-dazzle system, which
darkens the mirror glass and reduces the
nuisance to the driver caused by the sun,
headlamps from other vehicles...
Automatic day/night model
By means of a sensor, which measures the
light from the rear of the vehicle, this system
automatically and progressively changes
between the day and night uses.
In order to ensure optimum visibility
during your manoeuvres, the mirror
lightens automatically when reverse
gear is engaged.
As a safety measure, the mirrors should
be adjusted to reduce the "blind spot".
Comfort
80
Steering wheel adjustment
When stationary
, pull the control lever to
When stationary , pull the control lever to When stationary
release the adjustment mechanism.
Adjust the height and reach to suit your
driving position.
Push the control lever to lock the
adjustment mechanism.
As a safety precaution, these
operations should only be carried out
while the vehicle is stationary.
4
Access
81
Unfolding the key
First press this button to unfold the key.
Unlocking the vehicle
Press the open padlock to
unlock the vehicle.
Complete unlocking using the
remote control
Remote control key
System which permits central unlocking or locking of the vehicle using the lock or from a distance. It is also used to locate and start the vehicle, as well
as providing protection against theft.
Complete unlocking using
the key
Turn the key to the left in the driver's door
lock to unlock the vehicle.
Selective unlocking using
the remote control
Selective unlocking using the key
Turn the key to the left in the driver's door
lock once to unlock the driver's door only.
Turn the key to the left in the driver's door
lock again to unlock the other doors and
the boot.
The selective unlocking is only available on
versions fitted with deadlocking.
Press the open padlock once to
unlock the driver's door only.
Press the open padlock again to unlock the
other doors and the boot.
The complete or selective
unlocking parameter is set via
the vehicle configuration menu.
Complete unlocking is activated by default.
The direction indicators flash for a few
seconds.
According to version, the door mirrors
unfold, the welcome lighting comes on
and the alarm is deactivated.
Access
82
Deadlocking using the remote
control
Press the closed padlock to lock
the vehicle completely or press
the closed padlock for more
than two seconds to close the
windows automatically in addition
to locking (according to version).
Normal locking using the key
Turn the key to the right in the driver's door
lock to lock the vehicle completely.
Locking the vehicle
Press the closed padlock to
lock the vehicle completely.
Press the closed padlock for more than two
seconds to close the windows automatically
in addition to locking (according to version).
Normal locking using the remote
control
Press the closed padlock again within
five seconds to deadlock the vehicle.
The direction indicators come on for
a few seconds.
According to version, the door mirrors
fold at the same time, the alarm is
activated.
The folding and unfolding of the door
mirrors using the remote control can be
deactivated by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
If one of the doors or the boot is not fully
closed, locking does not take place.
However, the alarm (if fitted) will be fully
activated after about 45 seconds.
If the vehicle is unlocked inadvertently
and with no action then on the doors
or boot, it will relock automatically after
about thirty seconds.
if the alarm had been activated
previously, it will not be reactivated
automatically.
4
Access
83
Locating your vehicle
Folding the key
First press this button to fold
the key.
If you do not press the button when
folding the key, there is a risk of damage
to the mechanism.
Deadlocking using the key
Turn the key to the right in the driver's door
lock to lock the vehicle completely and hold
it in this position for more than two seconds
to close the windows automatically in
addition to locking (according to version).
Turn the key to the right again within five
seconds to deadlock the vehicle.
Deadlocking is confirmed by fixed lighting
of the direction indicators for approximately
two seconds.
According to version, the door mirrors
fold at the same time.
Deadlocking renders the exterior and
interior door controls inoperative.
It also deactivates the manual central
control button.
Therefore, never leave anyone inside
the vehicle when it is deadlocked.
Press the closed padlock to
locate your locked vehicle in a
car park.
This is indicated by lighting of the direction
indicators for a few seconds.
Access
84
Electronic engine immobiliser
The key contains an electronic chip which has
a special code. When the ignition is switched
on, this code must be recognised in order for
starting to be possible.
This electronic engine immobiliser locks the
engine management system a few minutes
after the ignition is switched off and prevents
starting of the engine by anyone who does not
have the key.
Anti-theft protection
In the event of a fault, you are
informed by illumination of this
warning lamp, an audible signal and
a message in the screen.
In this case, your vehicle will not start; contact
a PEUGEOT dealer as soon as possible.
Keep safely the label attached to the keys given
to you on acquisition of the vehicle.
Starting the vehicle
Insert the key in the ignition switch.
The system recognises the starting code.
Turn the key fully towards the dashboard to
position
3 (Starting)
.
When the engine starts, release the key.
Switching the vehicle off
Immobilise the vehicle.
Turn the key fully towards you to
position
1 (Stop)
.
Remove the key from the ignition switch.
Energy economy mode
After switching off the engine (position
1-Stop
),
1-Stop ), 1-Stop
you can still use functions such as the audio
and telematics system, the wipers, the dipped
headlamps, the courtesy lamps, etc. for a
maximum combined period of thirty minutes.
A heavy object (key fob...), attached to
the key and weighing down on its shaft
in the ignition switch, could cause a
malfunction.
For more information, refer to the
"Practical information - Energy economy
mode" section.
Switching off the engine leads to a loss
of braking assistance.
4
Access
85
Remote control problem
Following disconnection of the vehicle battery,
replacement of the remote control battery or
in the event of a remote control malfunction,
you can no longer unlock, lock or locate your
vehicle.
First of all, use the key in the lock to unlock
or lock your vehicle.
Then, reinitialise the remote control.
Changing the battery
Reinitialisation
Switch off the ignition.
Turn the key to position
2 (Ignition on)
.
Press the closed padlock immediately for a
few seconds.
Switch off the ignition and remove the key
from the ignition switch.
The remote control is fully operational again.
If the battery is flat, you are informed
by illumination of this warning lamp,
an audible signal and a message.
Battery ref.: CR1620 / 3 volts.
If the problem persists, contact a
PEUGEOT dealer as soon as possible.
Unclip the casing using a coin at the notch.
Slide the flat battery out of its location.
Slide the new battery into its location
observing the original direction.
Clip the casing.
Reinitialise the remote control.
Access
86
Lost keys
Go to a PEUGEOT dealer with the vehicle's registration document, your personal
identification documents and if possible the key code label.
The PEUGEOT dealer will be able to look up the key code and the transponder code
required to order a new key.
Do not throw the remote control
batteries away, they contain metals
which are harmful to the environment.
Take them to an approved collection
point.
Remote control
The high frequency remote control is a sensitive system; do not operate it while it is in your
pocket as there is a possibility that it may unlock the vehicle, without you being aware of it.
Do not repeatedly press the buttons of your remote control out of range and out of sight of
your vehicle. You run the risk of stopping it from working and the remote control would have
to be reinitialised.
No remote control can operate when the key is in the ignition switch, even when the ignition
is switched off, except for reinitialisation.
Locking the vehicle
Driving with the doors locked may make access to the passenger compartment by the
emergency services more difficult in an emergency.
As a safety precaution, never leave children alone in the vehicle, except for a very short period.
In all cases, it is essential to remove the key from the ignition switch when leaving the
vehicle.
Anti-theft protection
Do not make any modifications to the electronic engine immobiliser system; this could
cause malfunctions.
When purchasing a second-hand vehicle
Have the pairing of all of the keys in your possession checked by a PEUGEOT dealer, to
ensure that only your keys can be used to open and start the vehicle.
4
Access
87
Alarm
Locking the vehicle with full
alarm
Exterior perimiter protection
The system detects opening of the vehicle.
The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to enter
the vehicle by forcing a door, the boot or the
bonnet.
Interior volumetric protection
The system detects any variation in the volume
in the passenger compartment.
The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks a
window or moves inside the vehicle.
If you wish to leave a pet in the vehicle or a
window partially open, deactivate the interior
volumetric protection.
Anti-tamper function
The system detects the putting out of service of
its components.
The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to put
the wires of the siren, the central control or the
battery out of service.
Activation
Switch off the ignition and get out of the
vehicle.
Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the
locking button on the remote control.
The alarm is activated; the indicator lamp in
button
A
flashes once per second.
System which protects and provides a deterrent against the theft of your vehicle. It provides two types of protection, exterior and interior, as well as an
anti-tamper function.
Do not make any modifications to
the alarm system, this could cause
malfunctions.
If a door, the boot or the bonnet is not
fully closed, the vehicle is then not
locked, but perimeter monitoring will
be active after a period of 45 seconds,
at the same time as the volumetric
monitoring.
In the event of automatic relocking
of the vehicle (occurs after an
unintentional unlocking followed by a
period of 30 seconds without opening a
door or the boot), the monitoring system
is not reactivated automatically. To
reactivate the system, it is necessary to
unlock the vehicle and then lock it again
using the key or the remote control.
Deactivation
Unlock the vehicle using the unlocking
button on the remote control.
The alarm is deactivated; the indicator lamp in
button
A
switches off.
Access
88
Reactivation of the interior
volumetric protection
Unlock the vehicle using the unlocking
button on the remote control.
Relock the vehicle using the remote
control.
The alarm is activated again with both types
of protection; the indicator lamp in button
A
switches off.
Locking the vehicle with
exterior protection alarm only
Deactivation of the interior
volumetric protection
Switch off the ignition.
Within ten seconds, press button
A
until
the indicator lamp is on continuously.
Get out of the vehicle.
Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the
locking button on the remote control.
The exterior protection alarm alone remains
activated; the indicator lamp in button
A
flashes
once per second.
Triggering
This is indicated by sounding of the siren
and flashing of the direction indicators for
approximately thirty seconds.
After it has been triggered, the alarm is again
operational.
Failure of the remote control
Unlock the vehicle using the key in the
driver's door lock.
Open the door; the alarm is triggered.
Switch on the ignition; the alarm stops.
Malfunction
When the ignition is switched on, illumination
the indicator lamp in button
A
for ten seconds
indicates a siren fault.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Locking the vehicle without
activating the alarm
Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the key
in the driver's door lock.
The direction indicators do not come on.
Automatic operation *
Depending on the legislation in force in your
country, one of these cases may occur:
- 45 seconds after the vehicle is locked
using the remote control, the alarm is
activated, regardless of the status of the
doors and boot.
- 2 minutes after the last door or the boot is
closed, the alarm is activated.
To avoid triggering the alarm on entering
the vehicle, first press the unlocking
button on the remote control.
To be effective, this deactivation must
be carried out each time the ignition is
switched off.
If the alarm is triggered ten times in
succession, the eleventh time will result
in it becoming inactive.
If the indicator lamp in button
A
flashes
rapidly, this indicates that the alarm was
triggered during your absence. When
the ignition is switched on, this flashing
stops immediately.
To avoid triggering the alarm when
washing your vehicle, lock it using the
key in the driver's door lock.
Do not activate the alarm before
disconnecting the battery, otherwise the
siren will sound.
* According to country.
4
Access
89
Electric windows
1.
Driver
2.
Passenger
3.
Rear right
4.
Rear left
5.
Deactivation of the rear electric
windows and doors.
Safety anti-pinch
When the window rises and meets an obstacle,
it stops and partially lowers again.
Automatic mode
Press or pull the control firmly. The window
opens or closes fully when the control is
released.
Pressing the control again stops the
movement of the window.
One-touch electric windows
System intended to open or close a window
manually or automatically. Fitted with a safety
anti-pinch system and a system for deactivation
in the event of misuse of the rear controls.
Manual mode
Press or pull the control gently. The
window stops when the control is released.
After approximately ten consecutive
complete opening/closing movements
of the window, a protection function
is activated to prevent damage to the
electric window motor.
After this, you have approximately one
minute within which to close the window.
Once the window is closed, the controls
will become available again after
approximately 40 minutes.
If the window cannot be closed (for
example, in the presence of ice),
immediately after the movement is
reversed:
Press and hold the control until the
window opens fully.
Then pull the control immediately
and hold it until the window closes.
Continue to hold the control for
approximately one second after the
window has closed.
The safety anti-pinch function is not
operational during these operations.
The electric window controls remain
operational for approximately
45 seconds after the ignition is switched
off or until the vehicle is locked after
a front door is opened.
If one of the passenger windows cannot
be operated from the driver's door
control panel, carry out the operation
from the control pad of the passenger
door concerned, and vice versa.
Access
90
Reinitialisation
If a window does not rise automatically or
following disconnection of the battery, the anti-
pinch function must be reinitialised:
For each window:
Pull the control until the window stops.
Release the control and pull it again, repeat
these operations until the window closes
fully.
Continue to hold the control for
approximately one second after the window
has closed.
Press the control to lower the window
automatically to the low position.
Once the window has reached the low
position, press the control again for
approximately one second.
Deactivation of the rear
electric windows and doors
For the safety of your children, with the
ignition on, press control
5
to deactivate
the rear electric window controls
regardless of their position.
It is still possible to open the doors from the
outside and operate the rear electric windows
from the driver's control panel.
The safety anti-pinch function is not
operational during these operations.
This control also deactivates the interior
controls for the rear doors (see "Child
lock").
Indicator lamp on, the rear controls are
deactivated.
Indicator lamp off, the rear controls are
activated.
Any other status of the indicator
lamp indicates a malfunction of the
electric child lock. Have it checked
by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Always remove the key from the ignition
when leaving the vehicle, even for a
short time.
If an obstacle is encountered during
operation of the electric windows, you
must reverse the movement of the
window. To do this, press the control
concerned.
When the driver operates the controls
for the passengers' electric windows,
they must ensure that no one is
preventing correct closing of the
windows.
The driver must ensure that the
passengers use the electric windows
correctly.
Be aware of children when operating
the windows.
4
Access
91
Doors
After unlocking the vehicle completely
using the remote control or the key, pull the
door handle.
From inside
Pull the door control (front or rear) to
open the door; this unlocks this vehicle
completely.
Closing
When a door or the boot is not closed correctly:
-
When the engine is running
, this
warning lamp comes on, accompanied
by a message in the multifunction
screen for a few seconds,
Opening
From outside
-
When the vehicle is moving
(speed
higher than 6 mph (10 km/h)), this
warning lamp comes on, accompanied
by an audible signal and a message for a
few seconds.
The interior door controls do not
operate when the vehicle is deadlocked.
Access
92
A confirmation message is displayed,
accompanied by an audible signal.
Centralised locking control
System which provides full manual
locking or unlocking of the doors from the
inside.
Locking
Press this button to lock the vehicle.
The red indicator lamp in the button comes on.
Automatic central locking
Unlocking
Press this button again to unlock the
vehicle.
The red indicator lamp in the button goes off.
When locking/deadlocking from
the outside
When the vehicle is locked or deadlocked from
the outside, the red indicator lamp flashes and
the button is inactive.
After normal locking, pull the interior door
lever to unlock the vehicle.
After deadlocking, it is necessary to use
the remote control or the key to unlock the
vehicle.
If one of the doors is open, the central
locking from the inside does not take
place.
Press this button for more than
two seconds.
Activation
System which provides full automatic locking or
unlocking of the doors and boot while driving.
You can activate or deactivate this function.
4
Access
93
Emergency control
System allowing the doors to be locked and
unlocked manually in the event of a malfunction
of the central locking system or battery failure.
Locking the front and rear
passenger doors
Locking the driver's door
Insert the key in the door lock, then turn it
to the rear.
You can also apply the procedure described for
the passenger doors.
Unlocking the driver's door
Insert the key in the door lock, then turn it
to the front.
Unlocking the front and rear
passenger doors
Pull the interior door opening control.
Automatic locking
Above 6 mph (10 km/h), the doors and boot
lock automatically.
If one of the doors is open, the automatic
central locking does not take place.
If the boot is open, the automatic central
locking of the doors is active.
Deactivation
Press this button again for more than
two seconds.
Unlocking
Above 6 mph (10 km/h), press this button to
unlock the doors and boot temporarily.
In the event of an impact, the doors
unlock automatically.
Open the doors.
On the rear doors, check that the child lock
is not on (see the corresponding section).
Remove the black cap, located on the edge
of the door, using the key.
Insert the key in the socket without forcing
it, then without turning it, move the latch
sideways towards the inside of the door.
Remove the key and refit the cap.
Close the doors and check that the vehicle
has locked correctly from the outside.
A confirmation message is displayed,
accompanied by an audible signal.
Access
94
BOOT
After unlocking the vehicle using the
remote control or the key, pull the handle
and raise the tailgate.
-
when the engine is running
,
this warning lamp comes on,
accompanied by a message in
the multifunction screen for a few
seconds,
-
when the vehicle is moving
(speed above
6 mph (10 km/h)), this warning lamp comes
on, accompanied by an audible signal and
a message in the multifunction screen for a
few seconds.
Lower the tailgate using the interior grab
handle.
When selective unlocking is activated,
the boot can also be opened by a
second press on the open padlock on
the remote control.
Opening
Closing
If the tailgate is not closed correctly:
4
Access
95
Tailgate release
Unlocking
Fold back the rear seats to gain access to
the lock from inside the boot.
Insert a small screwdriver into hole
A
of the
lock to unlock the tailgate.
Move the latch to the left.
Locking after closing
If the fault persists after closing again, the boot
will remain locked.
System allowing the mechanical unlocking
of the boot in the event of a battery or central
locking system malfunction.
Access
96
Fuel tank
Low fuel level
Refuelling
When the low fuel level is reached,
this warning lamp comes on in the
instrument panel, accompanied by
an audible signal and a message in
the multifunction screen. When the lamp first
comes on, there is
approximately
6 litres
of
fuel remaining.
Until sufficient fuel has been added, this
warning lamp appears every time the ignition
is switched on, accompanied by an audible
signal and a message. When driving, this
audible signal and message are repeated with
increasing frequency, as the fuel level drops
towards
"0"
.
Capacity of the tank: approximately 60 litres.
The key cannot be removed from the
lock until the cap is put back on the
tank.
Opening the cap may trigger an inrush
of air. This vacuum, which is completely
normal, is caused by the sealing of the
fuel system.
You must refuel to avoid running out of
fuel.
If you run out of fuel (Diesel), refer also
to the "Checks" section.
A label affixed to the inside of the filler flap
reminds you of the type of fuel to be used
according to your engine.
More than 5 litres of fuel must be added in order
to be registered by the fuel gauge.
4
Access
97
With Stop & Start, never refuel with the
system in STOP mode; you must switch
off the ignition with the key.
To fill the tank safely:
the engine must be switched off,
open the fuel filler flap,
insert the key in the cap, then turn it to the
left,
When refuelling is complete:
put the cap back in place,
turn the key to the right, then remove it
from the cap,
close the filler flap.
remove the cap and secure it on the hook,
located on the inside of the flap,
fill the tank, but
do not continue after the
3rd cut-off of the nozzle
; this could cause
malfunctions.
Operating fault
A malfunction of the fuel gauge is indicated by
the return to zero of the fuel gauge needle.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
DIESEL
Access
98
Quality of the fuel used for
petrol engines
The petrol engines are perfectly compatible
with E10 or E24 type petrol biofuels (containing
10 % or 24 % ethanol), conforming to European
standards EN 228 and EN 15376.
E85 type fuels (containing up to 85 % ethanol)
are reserved exclusively for vehicles marketed
for the use of this type of fuel (BioFlex
vehicles). The quality of the ethanol must
comply with European standard EN 15293.
For Brazil only, special vehicles are marketed
to run on fuels containing up to 100 % ethanol
(E100 type).
Quality of the fuel used for
Diesel engines
The Diesel engines are perfectly compatible
with biofuels which conform to current and
future European standards (Diesel fuel
which complies with standard EN 590 mixed
with a biofuel which complies with standard
EN 14214) available at the pumps (containing
up to 7 % Fatty Acid Methyl Ester).
The B30 biofuel can be used in certain Diesel
engines; however, this use is subject to strict
application of the special servicing conditions.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
The use of any other type of (bio)fuel
(vegetable or animal oils, pure or diluted,
domestic fuel...) is strictly prohibited (risk of
damage to the engine and fuel system).
4
Access
99
Misfuel prevention (Diesel) *
When a petrol filler nozzle is introduced into the
fuel filler neck of your Diesel vehicle, it comes
into contact with the flap. The system remains
closed and prevents filling.
Do not persist but introduce a Diesel type
filler nozzle.
* According to country of sale.
Mechanical device which prevents filling the tank of a Diesel vehicle with petrol. It avoids the risk of
engine damage that can result from filling with the wrong fuel.
Located in the filler neck, the misfuel prevention device appears when the filler cap is removed.
Operation
It remains possible to use a fuel can to
fill the tank.
In order to ensure a good flow of fuel,
do not place the nozzle of the fuel can
in direct contact with the flap of the
misfuel prevention device and pour
slowly.
Travelling abroad
As Diesel fuel pump nozzles may be different
in other countries, the presence of the misfuel
prevention device may make refuelling
impossible.
Before travelling abroad, we recommend that
you check with the PEUGEOT dealer network,
whether your vehicle is suitable for the fuel
pumps in the country in which you want to
travel.
Visibility
100
Lighting controls
Main lighting
The various front and rear lamps of the vehicle
are designed to adapt the lighting progressively
in relation to the climatic conditions and so
improve the driver's visibility:
- sidelamps, to be seen,
- dipped beam headlamps to see without
dazzling other drivers,
- main beam headlamps to see clearly when
the road is clear,
- directional headlamps for improved
visibility when cornering.
Additional lighting
Other lamps are installed to fulfil the
requirements of particular driving conditions:
- a rear foglamp to be seen from a distance,
- front foglamps for even better visibility,
- daytime running lamps to be seen during
the day.
Programming
Various automatic lighting control modes
are also available according to the following
options:
- guide-me-home lighting,
- automatic lighting,
- directional headlamps.
System for selection and control of the various front and rear lamps providing the vehicle's lighting.
Travelling abroad
If using your vehicle in a country that
drives on the other side of the road, the
headlamps must be adjusted to avoid
dazzling on-coming drivers.
Contact an official dealer or a qualified
workshop.
5
Visibility
101
Model without AUTO lighting
Model with AUTO lighting
The lighting is controlled directly by the driver
by means of the ring
A
and the stalk
B
.
B.
Stalk for switching headlamps: pull
the stalk towards you to switch the
lighting between dipped and main beam
headlamps.
In the lamps off and sidelamps modes, the
driver can switch on the main beam headlamps
temporarily ("headlamp flash") by maintaining a
pull on the stalk.
Automatic illumination of
headlamps.
Lighting off / daytime running
lamps.
Sidelamps.
Dipped headlamps or main
beam headlamps.
Displays
Illumination of the corresponding indicator
lamp in the instrument panel confirms that the
lighting selected is on.
Manual controls
A.
Main lighting mode selection ring: turn it
to position the symbol required facing the
mark.
Visibility
102
Model with rear foglamp only
Rear foglamp
This operates with dipped and main beam
headlamps.
To switch on the foglamp, turn the ring
C
forwards.
To switch off the foglamp, turn the ring
C
rearwards.
When the lighting is switched on automatically
(with AUTO model), the dipped beam
headlamps and sidelamps remain on until the
rear foglamp is switched off.
Model with front and rear
foglamps
Front and rear foglamps
The rear foglamp operates with the dipped and
main beam headlamps.
The front foglamps also operate with the
sidelamps.
To switch on the rear foglamp, turn the
ring
C
forwards.
To switch on the front foglamps, turn the
ring
C
forwards again.
To switch off the rear foglamp, turn the
ring
C
rearwards.
To switch off the front foglamps, turn the
ring
C
rearwards again.
When the lighting is switched on automatically
(with AUTO model), the dipped beam
headlamps and sidelamps remain on until the
rear foglamp is switched off.
When the lighting is switched off automatically
(with AUTO model) or when the dipped beam
headlamps are switched off manually, the
foglamps and the sidelamps will remain on.
C.
Fog lamps selection ring.
5
Visibility
103
Switching off the lighting when
switching off the ignition
When the ignition is switched off, all of the
lamps switch off immediately, except for the
dipped beam headlamps if automatic guide-
me-home lighting is activated.
In good or rainy weather, by both day
and night, the front foglamps and the
rear foglamps are prohibited. In these
situations, the power of their beams
may dazzle other drivers. They should
only be used in fog or falling snow.
In these weather conditions, you should
switch on the foglamps and dipped
beam headlamps manually, as the
sunshine sensor may detect sufficient
light.
Do not forget to switch off the front and
rear foglamps when they are no longer
necessary.
Switching on the lighting when
switching on the ignition
To reactivate the lighting control stalk, turn the
ring
A
to position
"0"
- lighting off, then to the
position of your choice.
If the lighting is switched on manually after
switching off the ignition, there is an audible
signal when a front door is opened to warn the
driver that they have forgotten to switch off the
vehicle's lighting, with the ignition off.
They switch off automatically after a period
which depends on the state of charge of the
battery (entry to energy economy mode).
Visibility
104
Manual guide-me-home
lighting
The temporary illumination of the dipped beam
headlamps after the vehicle's ignition has been
switched off makes the driver's exit easier
when the light is poor.
Switching on
With the ignition off, "flash" the headlamps
using the lighting stalk.
A further "headlamp flash" switches the
function off.
Switching off
The manual guide-me-home lighting switches
off automatically after a set time.
Daytime running lamps
(LEDs)
In some weather conditions (e.g. low
temperature or humidity), the presence
of misting on the internal surface of the
glass of the headlamps and rear lamps
is normal; it disappears after the lamps
have been on for a few minutes.
They come on automatically when the engine
is started, when the lighting control stalk is in
position "
0
" or "
AUTO
".
5
Visibility
105
Exterior welcome lighting
Switching on
Switching off
Programming
The lighting duration is selected
via the vehicle configuration
menu.
Press the open padlock on the
remote control.
The dipped beam headlamps and the
sidelamps come on; your vehicle is also
unlocked.
The exterior welcome lighting switches off
automatically after a set time, when the ignition
is switched on or on locking the vehicle.
The remote switching on of the lighting makes your approach to the vehicle easier in poor light. It is activated according to the level of light detected by
the sunshine sensor.
The duration of the welcome lighting is
associated with and identical to that of
the automatic guide-me-home lighting.
Visibility
106
Automatic "guide-me-
home" lighting
Automatic illumination of headlamps
Activation
Turn the ring to the
"AUTO"
position. The
activation of the function is accompanied
by the display of a message in the screen.
Deactivation
Turn the ring to another position.
Deactivation of the function is accompanied
by the display of a message in the screen.
Operating fault
In the event of a malfunction of the sunshine
sensor, the lighting comes on, this warning
lamp is displayed in the instrument panel
and/or a message appears in the screen,
accompanied by an audible signal.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
When the automatic illumination of headlamps
function is activated, under low ambient
light the dipped beams headlamps come on
automatically when the ignition is switched off.
Programming
Activation or deactivation, as well as the
duration of the guide-me-home lighting, is set
in the vehicle configuration menu.
In fog or snow, the sunshine sensor
may detect sufficient light. In this
case, the lighting will not come on
automatically.
Do not cover the sunshine sensor,
coupled with the rain sensor and
located in the centre of the windscreen
behind the rear view mirror; the
associated functions would no longer
be controlled.
When a low level of ambient light is detected
by a sunshine sensor, the number plate
lamps, sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps
are switched on automatically, without any
action on the part of the driver. They can also
come on if rain is detected, at the same time as
automatic operation of the windscreen wipers.
As soon as the brightness returns to a
sufficient level or after the windscreen wipers
are switched off, the lamps are switched off
automatically.
5
Visibility
107
Manual adjustment of halogen headlamps
To avoid causing a nuisance to other road
users, the height of the halogen headlamps
should be adjusted according to the load in the
vehicle.
0.
1 or 2 people in the front seats.
-.
3 people.
1.
5 people.
-.
Intermediate setting.
2.
5 people + maximum authorised load.
-.
Intermediate setting.
3.
Driver + maximum authorised load.
Automatic
adjustment
of the xenon
headlamps
In order to avoid causing a nuisance to other
road users, this system corrects the height of the
xenon headlamps beam automatically and when
stationary, in relation to the load in the vehicle.
If a malfunction occurs, this warning
lamp is displayed on the instrument
panel, accompanied by an audible
signal and a message on the multifunction screen.
The system then places your headlamps in the
lowest position.
If a malfunction occurs, do not touch
the xenon bulbs. Contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Travelling abroad
If using your vehicle in a country that
drives on the other side of the road, the
headlamps must be adjusted to avoid
dazzling on-coming drivers.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
The initial setting is position
"0"
.
Visibility
108
Directional lighting
with directional lighting
without directional lighting
Programming
Operating fault
The function is activated or
deactivated via the vehicle
configuration menu.
If a fault occurs, this warning lamp
flashes in the instrument panel,
accompanied by a message in the
screen.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
When the dipped or main beam headlamps
are on, this function enables the light beams to
provide improved lighting of the side of the road
when cornering.
The use of this function, from approximately
12 mph (20 km/h) and associated with the
xenon headlamps only, considerably improves
the quality of your lighting when cornering.
When stationary or moving at very low
speed or when reverse gear is engaged,
the function is inactive.
The status of the function remains in the
memory when the ignition is switched off.
5
Visibility
109
Wiper controls
Model with intermittent wiping
Model with AUTO wiping
Programming
Various automatic wiper control modes are also
available according to the following options:
- automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers,
- rear wiping on engaging reverse gear.
System for selection and control of the various
front and rear wiping modes for the elimination
of rain and cleaning.
The vehicle's front and rear wipers are
designed to improve the driver's visibility
progressively according to the climatic
conditions.
Manual controls
The wiper commands are issued directly by the
driver by means of the stalk
A
and the ring
B
.
Windscreen wipers
A.
Wiping speed selection stalk.
Fast (heavy rain).
Normal (moderate rain).
Intermittent (proportional to the
speed of the vehicle).
Automatic, then single wipe
(see the corresponding
section).
Off.
Single wipe (press down and
release).
or
Visibility
110
Rear wiper
B.
Rear wiper selection ring:
Park.
Intermittent wipe.
Wash-wipe (set duration).
Reverse gear
When reverse gear is engaged, the rear wiper
will come into operation if the windscreen
wipers are operating.
Programming
The function is activated or
deactivated via the vehicle
configuration menu.
This function is activated by
default.
If a significant accumulation of snow
or ice is present, or when using a
bicycle carrier on the boot, deactivate
the automatic rear wiper via the
multifunction screen configuration
menu.
5
Visibility
111
Windscreen wash
Pull the wiper stalk towards you. The
windscreen wash then the wipers operate for a
set time.
The headlamp wash is also activated
if the
dipped beam headlamps are on
.
Screenwash/headlamp wash low
level
In the case of vehicles fitted with
headlamp washers, when the
minimum level of the reservoir
is reached, this warning lamp is
displayed in the instrument panel, accompanied
by an audible signal and a message.
The warning lamp is displayed when the
ignition is switched on, or every time the stalk is
operated, until the reservoir is refilled.
Next time you stop, refill the screenwash /
headlamp wash reservoir.
Headlamp wash
Press the end of the lighting stalk to activate
the headlamp wash, when the dipped beam
headlamps are on.
To reduce the consumption of
screenwash fluid, the headlamp
washers only operate with the first
operation of the screenwash.
Visibility
112
Automatic rain sensitive
windscreen wipers
The windscreen wipers operate automatically,
without any action on the part of the driver, if
rain is detected (sensor behind the rear view
mirror), adapting their speed to the intensity of
the rainfall.
Activation
This is controlled manually by the driver by
pushing the stalk downwards to the
"AUTO"
position.
It is accompanied by a message in the screen.
Switching off
This is controlled manually by the driver by
moving the stalk upwards then returning it to
position
"0"
.
It is accompanied by a message in the screen.
Operating fault
If an automatic wiping malfunction occurs, the
wipers will operate in intermittent mode.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Do not cover the rain sensor, linked with
the sunshine sensor and located in the
centre of the windscreen behind the rear
view mirror.
Switch off the automatic rain sensitive
wipers when using an automatic car wash.
In winter, to avoid damaging the wiper
blades, it is advisable to wait until the
windscreen is completely clear of ice
before activating the automatic rain
sensitive wipers.
The automatic rain sensitive wipers
must be reactivated if the ignition has
been off for more than one minute, by
pushing the stalk downwards.
5
Visibility
113
Special position of the
windscreen wipers
This position permits release of the windscreen
wiper blades.
It is used for cleaning or replacement of the
blades. It can also be useful, in winter, to
detach the blades from the windscreen.
Any action on the wiper stalk in the minute
after switching off the ignition places the
blades vertically on the screen.
To park the blades again, switch on the
ignition and operate the wiper stalk.
To maintain the effectiveness of the
"flat-blade" type of wiper blades, it is
advisable to:
- handle them with care,
- clean them regularly using soapy
water,
- avoid using them to retain
cardboard on the windscreen,
- replace them at the first signs of
wear.
Visibility
114
Courtesy lamps
1.
Front courtesy lamp
2.
Map reading lamps
Map reading lamps
Front and rear courtesy lamps
In this position, the courtesy lamp
comes on gradually:
- when the vehicle is unlocked,
- when the key is removed from the ignition,
- when a door is opened,
- when the remote control locking button is
activated, in order to locate your vehicle.
Permanently off.
Permanent lighting.
It switches off gradually:
- when the vehicle is locked,
- when the ignition is switched on,
- 30 seconds after the last door is closed.
3.
Rear courtesy lamp
Take care not to place anything in
contact with the courtesy lamps.
With the "permanent lighting" mode, the lighting
time varies according to the circumstances:
-
with the ignition off, approximately
ten minutes,
-
in energy economy mode, approximately
thirty seconds,
-
with the engine running, unlimited.
With the ignition on, press the
corresponding switch.
5
Visibility
115
Interior mood
lighting
Switching on
At night, the front courtesy lamp mood lamp
A
comes on automatically when the sidelamps
are switched on.
Switching off
The interior mood lighting switches off
automatically when the sidelamps are
switched off.
Interior welcome
lighting
Switching on
Press the open padlock on the remote
control.
The courtesy lamps come on; your vehicle is
also unlocked.
Switching off
The interior welcome lighting switches off
automatically after a set time or when one of
the doors is opened.
Programming
The function is activated or
deactivated via the vehicle
configuration menu.
Door mirror
spotlamps
To make your approach to the vehicle easier,
these illuminate:
- the zones facing the driver’s and
passenger’s doors,
- the zones forward of the door mirrors and
rearward of the front doors.
Switching on
The spotlamps come on:
- when you unlock the vehicle,
- when you remove the key from the ignition,
- when you open a door,
- when you use the remote control.
Switching off
They are timed to go off automatically.
The dimmed passenger compartment lighting
improves visibility in the vehicle when the light
is poor.
The duration of the welcome lighting is
associated with and identical to that of
the automatic guide-me-home lighting.
The remote switching on of the passenger
compartment lighting makes your approach to
the vehicle easier in poor light. It operates with
the automatic illumination of headlamps.
Visibility
116
This comes on automatically when the boot is
opened and switches off automatically when
the boot is closed.
Boot lamp Torch
Portable lamp, fitted in the boot wall, which can
be used to light the boot or as a torch.
Operation
Once engaged firmly in its location, it comes
on automatically when the boot is opened and
switches off automatically when the boot is closed.
It operates with NiMH type rechargeable batteries.
It has a battery life of approximately 45 minutes
and recharges while you are driving.
Footwell lighting
Activation
The soft lighting provided by the footwell lamps
improves visibility in the vehicle when the light
is poor.
Different lighting times are available:
- when the ignition is off,
approximately ten minutes,
- in energy economy mode,
approximately thirty seconds,
- when the engine is running, no
limit.
For the torch function, refer to the
"Fittings" section.
Observe the polarities when fitting the
rechargeable batteries.
Never replace the rechargeable batteries
with normal single-use batteries.
Its operation is identical to that of the courtesy
lamps. The lighting comes on when one of the
doors is opened.
6
Fittings
117
Interior fi ttings
1.
Sun visor
2.
Grab handle with coat hook
3.
Storage compartment
4.
Storage compartment under the
steering wheel
5.
Storage compartment
6.
Illuminated glove box
7.
Door pockets
8.
Front 12 V accessory socket
(120 W)
9.
Storage compartment
10.
PEUGEOT Connect USB
11.
Cup holder
12.
Rear 12 V accessory socket
(120 W)
Fittings
118
Driver's storage
compartments
Storage box
This has storage areas for the handbook
pack, ...
To open, pull the handle then tilt the box.
Illuminated glove
box
This has storage areas, audio sockets for a
portable player and a location for the SIM card
(only with PEUGEOT Connect Media Navigation
(NG4 3D)), ...
To open the glove box, raise the handle.
The lamp comes on when the lid is opened.
Sun visor
Component which protects against sunlight
from the front or the side, also equipped with an
illuminated courtesy mirror.
With the ignition on, raise the concealing
flap; the mirror is lit automatically.
This sun visor is also equipped with a ticket
holder.
Card holder
This can be used for a toll payment ticket or
parking card, for example.
Coin storage
Storage
To connect a portable player or a SIM
card, refer to the "Audio equipment and
telematics" section.
6
Fittings
119
Centre console
Storage
Slide the cover for access to the 10.5 litre
storage compartment.
This can contain 2 half-litre bottles.
A ventilation outlet distributes cooled air.
USB Player - Plug
This connection box consists of a jack auxiliary
socket and/or a USB port.
It permits the connection of portable
equipment, such as a digital audio player of the
iPod
®
type or a USB memory stick.
®
type or a USB memory stick.
®
It reads the audio file formats (mp3, ogg,
wma, wav...) which are transmitted to your
audio equipment and played via the vehicle's
speakers.
You can manage these files using the steering
mounted controls or the audio equipment
control panel and display them on the
multifunction screen.
Connected to the USB port, the portable
equipment charges automatically.
For more information on the use of
this equipment, refer to the "Audio
equipment and telematics" section.
Storage device for the driver and front
passenger.
Fittings
120
Mats
Refitting
To refit the mat on the driver's side:
position the mat correctly,
refit the fixings by pressing,
check that the mat is secured correctly.
Fitting
When fitting the mat for the first time, on the
driver's side use only the fixings provided in the
wallet attached.
The other mats are simply placed on the
carpet.
Removal
To remove the mat on the driver's side:
move the seat as far back as possible,
unclip the fixings,
remove the mat.
12 V accessory
sockets
To connect a 12 V accessory (max power:
120 Watts), remove the cover and connect a
suitable adaptor .
Exceeding the maximum power could result in
damage to your accessory.
Removable carpet protection.
To avoid any risk of jamming of the
pedals:
- only use mats which are suited to
the fixings already present in the
vehicle; these fixings must be used,
- never fit one mat on top of another.
The use of mats not approved by
PEUGEOT may interfere with access to
the pedals and hinder the operation of
the cruise control/speed limiter.
6
Fittings
121
Storage compartments
under the rear footwells
Depending on the configuration, the vehicle
has storage compartments under the footwells,
located forward of the outer rear seats. Access
is via clipped flaps with a handle
A
.
"Aircraft" type tables
Installed on the back of each front seat, these
allow you to set down objects.
To use the table, lower it fully until it locks
in the low position.
To store the table, raise it, passing the
point of resistance, to the high position.
Storage drawer
It is located under the driver's seat (manual
adjustment).
Opening
Raise the front of the drawer and pull it.
Do not place heavy objects in the drawers.
On the passenger side, do not forget
to fold the "aircraft" type table before
placing the seat in the table position.
Do not place hard or heavy objects
on the table. They could become
dangerous projectiles in the event of
emergency braking or impact.
Fittings
122
Rear multimedia
This multimedia system allows rear passengers
to connect one or two external portable
systems (audio or video player, games
consoles, DVD player...). The sound is played
through two Bluetooth
®
wireless headphone
®
wireless headphone
®
sets, while the video content is displayed in
two 7-inch screens built into the backs of the
front seat head restraints.
Description
This system operates only with the
engine running.
The pack includes:
- the connection and control panel fitted on
the rear face of the centre console,
- two 7-inch screens built into the front head
restraints (with protective covers),
- two wireless Bluetooth technology
headphone sets with rechargeable
batteries,
- a 12 V charger with two outlets allowing the
simultaneous charging of two headphones,
1.
Power switch
2.
AV1 video input (yellow RCA socket)
3.
Stereo audio input A (red and white RCA
sockets)
4.
AV2 video input (yellow RCA socket)
5.
Stereo audio input B (red and white RCA
sockets)
6.
Selection of display in the left hand screen
(AV1 or AV2)
7.
Selection of display in the right hand
screen (AV1 or AV2)
8.
Connection indicator lamps for the
Bluetooth audio headphones (blue)
6
Fittings
123
1.
Screen power switch
2.
Display adjustment buttons
Each headphone set has a switch,
a connection indicator lamp (blue)
and a channel selector (A or B).
Operation
With the engine running, connect your
portable system to the RCA connectors
(e.g. with AV1 on the left).
Press the switch on the control panel,
the indicator lamp comes on and the AV1
indicator lamps come on.
Make a long press on the switch, its
indicator lamp flashes in blue.
Make a long press on the control panel
switch, the pairing with the headphone set
is complete when the blue indicator lamps
on the headphones and on the system are
on continuously.
Repeat the operation for the other
headphone set.
Press the screen switch if you have a video
source.
Start playing your portable system.
It is possible at any time to modify the
source for the video display (using
button
6
or
7
on the control panel: the
indicator lamp for the source selected
comes on) as well as the audio channel
(using the selector on the headphones).
The Multimedia system allows the
connection of a third Bluetooth
headphone set, not supplied.
If your seat is in the table position,
position a cover to avoid damaging the
screen.
These covers also conceal each
screen.
Fittings
124
Panoramic sunroof
Manual mode
Pull or press control
A
gently, without going
A gently, without going A
past the point of resistance.
The blind stops when you release the
control.
Automatic mode
Pull or press control
A
firmly, going beyond
the point of resistance.
One press opens or closes the blind
completely.
Pressing the control again stops the blind.
Safety anti-pinch
In automatic mode and at the end of its travel,
if the blind meets an obstacle while closing it
stops and moves back slightly.
There are two ways of opening and closing.
If the blind meets an obstacle during
operation, you must reverse the
movement of the blind. To do this, press
the control concerned.
When the driver operates the blind
control, he must ensure that no one is
preventing correct closing of the blind.
The driver must ensure that passengers
use the blind correctly.
Be aware of children when operating
the blind.
If the blind re-opens during a closing
manoeuvre, and immediately after it
stops.
Pull the control until the blind is fully
open.
Press the control until the blind is
fully closed.
The safety anti-pinch function is not
operational during these operations.
Continue to press for at least 3 seconds.
A slight movement of the blind will then be
noticeable, confirming the reinitialisation.
Reinitialisation:
if the blind's supply is cut off
while it is moving, the safety anti-pinch must be
reinitialised.
Press the control until the blind is fully
closed.
Component which has a tinted glass panoramic
surface to increase the light and visibility in the
passenger compartment.
Fitted with an electric blind in several sections
to improve temperature and noise related
comfort.
One-touch electric blind
6
Fittings
125
Boot fi ttings (5 seat version)
1.
Load space cover
2.
Hooks
3.
12 V accessory socket (120 W)
4.
Torch
5.
Concertina boards
6.
Stowing rings on the floor
7.
Cup holder
8.
Storage compartments or audio
amplifier
9.
Storage compartment under the floor
Fittings
126
1.
Load space cover
2.
Hooks
3.
12 V accessory socket (120 W)
4.
Torch
5.
Concertina boards
6.
Stowing rings on the floor
7.
Cup holder
8.
Armrests
9.
Storage compartments or audio
amplifier
10.
3 rd row seat belt buckles
Boot fi ttings (7 seat version)
6
Fittings
127
Roller load space cover
To install the load space cover:
position one of the ends of the roller in its
support,
insert the second end in its support,
pivot the ends of the roller downwards to
secure it,
reel out the load space cover to the boot
pillars,
insert the load space screen guides in the
rails on the boot pillars.
To remove the load space cover:
remove the load space cover guides from
the rails on the boot pillars,
reel in the load space cover in its roller,
To store the load space cover, roller
uppermost and flap facing towards the inside of
the vehicle:
place the right-hand end in its housing,
slide the left-hand end into the guide then
into its housing,
pivot the ends of the roller upwards to
release it,
remove the roller from its support.
secure the assembly by pivoting the ends
downwards.
The roller has two rings for fixing the
luggage retaining net depending on its
location.
If you use the 3 rd
row seats (7 seat
version), it is essential to store the roller
in its housing.
Fittings
128
High load retaining net *
To use it in row 1:
fold the rear seats,
open the covers of the upper fixings
1
,
unroll the high load retaining net,
position one of the ends of the net's metal
bar in the corresponding upper fixing
1
,
then do the same with the other end,
slacken the straps fully,
fix the snap hook of each of the straps
on the corresponding Top Tether ring
3
(located on the back of the folded rear side
seats),
tighten the straps,
check that the net is hooked and tightened
correctly.
To use it in row 2:
roll up or remove the load space screen,
open the covers of the upper fixings
2
,
unroll the high load retaining net,
position one of the ends of the net's metal
bar in the corresponding upper fixing
2
,
then do the same with the other end,
fix the snap hook of each of the straps in
the corresponding stowing ring
4
,
tighten the straps,
check that the net is hooked and tightened
correctly.
Hooked onto the special upper and lower
fixings, this permits use of the entire loading
volume up to the roof:
- behind the front seats (row 1) when the rear
seats are folded.
- behind the rear seats (row 2).
* If your vehicle is equipped with this.
When positioning the net, check that
the strap loops are visible from the
boot; this will make slackening or
tightening easier.
6
Fittings
129
Luggage retaining net
Hooked onto the stowing rings on the floor and/
or on the load space cover roller, the luggage
retaining net available as an accessory enables
you to secure your luggage.
There are 4 possible positions:
- flat at the bottom of the boot,
- horizontal, level with the load space cover,
- vertical at the back of the rear seats,
- flat at the bottom of the boot and vertical at
the back of the rear seats.
Fittings
130
The hooks permit the securing of shopping
bags.
Hooks
To connect a 12 V accessory (max power:
120 W), remove the cap and connect an
appropriate adaptor.
Turn the key to the ignition on position.
12 V accessory socket
Raise the concertina board to gain access
to the storage box.
Depending on the configuration, this has areas
for storing:
- a box of spare bulbs,
- a first aid kit,
- a tyre repair kit,
- two warning triangles,
- ...
Storage box (5 seat version)
6
Fittings
131
Torch
This is a removable lamp, fitted in the boot wall,
which can be used to illuminate the boot or as a
torch.
Operation
This torch operates with NiMH type
rechargeable batteries.
It has a battery life of approximately 45 minutes
and charges while you are driving.
Use
Extract the torch from its location pulling
the side of the torch
A
.
Press the switch, located on the back, to
switch the torch on or off.
Unfold the support, located on the back, to
set down and raise the torch; for example,
when changing a wheel.
Storing
Put the torch back in place in its location
starting with the narrow part
B
.
If you have forgotten to switch off the torch,
this switches it off automatically.
Rear side blinds
Fitted on the rear windows, these protect your
young children from the sun.
Pull the blind by the central tab.
Position the blind attachment on the hook.
3
rd
row (7 seat version)
2
nd
row
Observe the polarities when fitting the
batteries.
Never replace the rechargeable batteries
with normal single-use batteries.
It the torch is not engaged correctly, it may
not charge and may not come on when the
boot is opened.
For the boot lighting function, refer to
the "Visibility" section.
Child safety
132
General points relating to child seats
Although one of PEUGEOT main criteria when designing your vehicle, the safety of your children
also depends on you.
For maximum safety, please observe the
following recommendations:
- in accordance with European regulations,
all children under the age of 12 or less
than one and a half metres tall must
travel in approved child seats suited to
their weight
, on seats fitted with a seat
belt or ISOFIX mountings * ,
-
statistically, the safest seats in your
vehicle for carrying children are the
rear seats,
-
a child weighing less than 9 kg must
travel in the "
rearward
facing" position
both in the front and in the rear.
* The rules for carrying children are specific to
each country. Refer to the legislation in force
in your country.
PEUGEOT recommends
that children
should travel in the
outer
outer outer
rear seats
of
your vehicle:
-
"rearward
facing"
up to the age of 3,
-
"forward
facing"
over the age of 3.
7
Child safety
133
Passenger seat in the fully back and
highest position.
Forward facing
When a forward facing child seat is installed on
the
front passenger seat
, adjust the vehicle
seat to the fully back and highest position,
with the backrest straightened. Leave the
passenger's airbag active.
Rearward facing
When a rearward facing child seat is installed
on the
front passenger seat
, adjust the
vehicle seat to the fully back and highest
position, with the backrest straightened.
The passenger's airbag must be deactivated.
Otherwise,
the child risks being seriously
injured or killed if the airbag is deployed
.
Child seat in the front
Ensure that the seat belt is properly
tightened.
For child seats with a support leg,
ensure that this is in firm and steady
contact with the floor. If necessary,
adjust the passenger's seat.
Child safety
134
Passenger airbag OFF
For information on deactivating the
airbag, refer to the "Airbags" section.
Deactivating the passenger's airbag
Never install a rearward-facing child
restraint system on a seat protected by
an active front airbag. This could cause
the death of the child or serious injury.
The warning label present on both sides of
the passenger's sun visor repeats this advice.
In line with current legislation, the following
two pages contain this warning in all of the
languages required.
7
AR
BG
НИКОГА НЕ инсталирайте детско столче на седалка с АКТИВИРАНА предна ВЪЗДУШНА ВЪЗГЛАВНИЦА. Това можеда причини
СМЪРТ или СЕРИОЗНО НАРАНЯВАНЕ на детето.
CS
NIKDY neumisťujte dětské zádržné zařízení orientované směrem dozadu na sedadlo chráněné AKTIVOVANÝM čelním AIRBAGEM. Hrozí
nebezpečí SMRTI DÍTĚTE nebo VÁŽNÉHO ZRANĚNÍ.
DA
Brug aldrig en bagudvendt barnestol på et sæde der er beskyttet af en aktiv airbag. Død eller alvorlig skade på barnet kan forekomme.
DE
Verwenden Sie NIEMALS einen Kindersitz oder Babyschale gegen die Fahrtrichtung bei AKTIVIERTEM Airbag, TOD oder ERNSTHAFTE
VERLETZUNGEN können die Folge sein.
EL
Μη χρησιμοποιείτε ΠΟΤΕ παιδικό κάθισμα με την πλάτη του προς το εμπρός μέρος του αυτοκινήτου, σε μια θέση που προστατεύεται από
ΜΕΤΩΠΙΚΟ αερόσακο που είναι ΕΝΕΡΓΟΣ. Αυτό μπορεί να έχει σαν συνέπεια το ΘΑΝΑΤΟ ή το ΣΟΒΑΡΟ ΤΡΑΥΜΑΤΙΣΜΟ του ΠΑΙΔΙΟΥ
EN
NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the
CHILD can occur
ES
NO INSTALAR NUNCA EL SISTEMA DE RETENCIÓN PARA NIÑOS DE ESPALDAS AL SENTIDO DE LA CIRCULACIÓN SOBRE UN
ASIENTO PROTEGIDO CON UN COJÍN INFLABLE FRONTAL ( AIRBAG ) ACTIVADO. ESTO PUEDE CAUSAR LA MUERTE DEL BEBE
O HERIRLO GRAVEMENTE.
ET
Ärge kasutage kunagi lapse turvatooli seljaga sõidusuunas sõiduki istmel mis on kaitstud AKTIVEERITUD TURVAPADJAGA. See võib
põhjustada lapsele RASKEID VIGASTUSI või SURMA.
FI
ÄLÄ KOSKAAN aseta lapsen turvaistuinta selkä ajosuuntaan istuimelle, jonka edessä suojana on käyttöön aktivoitu TURVATYYNY. Sen
laukeaminen voi aiheuttaa LAPSEN KUOLEMAN tai VAKAVAN LOUKKAANTUMISEN.
FR
NE JAMAIS installer de système de retenue pour enfants faisant face vers l’arrière sur un siège protégé par un COUSSIN GONFLABLE
frontal ACTIVÉ.
Cela peut provoquer la MORT de l’ENFANT ou le BLESSER GRAVEMENT
HR
NIKADA ne postavljati dječju sjedalicu leđima u smjeru vožnje na sjedalo zaštićeno UKLJUČENIM prednjim ZRAČNIM JASTUKOM. To bi
moglo uzrokovati SMRT ili TEŠKU OZLJEDU djeteta.
HU
SOHA ne használjon menetiránynak háttal beszerelt gyermekülést olyan ülésen, amely AKTIVÁLT ÁLLAPOTÚ (BEKAPCSOLT)
FRONTLÉGZSÁKKAL van védve. Ez a gyermek halálát vagy súlyos sérülését okozhatja.
IT
NON installare MAI seggiolini per bambini posizionati in senso contrario a quello di marcia su un sedile protetto da un AIRBAG frontale
ATTIVATO. Ciò potrebbe provocare la MORTE o FERITE GRAVI al bambino.
LT
NIEKADA neįrenkite vaiko prilaikymo priemonės su atgal atgręžtu vaiku ant sėdynės, kuri saugoma VEIKIANČIOS priekinės ORO
PAGALVĖS. Išsiskleidus oro pagalvei vaikas gali būti MIRTINAI arba SUNKIAI TRAUMUOTAS.
Child safety
135
LV
NAV PIEĻAUJAMS uzstādīt uz aizmuguri vērstu bērnu sēdeklīti priekšējā pasažiera vietā, kurā ir AKTIVIZĒTS priekšējais DROŠĪBAS
GAISA SPILVENS.
Tas var izraisīt BĒRNA NĀVI vai radīt NOPIETNUS IEVAINOJUMUS.
MT
Qatt m’ghandek thalli tifel/tifla marbut f’siggu dahru lejn l-Airbag attiva, ghaliex tista’ tikkawza korriment serju jew anke mewt lit-tifel/tifla
NL
Plaats NOOIT een kinderzitje met de rug in de rijrichting op een zitplaats waarvan de AIRBAG is INGESCHAKELD. Bij het afgaan van de
airbag kan het KIND ERNSTIG OF DODELIJK GEWOND raken.
NO
Installer ALDRI et barnesete med ryggen mot kjøreretningen i et sete som er beskyttet med en frontal AKTIVERT KOLLISJONSPUTE,
BARNET risikerer å bli DREPT eller HARDT SKADET.
PL
NIGDY nie instalować fotelika dziecięcego w pozycji «tyłem do kierunku jazdy»na siedzeniu wyposażonym w CZOŁOWĄ PODUSZKĘ
POWIETRZNĄ w stanie AKTYWNYM.W przeciwnym razie dziecko narażone będzie na ŚMIERĆ lub BARDZO POWAŻNE OBRAŻENIA
CIAŁA w momenicie wyzwolenia poduszki powietrznej
PT
NUNCA instale um sistema de retenção para crianças de costas para a estrada, num banco protegido por um AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO.
Esta instalação poderá provocar FERIMENTOS GRAVES ou a MORTE da CRIANÇA.
RO
Nu instalati NICIODATA un sistem de retinere pentru copii, dispus cu spatele in directia de mers, pe un loc din vehicul protejat cu AIRBAG
frontal ACTIVAT. Aceasta ar putea provoca MOARTEA COPILULUI sau RANIREA lui GRAVA.
RU
ВО ВСЕХ СЛУЧАЯХ ЗАПРЕЩАЕТСЯ использовать обращенное назад детское удерживающее устройство на сиденье,
защищенном ФУНКЦИОНИРУЮЩЕЙ ПОДУШКОЙ БЕЗОПАСНОСТИ, установленной перед этим сиденьем.
Это может привести к ГИБЕЛИ РЕБЕНКА или НАНЕСЕНИЮ ЕМУ СЕРЬЕЗНЫХ ТЕЛЕСНЫХ ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЙ
SK
NIKDY nepoužívajte na prednom sedadle chránenom AKTÍVNYM AIRBAGOM detské zadržiavacie zariadenie umiestnené v proti smere
jazdy. Môže to spôsobiť SMRŤ, alebo VÁŽNE ZRANENIE DIEŤAŤA.
SL
NIKOLI ne nameščajte otroškega sedeža s hrbtom v smeri vožnje, če je VARNOSTNA BLAZINA pred sprednjim sopotnikovim sedežem
AKTIVIRANA. Takšna namestitev lahko povzroči SMRT OTROKA ali HUDE POŠKODBE.
SR
NIKADA ne koristite dečje sedište koje se okreće unazad na sedištu zaštićenim AKTIVNIM VAZDUŠNIM JASTUKOM ispred njega, jer
mogu nastupiti SMRT ili OZBILJNA POVREDA DETETA.
SV
Använd ALDRIG en bakåtvänd barnstol i ett säte skyddat av en AKTIV AIRBAG framför det. Det kan orsaka ALLVARLIGA eller DÖDLIGA
skador på barnet.
TR
KESİNLKLE HAVA YASTIĞI AKTİF olan ön koltuğa yüzü arkaya dönük bir çocuk koltuğu yerleştirmeyiniz. Bu ÇOCUĞUN ÖLMESİNE veya
ÇOK AĞIR YARALANMASINA sebep olabilir.
Child safety
136
7
Child safety
137
Child seat at the rear
"Rearward facing"
When a "rearward facing" child seat is installed
on a rear passenger seat
, move the vehicle's
front seat forwards and straighten the backrest
so that the "rearward facing" child seat does
not touch the vehicle's front seat.
"Forward facing"
When a "forward facing" child seat is installed
on a rear passenger seat
, move the vehicle's
front seat forwards and straighten the backrest
so that the legs of the child in the "forward
facing" child seat do not touch the vehicle's
front seat.
Seats in the
3
rd
row
When a child seat is installed
on a 3
rd
row
passenger seat
, move the 2
nd
row seat
forwards and straighten the backrest so that
the child seat and the legs of the child do not
touch the 2
nd
row seat.
A child seat with a stay must never be installed
on a
3
rd
row passenger seat
.
Child safety
138
Installing a child seat with a support leg
If the support leg is long enough, you can
adjust it so that it contact the bottom of the
storage compartment. Remove all objects from
the storage compartment before installing the
support leg.
Another possibility, if the support leg is long
enough and can be inclined sufficiently (always
by following the recommendations given the
installation instructions for the child seat), is
to position the support leg so that it contacts
the floor away from the storage compartment.
Adjust the longitudinal position of the front
or rear seat to obtain a satisfactory position
for the support leg away from the storage
compartment.
Care must be taken when installing a child seat
with a support leg in the vehicle. In particular
you should look for the presence of a storage
compartment below the rear seat footwells.
If you cannot fit the support leg in
way described on one of these two
procedures,you should not fit a child
seat with support leg to this seat.
Do not place the support leg on the
storage compartment cover; it might
break in a serious impact. Where the
adjustments of the support leg allow it,
we suggest two other possibilities for
installation.
The centre rear seat does not have
a storage compartment below the
footwell. You can therefore easily fit a
child seat with a support leg, whether
installed with the Isofix mountings or
using the 3 point seat belt.
At the bottom of the
storage compartment
Away from the storage
compartment area
7
Child safety
139
Child seats recommended by PEUGEOT
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
L1
"RÖMER/BRITAX Baby-Safe Plus".
Installed in the rearward-facing position.
L2
"RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX".
Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg
L5
"KLIPPAN Optima".
From the age of approximately 6 years (22 kg),
the booster is used on its own.
L6
"RÖMER KIDFIX"
Can be secured using the vehicle's ISOFIX
mountings. The child is restrained by the seat
belt.
PEUGEOT offers a complete range of recommended child seats which are secured using a
three point seat belt
.
Child safety
140
Installing child seats using the seat belt
In accordance with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing child seats secured using a seat belt and universally approved
(a)
in accordance with the weight of the child and the seat in the vehicle.
Weight of the child and indicative age
Seat
Under 13 kg
(groups 0 (
b
) and 0+)
Up to approx 1 year
From 9 to 18 kg
(group 1)
1 to 3 years approx
From 15 to 25 kg
(group 2)
3 to 6 years approx
From 22 to 36 kg
(group 3)
6 to 10 years approx
Front passenger
seat (
c
) with height
c ) with height c
adjuster
U (R)
U (R)
U (R)
U (R)
Front passenger
seat
(c)
without
height adjuster
X
X
X
X
5 seats
(2 rows)
Outer rear
seats
(d)
(e)
U
*
U
*
U
*
U
*
Centre rear
seat
(d)
(e)
U
U
U
U
* Precautions are required when fitting a child seat with a
support leg
. Refer to the section "Installing a child seat with a support leg" for more
information.
7
Child safety
141
Remove and stow the head restraint
before installing a child seat with
backrest on a passenger seating
position. Refit the head restraint when
the child seat is removed.
a:
universal child seat, child seat that can be
installed in all vehicles using a seat belt.
b:
group 0, from birth to 10 kg. Shells seats and
baby carriers cannot be installed in the front
passenger seat.
c:
consult the legislation in force in your
country before installing your child on this
seat.
d:
to install a child seat on a rear seat,
"rearward facing" or "forward facing", move
the front seat forward, then straighten the
backrest to allow enough space for the child
seat and the child's legs.
e:
to install a child seat on a rear seat,
"rearward facing" or "forward facing", adjust
the rear seat to the fully back position, with
the backrest upright.
U:
seat suitable for the installation of a
child seat secured using a seat belt and
universally approved, "rearward facing" and/
or "forward facing".
U (R):
same as
U
, with the vehicle's seat
adjusted to the highest position.
L:
only the child seats indicated can be
installed on the seat concerned (according
to country).
X:
seat position not suitable for installation of a
child seat for the weight class indicated.
Child safety
142
Weight of the child and indicative age
Seat
Under 13 kg
(groups 0
(b)
and 0+)
Up to approx 1 year
From 9 to 18 kg
(group 1)
1 to 3 years approx
From 15 to 25 kg
(group 2)
3 to 6 years approx
From 22 to 36 kg
(group 3)
6 to 10 years approx
Front passenger seat
(c)
with height adjuster
U (R)
U (R)
U (R)
U (R)
Front passenger
seat
(c)
without height adjuster
X
X
X
X
7 seats
(3 rows)
Outer rear seats
2nd row
(d)
(e)
U
*
U
*
U
*
U
*
Centre rear seat
2nd row
(d)
(e)
U
U
U
U
Rear seats 3rd row
U
U
U
U
* Precautions are required when fitting a child seat with a
support leg
. Refer to the section "Installing a child seat with a support leg" for more
information.
7
Child safety
143
a:
universal child seat, child seat that can be
installed in all vehicles using a seat belt.
b:
group 0, from birth to 10 kg. Shells seats and
baby carriers cannot be installed in the front
passenger seat.
c:
consult the legislation in force in your
country before installing your child on this
seat.
d:
To install a child seat on a rear seat,
"rearward facing" or "forward facing", move
the front seat forward, then straighten the
backrest to allow enough space for the child
seat and the child's legs.
e:
To install a child seat on a rear seat,
"rearward facing" or "forward facing", adjust
the rear seat to the fully back position, with
the backrest upright.
Remove and stow the head restraint
before installing a child seat on a
passenger seat. Refit the head restraint
once the child seat has been removed..
U:
seat suitable for the installation of a
child seat secured using a seat belt and
universally approved, "rearward facing" and/
or "forward facing".
U (R):
same as
U
, with the vehicle's seat
adjusted to the highest position.
L-:
only the child seats indicated can be
installed on the seat concerned (according
to country).
X:
seat position not suitable for installation of a
child seat for the weight class indicated.
Child safety
144
"ISOFIX" mountings
The ISOFIX mountings are three rings for each
seat:
- two rings
A
, located between the vehicle seat
back and cushion, indicated by a marking,
This ISOFIX mounting system ensures fast,
reliable and safe fitting of the child seat in your
vehicle.
The
ISOFIX child seats
are fitted with two
latches which are secured easily on the two
rings
A
.
Some also have an
upper strap
(or top tether)
which is attached to ring
B
.
To secure the child seat to the
TOP TETHER
:
- remove and stow the head restraint before
installing the child seat on this seat (refit it
after the child seat has been removed),
- remove the
TOP TETHER
cover by pulling
at its cut-out,
- pass the child seat strap behind the seat
backrest, centred between the holes for the
head restraint rods,
- secure the upper strap fixing to the ring
B
,
- tighten the upper strap.
5 seats
7 seats
Your vehicle has been approved in accordance with the
latest ISOFIX regulations
.
The seats, represented below, are fitted with regulation ISOFIX mountings:
- a ring
B
, located under a cover on the back
of the top of the seat backrest, referred to as
the
TOP TETHER
for fixing the upper strap.
TOP TETHER for fixing the upper strap. TOP TETHER
Its position is indicated by a marking.
Located on the back of the seat backrest, the
top tether is used to secure the upper strap of
child seats that have one. This device limits
forward tipping of the child seat, in the event of
a front impact.
7
Child safety
145
ISOFIX child seat
This child seat can also be used on seats which are not fitted with ISOFIX mountings.
In this case, it must be attached to the vehicle seat using the three point seat belt.
Adjust the front seat of the vehicle so that the child's feet do not touch the backrest.
Follow the instructions for fitting the child seat given in the seat manufacturer's
installation guide.
For information on the possibilities
for fitting ISOFIX child seats to your
vehicle, refer to the table of seating
positions.
The incorrect installation of a child seat
in a vehicle compromises the child's
protection in the event of an accident.
Observe strictly the fitting instructions
provided with the child seat.
Recommended by PEUGEOT and approved for your
vehicle
ISOFIX child seat with TOP TETHER
RÖMER
Duo Plus ISOFIX
(size category
B1
)
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
Installed only in the "forward-facing" position.
Is attached to the rings
A
, as well as the ring
B
, referred to as
the TOP TETHER, using an upper strap.
Three seat body angles: sitting, reclining, lying.
Child safety
146
Seating positions for installing ISOFIX child seats
In accordance with European Regulations, this table indicates the options for installing ISOFIX child seats on seats in the vehicle fitted with ISOFIX
mountings.
In the case of universal and semi-universal ISOFIX child seats, the ISOFIX size category, determined by a letter between
A
and
G
, is indicated on the
child seat next to the ISOFIX logo.
Weight of the child
/ indicative age
Less than 10 kg
(group 0)
Up to
approx. 6 months
Less than 10 kg
(group 0)
Less than 13 kg
(group 0+)
Up to approx. 1 year
From 9 to 18 kg (group 1)
From approx. 1 to 3 years
Type of ISOFIX child seat
Shell
"rearwards-facing"
"rearwards-facing"
"forwards-facing"
ISOFIX size category
F
G
C
D
E
C
D
A
B
B1
Front passenger seat
X
X
X
X
5 seats
(2 rows)
Outer rear seats
IL-SU
*
IL-SU
*
IL-SU
*
IUF
*
IL-SU *
Centre rear seat
X
IL-SU
IL-SU
IUF
IL-SU
7
Child safety
147
Remove and stow the head restraint
before installing a child seat on a
passenger seat. Refit the head restraint
once the child seat has been removed.
* Precautions are required when fitting a child
seat with a
stay
(or drop down leg). Refer to
the section on "Installing a child seat with a
support leg" for more information.
IUF:
seat suitable for the installation of an
I
sofix
U
niversal seat, "
F
orward facing" secured
using the top belt to the upper ring of an
ISOFIX seating position.
IL-SU:
seat suitable for the installation of an
I
sofix
S
emi-
U
niversal seat either:
- "rearward facing" fitted with a top
belt or a support leg,
- "forward facing" fitted with a support
leg,
- a shell seat fitted with an upper strap
or a support leg.
For advice on securing of the top belt, refer to
the section on "ISOFIX mountings".
X:
seat not suitable for the installation of a child
seat or shell for the weight group indicated.
Child safety
148
Weight of the child
/ indicative age
Less than 10 kg
(group 0)
Up to
approx. 6 months
Less than 10 kg
(group 0)
Less than 13 kg
(group 0+)
Up to approx. 1 year
From 9 to 18 kg (group 1)
From approx. 1 to 3 years
Type of ISOFIX child seat
Shell
"rearwards-facing"
"rearwards-facing"
"forwards-facing"
ISOFIX size category
F
G
C
D
E
C
D
A
B
B1
Front passenger seat
X
X
X
X
7 seats
(3 rows)
Outer rear seats 2nd row
IL-SU
*
IL-SU
*
IL-SU
*
IUF
*
IL-SU
*
Centre rear seat 2nd row
X
IL-SU
IL-SU
IUF
IL-SU
Rear seats 3rd row
Not Isofix
7
Child safety
149
* Precautions are required when fitting a child
seat with a
support leg
. Refer to the section
on "Installing a child seat with a support leg"
for more information.
IUF:
seat suitable for the installation of an
I
sofix
U
niversal seat, "
F
orward facing" secured
using the top belt to the upper ring of an
ISOFIX seating position.
IL-SU:
seat suitable for the installation of an
I
sofix
S
emi-
U
niversal seat either:
- "rearward facing" fitted with a top
belt or a support leg,
- "forward facing" fitted with a support
leg,
- a shell seat fitted with an upper strap
or a support leg.
For advice on securing of the top belt, refer to
the section on "ISOFIX mountings".
X:
seat not suitable for the installation of a child
seat or shell for the weight group indicated..
Child safety
150
Advice on child seats
The incorrect installation of a child seat in a
vehicle compromises the child's protection in
the event of an accident.
Remember to fasten the seat belts or the
child seat harnesses
keeping the slack
in
relation to the child's body
to a minimum
,
even for short journeys.
For optimum installation of the "forward
facing" child seat, ensure that the back of
the child seat is as close as possible to the
backrest of the vehicle's seat, or in contact if
possible
The head restraint must be removed before
installing a child seat with a backrest on the
passenger seat.
Ensure that the head restraint is stowed or
attached securely so that it is not thrown
around the vehicle in the event of sharp
braking.
Refit the head restraint as soon as the child
seat is removed.
Children at the front
The legislation on carrying a child on the front
passenger seat is specific to each country.
Refer to the legislation in force in your
country.
Deactivate the passenger's airbag when a
"rearward facing" child seat is installed on
the front seat. Otherwise, the child would risk
being seriously injured or killed if the airbag
were deployed.
Installing a booster cushion
The chest part of the seat belt must be
positioned on the child's shoulder without
touching the neck.
Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt
passes correctly over the child's thighs.
PEUGEOT recommends the use of a booster
seat which has a back, fitted with a seat belt
guide at shoulder level.
As a safety precaution, do not leave:
- one or more children alone and
unsupervised in a vehicle,
- a child or an animal in a vehicle which
is exposed to the sun, with the windows
closed,
- the keys within reach of children inside
the vehicle.
To prevent accidental opening of the doors,
use the "Child lock".
Take care not to open the rear windows by
more than one third.
To protect young children from the rays of the
sun, fit side blinds on the rear windows.
7
Child safety
151
Manual child lock
Turn the red control one eighth of a turn
using the ignition key as shown in the label
on the door.
Check that the lock is on
.
Electric child lock
With the ignition on, press this button.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on,
accompanied by a message to confirm that the
child lock is on.
This indicator lamp remains on until the child
lock is switched off.
It is still possible to open the doors from the
outside and operate the rear electric windows
from the driver's control panel.
Locking
Unlocking
Turn the red control one eighth of a turn
using the ignition key.
Switching on
Switching off
With the ignition on, press this button again.
The indicator lamp in the button goes off,
accompanied by a message to confirm that the
child lock is off.
This indicator lamp remains off while the child
lock is switched off.
Any other status of the indicator lamp
indicates a fault with the electric child
lock.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer
or a qualified workshop.
This system is independent and in no
circumstances does it take the place of
the central locking control.
Check the status of the child lock each
time you switch on the ignition.
Always remove the key from the ignition
when leaving the vehicle, even for a
short time.
In the event of a serious impact, the
electric child lock is switched off
automatically to permit the exit of the
rear passengers.
Remote control system to prevent opening of the
rear doors using their interior controls and use of
the rear electric windows.
Mechanical system to prevent opening of the
rear door using its interior control.
The control is located on the edge of each rear
door.
Safety
152
Direction indicators
Lower the lighting control stalk fully when
moving to the left.
Raise the lighting control stalk fully when
moving to the right.
Hazard warning lamps
Tilt or press button
A
, the direction
indicators flash.
They can operate with the ignition off.
Automatic operation of
hazard warning lamps
When braking in an emergency, depending on
the deceleration, the hazard warning lamps
come on automatically.
They switch off automatically the first time you
accelerate.
You can also switch them off by pressing
the button.
Horn
Press one of the spokes of the steering wheel.
Audible warning to alert other road users to an
imminent danger.
Three fl ashes
Move the stalk briefly upwards or downwards,
without going beyond the point of resistance;
the corresponding direction indicators will flash
3 times.
Use the horn moderately and only in the
following cases:
- immediate danger,
- overtaking a cyclist or pedestrian,
- when approaching an area where
there is no visibility.
If you forget to cancel the direction
indicators for more than twenty
seconds, the volume of the audible
signal will increase if the speed is above
40 mph (60 km/h).
A visual warning by means of the direction
indicators to alert other road users to a vehicle
breakdown, towing or accident.
This function can be used at any speed, but it
is particularly useful for changing lane on fast
roads.
8
Safety
153
Tyre under-infl ation detection
System which automatically checks the
pressures of the tyres while driving.
The system continuously monitors the
pressures of the four tyres, as soon as the
vehicle is moving.
A pressure sensor is located in the valve of a
each tyres (except the spare wheel).
The system triggers an alert if a drop in
pressure is detected in one or more tyres.
This system does not avoid the need
to check the tyre pressures regularly
(including the spare wheel) and before
a long journey.
Driving with under-inflated tyres
adversely affects road holding,
extends braking distances and causes
premature tyre wear, particularly under
arduous conditions (vehicle loaded,
high speed, long journey).
The tyre pressures for your vehicle can
be found on the tyre pressure label (see
the "Identification markings" section).
The tyre pressures must be checked
when the tyres cold (vehicle stopped
for 1 hour or after driving for less then
6 miles (10 km) at moderate speed).
Otherwise, add 0.3 bar to the values
indicated on the label.
Driving with under-inflated tyres
increases fuel consumption.
The tyre under-inflation detection
system is an aid to driving which does
not replace the need for the driver to be
vigilant or to drive responsibly.
Safety
154
The alert is given by the fixed illumination
of this warning lamp, accompanied by
an audible signal, and depending on
equipment, the display of a message.
Under-inflation alert
The flashing and then fixed
illumination of the under-inflation
warning lamp accompanied by the
illumination of the "service" warning
lamp indicates a fault with the system.
Operating fault
In the event of a problem on one of the tyres,
the symbol or the message appears, according
to equipment, to identify it.
Reduce speed, avoid sudden steering
movements or harsh brake applications.
Stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
In the event of a puncture, use the
temporary puncture repair kit or the spare
wheel (according to equipment),
or
if you have a compressor, the one in the
temporary puncture repair kit for example,
check the four tyre pressures when cold,
or
if it is not possible to check the tyre
pressures at the time, drive carefully at
reduced speed.
The loss of pressure detected does not
always lead to visible deformation of the
tyre. Do not rely on just a visual check.
The alert is maintained until the tyre or
tyres concerned is reinflated, repaired
or replaced.
The spare wheel (space-saver type or a
steel rim) does not have a sensor.
This alert is also displayed when one or
more wheels is not fitted with a sensor
(for example, a space-saver or steel
spare wheel).
In this case, monitoring of the tyre pressures is
not assured.
Go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop to have the system checked
or, following the repair of a puncture, to
have the original wheel, equipped with a
sensor, refitted.
8
Safety
155
Electronic stability programme (ESC)
Definitions
Anti-slip regulation (ASR)
The ASR system (also known as Traction
Control) optimises traction in order to limit
wheel slip by acting on the brakes of the driving
wheels and on the engine. It also improves
the directional stability of the vehicle on
acceleration.
Dynamic stability control (DSC)
If there is a difference between the path
followed by the vehicle and that required by
the driver, the DSC monitors each wheel and
automatically acts on the brake of one or more
wheels and on the engine to return the vehicle
to the required path, within the limits of the laws
of physics.
Emergency braking assistance
In an emergency, this system enables you to
reach the optimum braking pressure more
quickly and therefore reduce the stopping
distance.
It is triggered according to the speed at which
the brake pedal is pressed. This is felt by a
reduction in the resistance of the pedal and an
increase in the effectiveness of the braking.
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
and electronic brake force
distribution (EBFD)
This system improves the stability and
manoeuvrability of your vehicle when braking
and provides improved control in corners, in
particular on poor or slippery road surfaces.
The ABS prevents wheel lock in the event of
emergency braking.
The electronic brake force distribution system
manages the braking pressure wheel by wheel.
Snow driving assistance
(Intelligent Traction Control)
Your vehicle has a system to help driving on
snow:
Intelligent Traction Control.
This automatic system continuously checks
for situations of difficult surface adhesion that
could make it difficult to move off or make
progress on deep fresh snow or compacted
snow.
In these situations,
Intelligent Traction
Control
limits the amount of wheel slip to
provide the best traction and trajectory control.
In extremely severe conditions (deep snow,
mud…), it can be useful to temporarily
deactivate the
dynamic stability control and
wheel anti-slip
systems to allow a degree of
wheel spin and so recover grip.
It is recommended that the system be
reactivated as soon as possible.
Snow tyres are strongly recommended on
surfaces offering low levels of adhesion.
Electronic Stability Programme (ESC:
Electronic Stability Control) incorporating the
following systems:
- the anti-lock braking system (ABS) and the
electronic brake force distribution (EBFD),
- the emergency braking assistance,
- the anti-slip regulation (ASR) or traction
control,
- the dynamic stability control (DSC).
Safety
156
Operation
When this warning lamp comes on,
accompanied by an audible signal
and a message, it indicates that
there is a fault with the ABS, which could cause
loss of control of the vehicle when braking.
When this warning lamp comes on,
coupled with the
STOP
warning
lamp, accompanied by an audible
signal and a message, it indicates
that there is a fault with the electronic brake
force distribution (EBFD), which could cause
loss of control of the vehicle when braking.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
In both cases, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
and electronic brake force
distribution (EBFD)
In emergency braking, press very firmly
without releasing the pressure.
Dynamic stability control (DSC)
and anti-slip regulation (ASR)
This is indicated by flashing of this
warning lamp in the instrument
panel.
Activation
These systems are activated automatically
each time the vehicle is started.
As soon as they detect a problem of grip or
trajectory, these systems act on the operation if
the engine and brakes.
Normal operation of the ABS may make
itself felt by slight vibrations of the brake
pedal.
When changing wheels (tyres and rims),
make sure that these are approved for
your vehicle.
8
Safety
157
Deactivation
In exceptional conditions (starting a vehicle
which is bogged down, stuck in snow, on soft
ground...), it may be advisable to deactivate
the DSC and ASR, so that the wheels can turn
freely and regain grip.
Reactivate the systems as soon as the level of
grip permits.
Press this button.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
The DSC and ASR systems no longer act
on the operation of the engine and on the
brakes in the event of a involuntary change of
trajectory.
Reactivation
The systems are reactivated automatically each
time the ignition is switched back on or from
30 mph (50 km/h).
Below 30 mph (50 km/h), you can reactivate
them manually:
Operating fault
Illumination of this warning lamp
and the lamp in the deactivation
button, accompanied by an audible
signal and a message, indicate a
fault with the system.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop to have the system checked.
Press this button again.
DSC/ASR
The DSC and ASR systems offer
increased safety in normal driving, but
they should not encourage the driver to
take extra risks or drive at high speed.
It is in conditions of reduced grip (rain,
snow, ice) that the risk of loss of grip
increases. It is therefore important for
your safety to keep the DSC and ASR
systems activated in all conditions, and
particularly in difficult conditions.
The correct operation of these
systems depends on observation of
the manufacturer's recommendations
regarding as much the wheels (tyres
and rims), braking and electronic
components as the assembly and repair
procedures used by PEUGEOT dealers.
To benefit in full from the effectiveness
of the DSC and ASR systems in wintry
conditions, the vehicle must be fitted
with four snow tyres, allowing the the
vehicle to retain neutral behaviour on
the road.
After an impact, have these systems
checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Safety
158
Front seat belts not fastened /
unfastened warning lamp
Fastening
Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the
buckle.
Check that the seat belt is fastened
correctly by pulling the strap.
Height adjustment
To adjust the anchorage point, squeeze the
control
A
and slide it until you find a notch.
When the ignition is switched on, this
warning lamp comes on on the seat belt
and passenger's front airbag warning
lamps display, if the driver and/or the front
passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
From approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) this warning
lamp flashes for two minutes accompanied by
an audible signal. Once these two minutes have
elapsed, this warning lamp remains on until the driver
and/or the front passenger fastens their seat belt.
Unfastening
Press the red button on the buckle.
Guide the seat belt as it reels in.
Seat belts
Front seat belts
The front seat belts are fitted with a
pretensioning and force limiting system.
This system improves safety in the front
seats in the event of a front or side impact.
Depending on the severity of the impact, the
pretensioning system instantly tightens the seat
belts against the body of the occupants.
The pretensioning seat belts are active when
the ignition is on.
The force limiter reduces the pressure of the
seat belt on the chest of the occupant, so
improving their protection.
8
Safety
159
1.
Front and/or rear seat belts not fastened /
unfastened warning lamp.
2.
Front left seat belt warning lamp.
3.
Front right seat belt warning lamp.
4.
Rear right seat belt warning lamp.
5.
Rear centre seat belt warning lamp.
6.
Rear left seat belt warning lamp.
Seat belts not fastened /
unfastened warning lamps
display
Rear seat belts
The rear seats are each fitted with a three-point
inertia reel seat belt with force limiter (with the
exception of the centre rear seat).
Seat belt unfastened warning
lamp
This warning lamp comes on on
the seat belt and passenger's front
airbag warning lamps display,
when one or more rear passengers
unfasten their seat belt.
From approximately 12 mph (20 km/h),
this warning lamp flashes for two minutes
accompanied by an audible signal. Once
these two minutes have elapsed, this warning
lamp remains on until the one or more rear
passengers fasten their seat belt.
Fastening
Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the
buckle.
Check that the seat belt is fastened
correctly by pulling the strap.
Unfastening
Press the red button on the buckle.
Guide the seat belt as it reels in.
The corresponding warning lamp
2
or
3
comes
on in red on the seat belt and passenger's front
airbag warning lamps display if the seat belt is
not fastened or is unfastened.
7 seat version
7.
3
rd
row rear left seat belt warning lamp
8.
3
rd
row rear right seat belt warning lamp.
Safety
160
Seat belt unfastened warning
lamps display
When the ignition is switched on, with the engine
running or when the vehicle is moving at less than
12 mph (20 km/h), the corresponding warning
lamps
4
to
8
come on in red for approximately
30 seconds, if the seat belt is not fastened.
When the vehicle is moving at more than 12 mph
(20 km/h), the corresponding warning lamp
4
,
5
,
6
,
7
or
8
comes on in red, accompanied by an
audible signal and a message in the multifunction
screen, if a rear passenger has unfastened their
seat belt.
2
nd
row rear centre seat belt
Installation
Pull the strap and insert the tongue
A
in the
A in the A
right-hand buckle.
Insert the tongue
B
in the left-hand buckle.
Check the fastening of each buckle by
pulling the strap.
Removal and storing
Press the red button on the buckle
B
, then
on the buckle
A
.
Guide the strap as it reels in and bring the
tongue
B
, then
A
onto the magnet of the
attachment point on the roof.
3
rd
row rear seat belts
(7 seat version)
Installation
Pull the strap and insert the tongue
C
in the
buckle, on the boot side trim side.
Insert the tongue
D
in the opposite buckle.
Check the fastening of each buckle by
pulling the strap.
The seat belts for the rear seats of the
3
rd
row are incorporated at the corner of the
corresponding boot pillar and of the roof.
Removal and storing
Press the red button on the buckle
D
, then on
D , then on D
the buckle
C
.
Guide the strap as it reels in and the
tongues
D
and
C
.
The seat belt for the rear centre seat of the
2
nd
row is incorporated at the rear right of
the roof.
To prevent movement of the rear side
seat belts in the 2
nd row, slide the
straps into the guides provided for this
purpose.
8
Safety
161
The driver must ensure that passengers use
the seat belts correctly and that they are all
restrained securely before setting off.
Wherever you are seated in the vehicle,
always fasten your seat belt, even for short
journeys.
Do not interchange the seat belt buckles as
they will not fulfil their role fully.
The seat belts are fitted with an inertia reel
permitting automatic adjustment of the length
of the strap to your size. The seat belt is
stowed automatically when not in use.
Before and after use, ensure that the seat belt
is reeled in correctly.
The lower part of the strap must be positioned
as low as possible on the pelvis.
The upper part must be positioned in the
hollow of the shoulder.
The inertia reels are fitted with an automatic
locking device which comes into operation in
the event of a collision, emergency braking
or if the vehicle rolls over. You can release
the device by pulling firmly on the strap and
releasing it so that it reels in slightly.
In order to be effective, a seat belt must:
- be tightened as close to the body as
possible,
- be pulled in front of you with a smooth
movement, checking that it does not
twist,
- be used to restrain only one person,
- not bear any trace of cuts or fraying,
- not be converted or modified to avoid
affecting its performance.
In the event of an impact
Depending on the nature and seriousness
of the impact
, the pretensioning device may
be deployed before and independently of the
airbags. Deployment of the pretensioners
is accompanied by a slight discharge of
harmless smoke and a noise, due to the
activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge
incorporated in the system.
In all cases, the airbag warning lamp
comes on.
Following an impact, have the seat belts
system checked, and if necessary replaced,
by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Recommendations for children
Use a suitable child seat if the passenger is
less than 12 years old or shorter than one and
a half metres.
Never use the same seat belt to secure more
than one person.
Never allow a child to travel on your lap.
In accordance with current safety regulations,
for all repairs on your vehicle, go to a qualified
workshop with the skills and equipment
needed, which a PEUGEOT dealer is able to
provide.
Have your seat belts checked regularly by a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop,
particularly if the straps show signs of
damage.
Clean the seat belt straps with soapy water or
a textile cleaning product, sold by PEUGEOT
dealers.
After folding or moving a seat or rear bench
seat, ensure that the seat belt is positioned
and reeled in correctly.
Safety
162
Airbags
Front airbags
Deployment
The airbags are deployed, except the passenger's
front airbag if it is deactivated, in the event of a
serious front impact to all or part of the front impact
zone
A
, in the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle
on a horizontal plane and directed from the front to
the rear of the vehicle.
The front airbag inflates between the thorax and
head of the front occupant of the vehicle and the
steering wheel, driver's side, and the dashboard,
passenger's side to cushion their forward movement.
Impact detection zones
A.
Front impact zone.
B.
Side impact zone.
System designed to maximise the safety of the
occupants (with the exception of the rear centre
passenger) in the event of violent collisions.
The airbags supplement the action of the force-
limiting seat belts (with the exception of the
centre rear passenger).
If a collision occurs, the electronic detectors
record and analyse the front and side impacts
sustained in the impact detection zones:
- in the case of a serious impact, the airbags
are deployed instantly and contribute
towards better protection of the occupants
of the vehicle (with the exception of the
rear centre passenger); immediately after
the impact, the airbags deflate rapidly so
that they do not hinder visibility or the exit
of the occupants,
- in the case of a minor or rear impact
or in certain roll-over conditions, the
airbags will not be deployed; the seat belt
alone contributes towards ensuring your
protection in these situations.
System which protects the driver and front
passenger in the event of a serious front impact
in order to limit the risk of injury to the head and
thorax.
The driver's airbag is fitted in the centre of the
steering wheel; the front passenger's airbag is
fitted in the dashboard above the glove box.
The airbags do not operate when the
ignition is switched off.
This equipment will only deploy once.
If a second impact occurs (during the
same or a subsequent accident), the
airbag will not be deployed again.
Deployment of the airbag(s) is
accompanied by a slight emission of
smoke and a noise, due to the activation
of the pyrotechnic cartridge incorporated
in the system.
This smoke is not harmful, but sensitive
individuals may experience slight
irritation.
The noise of the detonation may result in
a slight loss of hearing for a short time.
8
Safety
163
Operating fault
If this warning lamp comes on,
accompanied by an audible
warning and a message, contact
a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop to have the system checked. The
airbags may no longer be deployed in the event
of a serious impact.
Reactivation
When you remove the child seat,
with the
ignition off
, turn the switch to the
ignition off , turn the switch to the ignition off
"ON"
position to reactivate the airbag and so assure
the safety of your front passenger in the event
of an impact.
When switching the ignition on,
this warning lamp comes on in the
seat belt and passenger's front
airbag warning lamps display for
approximately one minute, to signal that the
passenger's front airbag is activated.
On switching on the ignition, this
warning lamp comes on in the
instrument panel and/or in the seat
belt and passenger's front airbag
warning lamps display. It stays on
until the airbag is reactivated.
Deactivation
Only the passenger's front airbag can be
deactivated.
With the ignition off
, insert the key in the
With the ignition off , insert the key in the With the ignition off
passenger airbag deactivation switch.
Turn it to the
"OFF"
position.
Then, remove the key keeping the switch in
the new position.
To assure the safety of your child,
the passenger's front airbag must
be deactivated when you install a
"rear facing" child seat on the front
passenger seat.
Otherwise, the child would risk being
seriously injured or killed if the airbag
were deployed.
Safety
164
Lateral airbags
System which protects the driver and front
passenger in the event of a serious side impact in
order to limit the risk of injury to the chest.
Each lateral airbag is fitted in the front, in the
outer side of the seat back frame.
Deployment
The lateral airbags are deployed unilaterally in
the event of a serious side impact applied to all
or part of the side impact zone
B
, perpendicular
to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a
horizontal plane and directed from the outside
towards the inside of the vehicle.
The lateral airbag inflates between the front
occupant of the vehicle and the corresponding
door panel.
Curtain airbags
System which protects the driver and
passengers (with the exception of the rear
centre passenger) in the event of a serious side
impact in order to limit the risk of injury to the
side of the head.
Each curtain airbag is built into the pillars and
the upper passenger compartment area.
Deployment
The curtain airbag is deployed at the same
time as the corresponding lateral airbag in the
event of a serious side impact applied to all or
part of the side impact zone
B
, perpendicular
to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a
horizontal plane and directed from the outside
towards the inside of the vehicle.
The curtain airbag inflates between the front or
rear occupant of the vehicle and the windows.
Impact detection zones
A.
Front impact zone.
B.
Side impact zone.
If this warning lamp comes on in the
instrument panel, accompanied by an
audible signal and a message in the
screen, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or
a qualified workshop to have the system checked.
The airbags may no longer be deployed in the
event of a serious impact.
Operating fault
In the event of a minor impact or bump
on the side of the vehicle or if the
vehicle rolls over, the airbag may not be
deployed.
In the event of a rear or front collision,
the airbag is not deployed.
8
Safety
165
For the airbags to be fully
effective, observe the following
safety rules:
Sit in a normal upright position.
Wear a correctly adjusted seat belt.
Do not leave anything between the occupants
and the airbags (a child, pet, object...). This
could hamper the operation of the airbags or
injure the occupants.
After an accident or if the vehicle has been
stolen or broken into, have the airbag systems
checked.
All work on the airbag system must be carried
out by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Even if all of the precautions mentioned are
observed, a risk of injury or of minor burns
to the head, chest or arms when an airbag is
deployed cannot be ruled out. The bag inflates
almost instantly (within a few milliseconds)
then deflates within the same time discharging
the hot gas via openings provided for this
purpose.
Lateral airbags
Use only approved covers on the seats,
compatible with the deployment the lateral
airbags. For information on the range of seat
covers suitable for your vehicle, you can contact
a PEUGEOT dealer.
Refer to the "Accessories" section.
Do not fix or attach anything to the seat backs
(clothing...). This could cause injury to the
chest or arms if the lateral airbag is deployed.
Do not sit with the upper part of the body any
nearer to the door than necessary.
Front airbags
Do not drive holding the steering wheel by its
spokes or resting your hands on the centre
part of the wheel.
Passengers must not place their feet on the
dashboard.
If possible, do not smoke as deployment of
the airbags can cause burns or the risk of
injury from a cigarette or pipe.
Never remove or pierce the steering wheel or
hit it violently.
Curtain airbags
Do not fix or attach anything to the roof. This
could cause injury to the head if the curtain
airbag is deployed.
If fitted on your vehicle, do not remove the
grab handles installed on the roof, they play a
part in securing the curtain airbags.
Driving
166
The electric parking brake combines
2 operational modes:
-
Automatic application/release
Application is automatic when the engine
stops, release is automatic on use of the
accelerator (activated by default),
-
Manual application/release
The parking brake can be applied /
released manually by pulling control
lever
A
.
Electric parking brake
Programming the mode
Depending on the country of registration of
the vehicle, the automatic application when
the engine is switched off and the automatic
release when you press the accelerator can be
deactivated.
If this warning lamp comes on in
the instrument panel, the automatic
mode is deactivated.
Activation / deactivation of
this function is possible by a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
The parking brake is then applied and released
manually. When the driver's door is opened,
there is an audible signal and a message is
displayed if the brake is not applied.
Do not place any object (packet of
cigarettes, telephone, ...) behind the
electric brake control.
Deactivation is recommended in
particularly cold conditions (ice) and
during towing (breakdown, caravan...).
Refer to the "Manual release"
paragraph.
9
Driving
167
With the vehicle stationary, to apply the parking
brake whether the engine is running or off,
pull
on the control lever
A
.
Application of the parking brake is
confirmed by:
- illumination of the braking
warning lamp and of the warning
lamp
P
in the control lever
A
,
- display of the message
"Handbrake on".
When the driver’s door is opened with the
engine running, a beep is heard and a message
is displayed if the parking brake has not been
applied, unless the selector lever is in position
P
(Park) in the case of an automatic gearbox.
Manual release
With the ignition on or the engine running, to
release the parking brake,
press
on the
brake
pedal
or the accelerator,
pull then release
the
control lever
A
.
Full application of the parking brake is
confirmed by:
- the braking warning lamp and
of the warning lamp
P
in the the
control lever
A
going off,
- display of the message
"Handbrake off".
If you pull the control lever
A
without
pressing the brake pedal, the parking
brake will not be released and a
warning lamp will come on in the
instrument panel.
Manual application
Maximum application
If necessary, you can make a
maximum
application
of the parking brake. It is obtained
by means of a
long pull
on the control lever
A
,
until you see the message "Handbrake on" and
a beep is heard.
Maximum application is essential:
- in the case of a vehicle towing a caravan
or a trailer, if the automatic functions are
activated but you are applying the parking
brake manually,
- when the gradient you are parked on is
variable in its effect (e.g. on a ferry, in a
lorry, during towing).
Before leaving the vehicle, check that
parking brake warning lamp in the
instrument panel is on, not flashing.
In the case of towing, a loaded vehicle
or parking on a gradient, make a
maximum application of the parking
brake then turn the front wheels
towards the pavement and engage a
gear when you park.
After a maximum application, the
release time will be longer.
Driving
168
Automatic application,
engine off
With the vehicle stationary, the parking brake
is automatically applied when the engine is
switched off.
The application of the parking brake is
confirmed by:
- illumination of the braking
confirmed by:
- illumination of the braking
confirmed by:
warning lamp and of the warning
lamp
P
in the control lever
A
,
- display of the message
"Handbrake on".
Automatic release
The electric parking brake
releases
automatically and progressively
when you
press the accelerator:
Manual gearbox:
press down fully on the
clutch pedal, engage first gear or reverse,
press on the accelerator pedal and
move off.
Electronic gearbox
: select position
A
,
M
or
R
then press on the accelerator pedal.
Automatic gearbox:
select position
D
,
M
or
R
then press on the accelerator pedal.
- the braking warning lamp and of
the warning lamp
P
in the control
lever
A
going off,
- display of the message
"Handbrake off".
An audible signal will confirm to you the
application/ release of your electric parking
brake.
Full release of the parking brake is
confirmed by:
To immobilise the vehicle,
engine running
With the engine running and the vehicle
stationary, in order to immobilise the vehicle
it is essential to
manually
apply the parking
brake by
pulling
on control lever
A
.
- illumination of the braking
warning lamp and the warning
lamp
P
in the control lever
A
,
- display of the message
"Handbrake on".
When the driver’s door is opened, an audible
signal heard and a message is displayed if the
parking brake has not been applied, unless the
selector lever is in position
P
(Park) in the case
of an automatic gearbox.
Label on the door panel
When stationary, with the engine running, do
not press the accelerator pedal unnecessarily,
as you may release the parking brake.
Before leaving the vehicle, check that
parking brake warning lamp in the
instrument panel is on (not flashing).
Never leave a child alone inside the
vehicle with the ignition on, as they
could release the parking brake.
In the case of towing, a loaded vehicle
or parking on a gradient, turn the front
wheels towards the pavement and
engage a gear when you park.
The application of the parking brake is
confirmed by:
9
Driving
169
Emergency braking
In the event of a failure of the main service
brake or in an exceptional situation (e.g. driver
taken ill, under instruction, etc)
a continuous
pull
on the control lever
on the control lever on the control lever
A
will stop the
vehicle
.
The dynamic stability control (DSC) provides
stability during emergency braking.
If there is a fault with the emergency braking,
one of the following messages will be
displayed:
- "Parking brake faulty".
- "Parking brake control faulty".
If a failure of the DSC system is
signalled by the illumination of this
warning lamp, then braking stability
is not guaranteed.
In this event, stability must be assured by the
driver by repeating alternate "pull release"
actions on control lever
A
.
Before leaving the vehicle, check that
parking brake warning lamp in the
instrument panel is on, not flashing.
The emergency braking must only be
used in exceptional circumstances.
Particular situations
In certain situations (e.g. starting
the engine), the parking brake can
automatically alter its force. This is
normal operation.
To advance your vehicle a few
centimetres without starting the engine,
but with the ignition on, press on the
brake pedal and release the parking
brake
by pulling
then
releasing
control
lever
A
. The full release of the parking
brake is confirmed by the warning lamp
in the control lever
A
and the warning
lamp in the instrument panel going
off and the display of the message
"Handbrake off".
If a parking brake fault occurs
while
applied
or if the battery runs flat, an
emergency release is always possible.
Driving
170
Hill start assist
Operation
On an ascending slope, with the vehicle
stationary, the vehicle is held for a
momentarily when you release the brake pedal:
- provided you are in first gear or neutral on
a manual gearbox,
- provided you are in position
A
or
A or A
M
on an
electronic gear control gearbox,
- provided you are in position
D
or
M
on an
automatic gearbox.
On a descending slope, with the vehicle
stationary and reverse gear engaged, the
vehicle is held momentarily when you
release the brake pedal.
Operating fault
If a fault in the system occurs, these warning
lamps come on. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer
or a qualified workshop sto have the system
checked.
System which keeps your vehicle immobilised
temporarily (approximately 2 seconds) when
starting on a gradient, the time it takes to
move your foot from the brake pedal to the
accelerator pedal.
This system only operates when:
- the vehicle is completely stationary, with
your foot on the brake pedal,
- in particular conditions on a slope,
- with the driver’s door closed.
The hill start assist system cannot be
deactivated.
Do not exit the vehicle while it is being
held in the hill start assist phase.
If you need to exit the vehicle with the
engine running, apply the parking brake
manually then ensure that the parking
brake warning lamp (and the warning
lamp
P
in the lever of the electric parking
brake) are on fixed (not flashing).
9
Driving
171
Operating faults
If the electric parking brake fault warning lamp comes on together with one or more of the warning lamps presented in these tables, place the vehicle in a
safe condition (on level ground, gear engaged) and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop without delay.
Situations
Consequences
Display of the message "
Parking brake fault
"
and of the following warning lamps:
- The automatic functions are deactivated.
- Hill start assist is not available.
- The electric parking brake can only be used manually.
Display of the message "
Parking brake fault
"
and of the following warning lamps:
- Manual release of the electric parking brake is only available by pressing the accelerator pedal
and releasing the control.
- Hill start assist is not available.
- The automatic functions and the manual application are still available.
Display of the message "
Parking brake fault
"
and of the following warning lamps:
- The automatic functions are deactivated.
- Hill start assist is not available.
To apply the electric parki
ng brake:
Immobilise the vehicle and switch off the ignition.
Pull the control for at least 5 seconds or until application is complete.
Switch on the ignition and check the switching on of the electric parking brake warning lamps.
The application is slower than during normal operation.
To release the electric parking brake:
Switch on the ignition.
Pull the control and hold it for approximately 3 seconds then release it.
If the braking warning lamp is flashing or if the warning lamps do not come on with the ignition
on, these procedures will not work. Place the vehicle on level ground and have it checked by
a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified work
shop.
and possibly
flashing
Driving
172
Situations
Consequences
Display of the message "
Parking brake
control fault - auto parking brake activated
"
and of the following warning lamps:
- Only the automatic application on switching off the engine and automatic release on
acceleration functions are available.
- The manual application/release of the electric parking brake and the emergency braking are
not available.
and possibly
flashing
Battery fault
- If the battery warning lamp comes on you must stop immediately as soon as the traffic allows.
Stop and immobilise your vehicle (if necessary, place the two chocks under the wheels).
- Apply the electric parking brake before switching off the engine.
9
Driving
173
System which projects various information onto a
transparent strip in the field of vision of the driver so
that they do not have to take their eyes off the road.
This system operates when the engine is running
and the settings are stored when the ignition is
switched off.
Head-up display
1.
Head-up display on/off.
2.
Brightness adjustment.
3.
Display height adjustment.
The strip is activated by pressing one of the
buttons.
Once the system has been activated, the
following information is grouped together in the
head-up display:
A.
The speed of your vehicle.
B.
Cruise control/speed limiter information.
Buttons
Displays during operation
C.
"Distance alert" information (depending on
version).
Driving
174
With the engine running, press button
1
.
The activated/deactivated status when the
engine was switched off is retained when
the engine is switched on again.
Height adjustment
With the engine running, adjust the display
to the required height using button
3
:
- up to move the display up,
- down to move the display down.
Activation/Deactivation
Brightness adjustment
With the engine running, adjust the
brightness of the information using
button
2
:
- up to increase the brightness,
- down to decrease the brightness.
We recommend that adjustments are
only made using these buttons when
the vehicle is stationary.
When stationary or while driving, no
objects should be placed around the
transparent strip (or on its cover) to
avoid blocking the strip output and
preventing its correct operation.
In certain extreme weather conditions
(rain and/or snow, bright sunshine, ...)
the head-up display may not be legible
or may suffer temporary interference.
Certain glasses (sunglasses,
spectacles or polarised lenses) may
hamper reading of the information.
To clean the transparent strip, which
is made of organic glass, use a clean,
soft cloth (such as a spectacles cloth
or microfibre cloth). Do not use a dry or
abrasive cloth or detergent or solvent
products as these could scratch the
strip or damage the anti-reflection
coating.
9
Driving
175
Distance alert *
For the safety time to be observed, refer
to the current legislation or highway code
recommendations in your country.
The system operates when the speed of your
vehicle is higher than 45 mph (70 km/h) and
below 90 mph (150 km/h).
It has a programmable visual alert which
remains in the memory when the ignition is
switched off.
This system is a driving aid and cannot, in any
circumstances, take the place of the vigilance
and responsibility of the driver.
1.
On/off.
2.
Alert value increase (+)/decrease (-).
The information is grouped together in the
head-up display.
Once the system has been activated:
A.
The speed of your vehicle is outside the
operating range.
B.
Your vehicle is within the operating range
but no vehicle has been detected.
C.
The vehicle in front of you has been
detected.
The current time separating you from this
vehicle is displayed permanently.
D.
The time between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front is less than the
programmed alert value (it flashes).
Buttons
Displays during operation
Driving aid which informs the driver of the time
interval (in seconds) separating them from the
vehicle in front when the driving conditions are
stable.
It does not detect stationary vehicles and does
not itself take
any action
on your vehicle's
controls.
* Depending on version.
Driving
176
Activation
Example with a value of 2 seconds:
Alert
Programming the alert
value
Press button
1
, the indicator lamp comes on.
The system is activated but will only operate
from 45 mph (70 km/h).
The alert value can be programmed to between
0.9 second and 2.5 seconds.
The visual alert can be deactivated by
programming a value of 0 second.
When the time (in seconds) between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front is less than the
programmed time (alert value), a visual alert
flashes.
A safety time of 2 seconds is
recommended in normal driving
conditions (correct traction and speed)
to avoid a collision in the event of
emergency braking.
Select the alert value required using
button
2
, in steps of 0.1 second:
- up to increase: "+",
- down to decrease: "-".
9
Driving
177
Deactivation
Reactivation
Press button
1
again to reactivate the
system.
The last value programmed is retained and
the indicator lamp comes on.
Operating limits
The system switches to standby automatically
if the sensor does not detect the vehicle in front
correctly (very difficult weather conditions,
sensor out of adjustment, ...). A message is
displayed in the multifunction screen.
The vehicle being followed may not be detected
in certain conditions such as, for example:
- when turning,
- when changing lane,
- when the vehicle in front is either too far
ahead (maximum range of the sensor:
100 m) or stationary (in a traffic jam, ...),
When the vehicle being followed is much too
near (time between the two vehicles less than
0.5 seconds), the display remains fixed at
0.5 seconds.
If the indicator lamp in button
1
flashes, have the system checked
by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
This system is not an anti-collision radar
and it does not act of the movement of
your vehicle. It provides information but
cannot, in any circumstances, take the
place of the vigilance and responsibility
of the driver.
Press button
1
to deactivate the system,
the indicator lamp goes off.
Driving
178
Speed limiter
The controls of this system are grouped
together on stalk
A
.
1.
Speed limiter mode selection dial
2.
Programmed value decrease button
3.
Programmed value increase button
4.
Speed limiter on / off button
The programmed information is grouped
together on the instrument panel screen.
5.
Speed limiter on / off indication
6.
Speed limiter mode selection indication
7.
Programmed speed value
Steering mounted controls
Displays in the instrument panel
The speed limiter is
switched on
manually:
it requires a programmed speed of at least
20 mph (30 km/h).
The speed limiter is
switched off
by manual
switched off by manual switched off
operation of the control.
The programmed speed remains in the memory
when the ignition is switched off.
System which prevents the vehicle from
exceeding the speed programmed by the
driver.
When the programmed speed limit is reached,
pressing the accelerator pedal no longer
has any effect unless it is pressed firmly,
which permits temporary exceeding of the
programmed speed.
To return to the programmed speed, simply
slow down to a speed below the programmed
speed by releasing the accelerator.
The speed limiter cannot, in any circumstances,
replace the need to observe speed limits,
nor can it replace the need for vigilance and
responsibility on the part of the driver.
This information also appears in the
head-up display.
For more information, refer to the
"Head-up display" section.
9
Driving
179
Programming
Switch the speed limiter off by pressing
button
4
: the display confirms that it has
been switched off (OFF/Pause).
Switch the speed limiter back on by
pressing button
4
again.
Set the speed value by pressing button
2
or
3
(e.g.: 55 mph (90 km/h)).
Turn dial
1
to the
"LIMIT"
position: the
speed limiter mode is selected but is not
switched on (OFF/Pause).
You do not have to switch the speed limiter on
in order to set the speed.
You can then change the programmed speed
using buttons
2
and
3
:
- by + or - 1 mph (km/h) = short press,
- by + or - 5 mph (km/h) = long press,
- in steps of + or - 5 mph (km/h) = maintained
press.
Switch the speed limiter on by pressing
button
4
.
Driving
180
Exceeding the programmed
speed
Return to normal driving
Operating fault
On a steep descent or in the event of
sharp acceleration, the speed limiter
will not be able to prevent the vehicle
from exceeding the programmed speed.
To avoid any risk of jamming of the
pedals:
- ensure that the mat is positioned
correctly,
- do not fit one mat on top of another.
Pressing the accelerator pedal to exceed the
programmed speed will not have any effect
unless you press the pedal
firmly
past the
point of resistance
.
The speed limiter is deactivated temporarily
and the programmed speed, which is still
displayed, flashes.
Returning to the programmed speed, by means
of intentional or unintentional deceleration of
the vehicle, automatically cancels the flashing
of the programmed speed.
In the event of a speed limiter malfunction, the
speed is cleared resulting in flashing of the
dashes.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Turn dial
1
to the
"0"
position: the speed
limiter mode is deselected. The display
returns to the distance recorder.
9
Driving
181
Cruise control
The controls of this system are grouped
together on stalk
A
.
1.
Cruise control mode selection dial
2.
Speed programming / programmed value
decrease button
3.
Speed programming / programmed value
increase button
4.
Cruise control off / resume button
The programmed information is grouped
together in the instrument panel screen.
5.
Cruise control off / resume indication
6.
Cruise control mode selection indication
7.
Programmed speed value
Steering mounted controls
Displays in the instrument panel
The cruise control is
switched off
manually
switched off manually switched off
or by pressing the brake or clutch pedal or on
triggering of the DSC/ASR systems for safety
reasons.
It is possible to exceed the programmed speed
temporarily by pressing the accelerator pedal.
To return to the programmed speed, simply
release the accelerator pedal.
Switching off the ignition cancels any
programmed speed value.
System which automatically maintains the
speed of the vehicle at the value programmed
by the driver, without any action on the
accelerator pedal.
The cruise control is
switched on
manually: it
requires a minimum vehicle speed of 25 mph
(40 km/h) and the engagement of:
- fourth gear on the manual gearbox,
- second gear in sequential mode on an
electronic or automatic gearbox,
- position
A
on an electronic gearbox or
D
on an automatic gearbox.
The cruise control cannot, in any circumstances,
replace the need to observe speed limits,
nor can it replace the need for vigilance and
responsibility on the part of the driver.
This information also appears in the
head-up display.
For more information, refer to the
"Head-up display" section.
Driving
182
Programming
Set the programmed speed by accelerating
to the required speed, then press button
2
or
3
(e.g.: 70 mph (110 km/h)).
Switch off the cruise control by pressing
button
4
: the display confirms that it has
been switched off (OFF/Pause).
Switch the cruise control back on by
pressing button
4
again.
You can then change the programmed speed
using buttons
2
and
3
:
- by + or - 1 mph (km/h) = short press,
- by + or - 5 mph (km/h) = long press,
- in steps of + or - 5 mph (km/h) = maintained
press.
Turn dial
1
to the
"CRUISE"
position: the
cruise control mode is selected but is not
switched on (OFF/Pause).
9
Driving
183
Operating fault
When the cruise control is switched on,
be careful if you maintain the pressure
on one of the programmed speed
changing buttons: this may result in a
very rapid change in the speed of your
vehicle.
Do not use the cruise control on
slippery roads or in heavy traffic.
On a steep descent, the cruise control
will not be able to prevent the vehicle
from exceeding the programmed speed.
To avoid any risk of jamming of the
pedals:
- ensure that the mat is positioned
correctly,
- never fit one mat on top of another.
Return to normal driving
Exceeding the programmed
speed
Intentional or unintentional exceeding of the
programmed speed results in flashing of this
speed in the screen.
Return to the programmed speed, by means of
intentional or unintentional deceleration of the
vehicle, automatically cancels the flashing of
the speed.
In the event of a cruise control malfunction,
the speed is cleared resulting in flashing of the
dashes.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Turn dial
1
to the
"0"
position: the cruise
control mode is deselected. The display
returns to the distance recorder.
Driving
184
6-speed manual gearbox
Engaging 5
th
or 6
th
gear
Raise the ring under the knob and move
the gear lever to the left then forwards.
Engaging reverse gear
Only engage reverse gear when the
vehicle is stationary with the engine at idle.
As a safety precaution and to facilitate
starting of the engine:
- always select neutral,
- press the clutch pedal.
Move the lever fully to the right to engage
5
th
or 6
th
gear.
9
Driving
185
Gear shift indicator *
Operation
Example:
- You are in third gear.
- You press the accelerator pedal
moderately.
- The system may suggest that you engage
a higher gear, if appropriate.
The information appears in the form of an
arrow in the instrument panel screen.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment,
this arrow may be accompanied by the
recommended gear.
System which reduces fuel consumption by
recommending the most appropriate gear to
use.
Depending on the driving situation and your
vehicle's equipment, the system may advise
you to skip one or more gears. You can
follow this instruction without engaging the
intermediate gears.
The gear recommended should not be
considered compulsory. In fact, the
configuration of the road, the amount of traffic
and safety remain determining factors when
choosing the best gear. Therefore, the driver
remains responsible for deciding whether or not
to follow the advice given by the system.
This function cannot be deactivated.
* According to engine.
In the case of driving which makes
particular demands on the performance
of the engine (firm pressure on the
accelerator pedal, for example, when
overtaking...), the system will not
recommend a gear change.
The system never suggests:
- engaging first gear,
- engaging reverse gear,
- engaging a lower gear.
Driving
186
Electronic gearbox
Gear lever
R.
Reverse
With your foot on the brake, move the lever
upwards to select this position.
N.
Neutral.
With your foot on the brake, select this
position to start.
A.
Automatic mode.
Move the lever downwards to select this
mode.
Six-speed electronic gearbox which offers a
choice between the comfort of fully automatic
operation or the pleasure of manual gear
changing.
Three driving modes are offered:
-
automatic
mode for automatic control of
the gears by the gearbox,
-
manual
mode for sequential changing of
the gears by the driver,
-
auto sequential
mode to overtake, for
example, remaining in automatic mode
while using the functions of the sequential
mode.
A
Sport
function is available in automatic or
sequential mode for a more dynamic style of
driving.
M. + / -
Manual mode with manual
sequential changing of the gears.
Move the lever downwards then to the left
to select this mode, then:
- push the lever forwards to change up a
gear,
- or pull the lever rearwards to change
down a gear.
S.
Sport setting.
Press this button to activate or deactivate
this function.
9
Driving
187
Steering mounted controls
+.
Change up paddle to the right of the
steering wheel.
Press the back of the
"+"
steering mounted
paddle to change up a gear.
-.
Change down paddle to the left of the
steering wheel.
Press the back of the
"-"
steering mounted
paddle to change down a gear.
The steering mounted paddles cannot
be used to select neutral or engage or
disengage reverse gear.
Displays in the instrument panel
Gear lever positions
When you move the lever, the symbol
corresponding to its position is displayed in the
instrument panel.
N.
Neutral
R.
Reverse
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6.
Gears in sequential mode
AUTO.
This comes on when the automatic
mode is selected. It goes off on
changing to sequential mode.
S.
Sport (Sport setting)
Place your
foot on the brake
when this warning lamp flashes
(e.g.: when starting the engine).
Moving off
Select position
N
.
Press the brake pedal down fully.
Start the engine.
Keep your foot on the brake pedal, move
the gear lever to position
A
or
M
to go
forwards, or
R
to go backwards.
Take your foot off the brake pedal, you can
then move off.
The parking brake is released
automatically, otherwise release it
manually.
There is an audible signal when reverse
gear is engaged.
If the engine does not start:
- If
N
is flashing in the instrument
panel, move the lever to position
A
then to position
N
.
- If the message "
Foot on brake
" is
displayed, press the brake pedal
firmly.
Driving
188
Sequential mode
AUTO
disappears and the gears
engaged appear in succession in
the instrument panel screen.
The gear change requests are only carried out
if the engine speed permits.
It is not necessary to release the accelerator
during gear changes.
When braking or slowing down, the gearbox
changes down automatically to allow vehicle to
pull away in the correct gear.
When the vehicle has moved off, select
position
M
to change to sequential mode.
AUTO
and
1
or
R
appear in the
instrument panel screen.
At very low speed, if reverse gear is
requested, this will only be taken into
account when the vehicle is immobilised.
The
Foot on brake
warning lamp may
flash in the instrument panel to prompt
you to brake.
At high speed, if reverse gear is
requested, the
N
indicator lamp will flash
and the gearbox will change to neutral
automatically. To engage a gear again,
return the lever to position
A
or
A or A
M
.
On sharp acceleration, the gearbox will
not change up unless the driver acts on
the gear lever or the steering mounted
paddles.
Never select neutral
N
while the vehicle
is moving.
Only engage reverse gear
R
when the
vehicle is immobilised with the brake
pedal pressed.
If position
R
,
A
or
M
is selected, even
with the engine at idle, if the brakes are
released the vehicle moves without any
action on the accelerator. Never leave
children unsupervised in the vehicle
when the engine is running. When
carrying out maintenance on the vehicle
with the engine running, apply the
parking brake and select position
N
.
9
Driving
189
The gearbox is then operating in auto-active
mode, without any action on the part of the
driver. It continuously selects the most suitable
gear in relation to the following parameters:
- style of driving,
- profile of the road.
AUTO
and the gear engaged
appear in the instrument panel
screen.
Automatic mode
"Auto sequential mode"
Following use of the sequential mode,
select position
A
to return to the automatic
mode.
The gearbox returns to normal mode
automatically each time the ignition is
switched off.
For optimum acceleration, for example
when overtaking another vehicle, press
the accelerator pedal firmly past the
point of resistance.
Sport setting
Following selection of the sequential mode
or automatic mode, press button
S
to
activate the Sport setting which offers you
a more dynamic style of driving.
S
appears next to the gear engaged
in the instrument panel screen.
Press button
S
again to return to normal
settings.
S
is then cleared from the instrument panel
screen.
This mode enables you to overtake, for
example, remaining in automatic mode while
using the functions of the sequential mode.
Operate the
+
or
-
steering mounted
paddle.
The gearbox engages the gear requested if the
engine speed permits.
AUTO
is still displayed
in the instrument panel.
After a few moments without any action on
the controls, the gearbox resumes automatic
control of the gears.
Driving
190
Stopping the vehicle
Operating fault
With the ignition on, if this warning
lamp comes on and
AUTO
flashes,
accompanied by an audible signal
and a message in the screen, this
indicates a fault with the gearbox.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Before switching off the engine, you can
choose to:
- move to position
N
to engage neutral,
- leave the gear engaged; in this case, it will
not be possible to move the vehicle.
In both cases, it is essential that you apply the
parking brake to immobilise the vehicle.
When immobilising the vehicle, with the
engine running, it is essential to place
the gear lever in neutral
N
.
Before carrying out any work in the
engine compartment, check that the
gear lever is in neutral
N
and that the
parking brake is applied.
It is essential to press the brake pedal
when starting the engine.
When parking, is it essential to apply
the parking brake to immobilise the
vehicle, whatever the circumstances.
9
Driving
191
"Porsche Tiptronic System" automatic gearbox
Gear lever
P.
P
ark.
- Immobilisation of the vehicle, parking brake
on or off.
- Starting the engine.
R.
Reverse.
- Reversing manoeuvres, vehicle stationary,
engine at idle.
N.
Neutral.
-
Immobilisation of the vehicle, parking brake on.
- Starting the engine.
D.
Automatic operation.
M +/-
. Manual operation with sequential
changing of the six gears.
Press forwards to change up through the
gears.
or
Press rearwards to change down through
the gears.
Displays in the instrument panel
When you m
ove the lever in the gate to select
a position, the corresponding indicator is
displayed in the instrument panel.
P.
Park
R.
Reverse
N.
Neutral
D.
Drive (Automatic driving)
S.
Sport
programme
.
Snow
programme
1 to 6.
Gear engaged during manual operation
-.
Invalid value during
manual operation
Gear selection gate
1.
Gear lever.
2.
Button
"S"
(sport)
.
3.
Button "
"
(snow)
.
Six speed automatic gearbox which offers a
choice between the comfort of fully automatic
operation, enhanced by sport and snow
programmes, or manual gear changing.
Four driving modes are offered:
-
automatic
operation for electronic
management of the gears by the gearbox,
-
sport
programme for a more dynamic style
of driving,
-
snow
programme to improve driving when
traction is poor,
-
manual
operation for sequential changing
of the gears by the driver.
Driving
192
Moving off
Select position
D
for
automatic
changing
of the six gears.
The gearbox then operates in auto-adaptive
mode, without any intervention on the part
of the driver. It continuously selects the most
suitable gear according to the style of driving,
the profile of the road and the load in the
vehicle.
For maximum acceleration without touching
the lever, press the accelerator pedal down
fully (kick down). The gearbox changes down
automatically or maintains the gear selected
until the maximum engine speed is reached.
On braking, the gearbox changes down
automatically to provide efficient engine
braking.
If you release the accelerator sharply, the
gearbox will not change to a higher gear for
safety reasons.
Automatic operation
When the engine is running at idle, with
the brakes released, if position
R
,
D
or
M
is selected, the vehicle moves
even without the accelerator being
pressed.
When the engine is running, never
leave children in the vehicle without
supervision.
When carrying out maintenance with
the engine running, apply the parking
brake and select position
P
.
P . P
If position
N
is engaged inadvertently
while driving, allow the engine to
return to idle then engage position
D
to
accelerate.
Never select position
N
while the
vehicle is moving.
Never select positions
P
or
R
unless the
vehicle is completely stationary.
With your foot on the brake, select
position
P
or
N
.
Start the engine.
If this procedure is not followed, there is an
audible signal, accompanied by a message in
the multifunction screen.
With the engine running, press the brake
pedal.
Release the parking brake, unless it is
programmed to automatic mode.
Select position
R
,
D
or
M
,
Gradually release the brake pedal.
The vehicle moves off immediately.
9
Driving
193
appears in the instrument panel.
Snow programme "
"
Press button "
", after starting the engine.
The gearbox adapts to driving on slippery
roads.
This programme improves starting and drive
when traction is poor.
S
appears in the instrument panel.
Sport programme "S"
Press button
"S"
, after starting the engine.
The gearbox automatically favours a dynamic
style of driving.
Sport and snow programmes
These two special programmes supplement the
automatic operation in very specific conditions
of use.
Return to automatic
operation
At any time, press the button selected
again to quit the programme engaged and
return to auto-adaptive mode.
Manual operation
Select position
M
for
sequential
changing
of the six gears.
Push the lever towards the
+
sign to
change up a gear.
Pull the lever towards the
-
sign to change
down a gear.
D
disappears and the gears
engaged appear in succession in
the instrument panel.
It is only possible to change from one gear to
another if the vehicle speed and engine speed
permit; otherwise, the gearbox will operate
temporarily in automatic mode.
It is possible to change from position
D
(automatic) to position
M
(manual) at any time.
When the vehicle is stationary or moving
very slowly, the gearbox selects gear
M1
automatically.
The sport and snow programmes do not
operate in manual mode.
If the engine speed is too low or too high, the
gear selected flashes for a few seconds, then
the actual gear engaged is displayed.
Driving
194
Stopping the vehicle
Before switching off the engine, you can
engage position
P
or
N
to place the gearbox in
neutral.
In both cases, apply the parking brake to
immobilise the vehicle, unless it is programmed
to automatic mode.
Operating fault
When the ignition is on, the lighting
of this warning lamp, accompanied
by an audible signal and a message
in the multifunction screen,
indicates a gearbox malfunction.
In this case, the gearbox switches to back-up
mode and is locked in 3rd gear. You may feel
a substantial knock when changing from
P
to
R
and from
N
to
R
. This will not cause any
damage to the gearbox.
Do not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h), local speed
restrictions permitting.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
This warning lamp may also come on if a door
is opened.
Invalid value during manual
operation
This symbol is displayed if a gear
is not engaged correctly (selector
between two positions).
You risk damaging the gearbox:
- if you press the accelerator and
brake pedals at the same time,
- if you force the lever from position
P
to another position when the
battery is flat.
To reduce fuel consumption when
stationary for long periods with the
engine running (traffic jam...), position
the gear lever at
N
and apply the
parking brake, unless it is programmed
in automatic mode.
If the lever is not in position
P
, when the
P , when the P
driver's door is opened or approximately
45 seconds after the ignition is switched
off, there is an audible signal and a
message appears.
Return the lever to position
P
;
the audible signal stops and the
message disappears.
9
Driving
195
Stop & Start
Operation
Going into engine STOP mode
The
"ECO"
warning lamp comes
on in the instrument panel and the
engine goes into standby:
-
with an electronic gearbox
, at speeds
below 4 mph (6 km/h), press the brake
pedal or put the gear lever in position
N
.
If your vehicle is fitted with the system, a time
counter calculates the sum of the periods in
STOP mode during a journey. It rests itself to zero
every time the ignition is switched on with the key.
Special cases: STOP mode not
available
STOP mode is not invoked when:
- the driver's door is open,
- the driver's seat belt is not fastened,
- the vehicle has not exceeded 6 mph
(10 km/h) since the last engine start using
the key,
- the electric parking brake is applied or
being applied,
- the engine is needed to maintain a
comfortable temperature in the passenger
compartment,
- demisting is active,
- some special conditions (battery charge,
engine temperature, braking assistance,
ambient temperature...) where the engine is
needed to assure control of a system.
In this case, the
"ECO"
warning
lamp flashes for a few seconds then
goes off.
This operation is perfectly normal.
Never refuel with the engine in STOP
mode; you must switch off the ignition
with the key.
For your comfort, during parking
maoeuvres, STOP mode is not
available for a few seconds after
coming out of reverse gear.
STOP mode does not affect the
functionality of the vehicle, such as for
example, braking, power steering...
The Stop & Start system puts the engine
temporarily into standby - STOP mode - during
stops in the traffic (red lights, traffic jams, or
other...). The engine restarts automatically -
START mode - as soon as you want to move
off. The restart takes place instantly, quickly
and silently.
Perfect for urban use, the Stop & Start system
reduces fuel consumption and exhaust
emissions as well as the noise level when
stationary.
Driving
196
Going into engine START mode
The
"ECO"
warning lamp goes
off and the engine starts with an
electronic gearbox
:
- gear lever in position
A
or
M
, release the
brake pedal,
- or gear lever in position
N
and the brake
pedal released, move the gear lever to
position
A
or
M
,
- or engage reverse gear.
In this case the
"ECO"
warning
lamp flashes for a few seconds, then
goes off.
Special cases: START invoked
automatically
This operation is perfectly normal.
Deactivation
At any time, press the
"ECO OFF"
switch to
deactivate the system.
This is confirmed by the switch warning lamp
coming on accompanied by a message in the
screen.
START mode is invoked automatically when:
- the driver's door is open,
- the driver's seat belt is not fastened,
- the speed of the vehicle exceeds 7 mph
(11 km/h) with the electronic gearbox
system,
- the electric parking brake is being applied,
- some special conditions (battery charge,
engine temperature, braking assistance,
ambient temperature...) where the engine is
needed for control of a system.
If the system has been deactivated
in STOP mode, the engine restarts
immediately.
9
Driving
197
Reactivation
Operating fault
In the event of a fault with the system, the
"ECO OFF"
switch warning lamp flashes then
comes on continuously.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
In the event of a fault in STOP mode, the
vehicle may stall: all the instrument panel
warning lamps come on. It is then necessary
to switch off the ignition and start the engine
again using the key.
Maintenance
This system requires a 12 V battery with a
special specification and technology (reference
numbers available from PEUGEOT dealers).
Fitting a battery not listed by
PEUGEOT introduces the risk of malfunction of
the system.
To charge the battery, use a 12 V charger and
observe the polarity.
Press the
"ECO OFF"
switch again.
The system is active again; this is confirmed
by the switch warning lamp going off and a
message in the screen.
The system is reactivated automatically
at every new start using the key.
Before doing anything under the
bonnet, deactivate the Stop & Start
system to avoid any risk of injury
resulting from automatic operation of
START mode.
The Stop & Start system makes use of
advanced technology. For any work on
the system go to a qualified workshop
with the skills and equipment required,
which a PEUGEOT dealer is able to
provide.
Driving
198
Visual and audible front and rear parking sensors
System consisting of four proximity sensors,
installed in the front and/or rear bumper.
It detects any obstacle (person, vehicle, tree,
barrier...) located behind the vehicle, however,
it will not be able to detect obstacles located
immediately below the bumper.
The parking sensors are
switched on
:
- by engaging reverse gear,
- at a speed below 6 mph (10 km/h) in
forward gear.
This is accompanied by an audible signal
and display of the vehicle in the multifunction
screen.
The proximity information is indicated by:
- an audible signal which becomes more
rapid as the vehicle approaches the
obstacle,
- a graphic in the multifunction screen, with
blocks which move closer to the vehicle.
The obstacle is located in relation to the
emission of the audible signal by the speakers;
front or rear and right or left.
When the distance between the vehicle and
the obstacle is less than approximately thirty
centimetres, the audible signal becomes
continuous and/or the "Danger" symbol
appears, depending on the multifunction
screen version.
An object, such as a stake, a roadworks
cone or any other similar object may be
detected at the start of the manoeuvre
but may no longer be detected when the
vehicle moves nearer to it.
9
Driving
199
The parking sensors are
switched off
:
switched off : switched off
- when you exit reverse gear,
- when the speed is higher than 6 mph
(10 km/h) in forward gear,
- when the vehicle has been stationary for
more than three seconds in forward gear.
Deactivation
Operating fault
Reactivation
Press button
A
, the warning lamp comes
on, the system is fully deactivated.
If an operating fault occurs, this
warning lamp is displayed in the
instrument panel and/or a message
appears in the multifunction screen,
accompanied by an audible signal (short beep),
when reverse gear is engaged.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
In bad weather or in winter, ensure
that the sensors are not covered with
mud, ice or snow. When reverse gear is
engaged, an audible signal (long beep)
indicates that the sensors may be dirty.
When the vehicle is being driven at
a speed below approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h), certain sources of noise
(motorcycles, lorries, pneumatic
drills, ...) may trigger the parking sensor
audible signals.
The parking sensor system cannot, in
any circumstances, replace the need for
vigilance and responsibility on the part
of the driver.
The system will be deactivated
automatically when a trailer is being
towed or when a bicycle carrier is fitted
(vehicle fitted with a towbar or bicycle
carrier recommended by PEUGEOT).
Press button
A
again, the warning lamp
switches off, the system is reactivated.
Driving
200
Reversing camera
A reversing camera is activated automatically
when reverse gear is engaged.
The colour image is provided in the navigation
screen.
This system is a driving aid that
does not replace the vigilance or the
responsibility of the driver, who must
remain in control of the vehicle at all
times.
Clean the reversing camera regularly
using a sponge and a soft cloth.
When cleaning the vehicle with a high
pressure jet wash, keep the end of the
lance at least 30 cm from the camera.
The green lines represent the general direction
of the vehicle.
The red lines represent around 30 cm beyond
the limit of your vehicle's rear bumper. The
audible signal becomes continuous from this
limit.
The blue lines represent the maximum turning
circle.
9
Driving
201
Parking space sensors
After measuring the parking space available
between two vehicles or obstacles, this system
gives you information on:
- the possibility of fitting into a free space,
depending on the dimensions of your
vehicle and the distances needed for
manoeuvring,
- the level of difficulty of the manoeuvre to
be performed.
The system does not measure spaces which
are clearly much smaller or larger than the size
of the vehicle.
Displays in the instrument panel
The parking space sensor function
warning lamp can have three
different states:
-
off:
the function is not selected,
-
on fixed:
the function is selected but the
conditions for measurement are not yet met
(direction indicator not operating, speed
too high) or the measurement phase has
ended,
-
flashing:
measurement is in progress or
the message is being displayed.
You can activate the "parking space sensor"
function by pressing button
A.
The fixed
illumination of the warning lamp indicates that
the function is selected.
Driving
202
Operation
The function displays the following types of message:
Parking possible
Parking difficult
Parking not advised
The function deactivates itself automatically:
- when you engage reverse gear,
- when you switch off the ignition,
- five minutes after activation of the function
or after the last measurement operation,
- if the vehicle speed exceeds the threshold
of 45 mph (approximately 70 km/h) for one
minute.
If the lateral distance between your
vehicle and the parking space is too
great, the system may not operate.
- The function remains available
after each measurement and so
can measure a number of places
successively.
- In bad weather or in winter, ensure
that the sensors are not covered by
dirt, or by ice or snow.
- The parking space sensor
function deactivates the front
parking sensors during the space
measuring phase when you are in
forward gear.
If there is a malfunction, have the
system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer
or a qualified workshop.
You have identified a parking space:
Press button
A
to activate the function.
Activate the direction indicator on the side
where the space is to be measured.
During the measuring, go forward the
length of the space, at a speed less than
12 mph (approximately 20 km/h), to
prepare for your manoeuvre.
The system then measures the size of
the space.
The system informs you of the level of
difficulty of the manoeuvre via a message
in the multifunction screen accompanied by
an audible signal.
10
Checks
203
PEUGEOT & TOTAL
PARTNERS IN PERFORMANCE
AND PROTECTION OF THE
ENVIRONMENT
Innovation at the service of performance
The TOTAL Research and Development teams
develop lubricants for PEUGEOT which satisfy the
requirements of the latest technical innovations incorporated
in PEUGEOT vehicles.
This ensures that you obtain the best performance and
the maximum engine life.
Reduced exhaust emissions
TOTAL lubricants are formulated to optimise the efficiency
of engines and the protection of the emissions post-
treatment systems. It is crucial to observe the servicing
recommendations made by PEUGEOT to ensure correct
operation.
RECOM
MENDS
MENDS
Checks
204
Bonnet
Push the exterior safety catch
B
to the left
and raise the bonnet.
Unclip the stay
C
from its housing.
Fix the stay in the notch to hold the bonnet
open.
Closing
Take the stay out of the support notch.
Clip the stay in its housing.
Lower the bonnet and release it at the end
of its travel.
Pull on the bonnet to check that it is
secured correctly.
Opening
Open the front left door.
Pull the interior bonnet release lever
A
,
located at the bottom of the door aperture.
Before doing anything under the
bonnet, switch off the Stop & Start
system to avoid any risk of injury
resulting from an automatic change to
START mode.
The location of the interior bonnet
release lever prevents opening of
the bonnet while the front left door is
closed.
Do not open the bonnet in high winds.
When the engine is hot, handle the
exterior safety catch and the bonnet
stay with care (risk of burns).
The cooling fan may start after
switching off the engine: take care
with articles and clothing that might
become caught by the fan blades.
Because of the presence of electrical
equipment under the bonnet, it is
recommended that exposure to water
(rain, washing, ...) be limited.
10
Checks
205
Running out of fuel (Diesel)
1.6 litre HDi engine
Fill the fuel tank with at least five litres of
diesel.
Open the bonnet.
If necessary, unclip the styling cover for
access to the priming pump.
Squeeze and release the priming pump
repeatedly until resistance is felt (there
may be resistance at the first press).
Operate the starter until the engine starts
(if the engine does not start at the first
attempt, wait around 15 seconds before
trying again).
If the engine does not start after a few
attempts, operate the priming pump again
then start the engine.
Clip the styling cover back in place.
Close the bonnet.
2 litre HDi engine
Fill the fuel tank with at least five litres of
Diesel.
Open the bonnet.
If necessary, unclip the style cover for
access to the priming pump.
Slacken the bleed screw.
Squeeze and release the priming pump
repeatedly until fuel appears in the
transparent pipe.
Tighten the bleed screw.
Operate the starter until the engine starts
(if the engine fails to start at the first
attempt, wait around 15 seconds before
trying again).
If the engine fails to start after a few
attempts, operate the priming pump again,
then the starter.
Put the style cover back in position and
clip it in place, ensuring that it has clipped
correctly.
Close the bonnet.
On vehicle fitted with HDi engines, the fuel
system must be primed if you run out of fuel;
refer to the corresponding engine compartment
view.
If the tank on your vehicle is fitted with a
misfuel prevention device, refer to the "Misfuel
prevention (Diesel)" section.
If the engine does not start first time,
don't keep trying. Start the procedure
again from the beginning.
Checks
206
Petrol engines
The various caps and covers allow access for checking the levels of the various fluids and for replacing certain components.
1.
Power steering reservoir.
2.
Screenwash and headlamp wash reservoir.
3.
Coolant reservoir.
4.
Brake fluid reservoir.
5.
Battery/Fuses.
6.
Fusebox.
7.
Air filter.
8.
Engine oil dipstick.
9.
Engine oil filler cap.
10
Checks
207
Diesel engines
The various caps and covers allow access for checking the levels of the various fluids, for replacing certain components and for priming the fuel system.
1.
Power steering reservoir.
2.
Screenwash and headlamp wash reservoir.
3.
Coolant reservoir.
4.
Brake fluid reservoir.
5.
Battery/Fuses.
6.
Fusebox.
7.
Air filter.
8.
Engine oil dipstick.
9.
Engine oil filler cap.
10.
Priming pump * .
11.
Bleed screw * .
* According to engine.
Checks
208
Checking levels
Engine oil level
The check is carried out either when
the ignition is switched on using the
oil level indicator in the instrument
panel for vehicles with and electric oil
level gauge, or using the dipstick.
Check all of these levels regularly, in line with the warranty and maintenance record. Top them up if necessary, unless otherwise indicated.
If a level drops significantly, have the corresponding system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
It is normal to top up the oil level between
two services (or oil changes). PEUGEOT
recommends that you check the level, and top
up if necessary, every 3 000 miles (5 000 kms).
Take care when working under the bonnet, as certain areas of the engine may be extremely hot (risk of burns) and the cooling fan could start at
any time (even with the ignition off).
If you find that the level is above the
A
mark or
below the
B
mark,
do not start the engine
.
- If the level is above the
MAX
mark (risk
of damage to the engine), contact a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
- If the level is below the
MIN
mark, you
must top up the engine oil.
A
= M A X
To ensure that the reading is correct, your
vehicle must be on level ground and the engine
has been off for more than 30 minutes.
Checking using the dipstick
B
= M I N
Refer to the "Petrol engine" or "Diesel engine"
section for the location of the dipstick in the
engine compartment of your vehicle.
- Take the dipstick by its coloured grip and
remove it completely.
- Wipe the end of the dipstick using a clean
non-fluffy cloth.
- Refit the dipstick and push fully down, then
pull it out again to make the visual check:
the correct level is between the marks
A
and
B
.
10
Checks
209
Power steering fluid level
The power steering fluid level should
be close to the "MAX" mark. With the
engine cold, unscrew the cap to check
the level.
Fluid specifi cation
The brake fluid must conform to the
manufacturer's recommendations.
Changing the fl uid
Refer to the warranty and maintenance record
for details of the interval for this operation.
Brake fluid level
The brake fluid level should be close
to the "MAX" mark. If it is not, check
the brake pad wear.
After topping up the oil, the check when
switching on the ignition with the oil
level indicator in the instrument panel
is not valid during the 30 minutes after
topping up.
Topping up the engine oil level
Oil grade
The oil must be the correct grade for your
engine and conform to the manufacturer's
recommendations.
Refer to the "Petrol engine" or "Diesel engine"
section for the location of the oil filler cap in the
engine compartment of your vehicle.
- Unscrew the oil filler cap to reveal the filler
aperture.
- Add oil in small quantities, avoiding any
spills on engine components (risk of fire).
- Wait a few minutes before checking the
level again using the dipstick.
- Add more oil if necessary.
- After checking the level, carefully refit the
oil filler cap and the dipstick in its tube.
Engine oil change
Refer to the warranty and maintenance record
for details of the interval for this operation.
In order to maintain the reliability of the engine
and emission control system, the use of
additives in the engine oil is prohibited.
Checks
210
Diesel additive level
(Diesel engine with particle
emission filter)
Used products
Topping up
This additive must be topped up by a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop
without delay.
A low additive level is indicated by
illumination of the service warning
lamp, accompanied by an audible
warning and a message in the
instrument panel screen.
Fluid specifi cation
For optimum cleaning and to avoid freezing,
this fluid must not be topped up with or
replaced with plain water.
In the case of vehicles fitted with
headlamp washers, the low fluid level
is indicated by an audible signal and
a message in the instrument panel
screen.
Top up the reservoir when you next stop the
vehicle.
Screenwash and headlamp
wash fluid
Avoid prolonged contact of used oil or
fluids with the skin.
Most of these fluids are harmful to health
or indeed very corrosive.
Do not discard used oil or fluids into sewers
or onto the ground.
Take used oil to a PEUGEOT dealer or
a qualified workshop (France) or to an
authorised waste disposal site.
The cooling fan may start after switching
off the engine: take care with articles and
clothing that might become caught by the
fan blades.
Fluid specifi cation
The coolant must conform to the
manufacturer's recommendations.
Coolant level
The coolant level should be close
to the "MAX" mark but should never
exceed it.
When the engine is warm, the
temperature of the coolant is regulated by the
fan.
In addition, as the cooling system is
pressurised, wait at least one hour after
switching off the engine before carrying out any
work.
To avoid any risk of scalding, unscrew the cap
by two turns to allow the pressure to drop.
When the pressure has dropped, remove the
cap and top up the level.
10
Checks
211
Particle emission filter (Diesel)
Checks
Unless otherwise indicated, check these
components in accordance with the warranty and
maintenance record and according to your engine.
Otherwise, have them checked by a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
12 V battery
The battery does not require any
maintenance.
However, check that the terminals
are clean and correctly tightened,
particularly in summer and winter.
When carrying out work on the battery, refer
to the "12 V battery" section for details of the
precautions to be taken before disconnecting
the battery and following its reconnection.
Air filter and passenger compartment filter
Refer to the warranty and
maintenance record for details of
the replacement intervals for these
components.
Depending on the environment (e.g. dusty
atmosphere) and the use of the vehicle (e.g.
city driving),
replace them twice as often if
necessary
.
necessary . necessary
A clogged passenger compartment filter may
have an adverse effect on the performance
of the air conditioning system and generate
undesirable odours.
Oil filter
Replace the oil filter each time the
engine oil is changed.
Refer to the warranty and
maintenance record for details of
the replacement interval for this
component.
On a new vehicle, the first particle
filter regeneration operations may be
accompanied by a "burning" smell,
which is perfectly normal.
Following prolonged operation of the
vehicle at very low speed or at idle,
you may, in exceptional circumstances,
notice the emission of water vapour at
the exhaust on acceleration. This does
not affect the behaviour of the vehicle
or the environment.
The presence of this label, in particular
with the Stop & Start system, indicates
the use of a specific 12 V lead-acid
battery with special technology and
specification. The involvement of
a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop is essential when replacing or
disconnecting the battery.
The start of saturation of the particle
filter is indicated by the temporary
illumination of this warning lamp
accompanied by a message in the multi-
function screen.
As soon as the traffic conditions permit,
regenerate the filter by driving at a speed of at
least 40 mph (60 km/h) until the warning lamp
goes off.
If the warning lamp stays on, this indicates a
low additive level.
Checks
212
Brake disc wear
Brake pads
Brake wear depends on the style
of driving, particularly in the case
of vehicles used in town, over short
distances. It may be necessary to
have the condition of the brakes checked, even
between vehicle services.
Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a drop in
the brake fluid level indicates that the brake
pads are worn.
For information on checking brake
disc wear, contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Manual gearbox
The gearbox does not require any
maintenance (no oil change).
Refer to the warranty and
maintenance record for the details
of the level checking interval for this
component.
Electronic gearbox
The gearbox does not require any
maintenance (no oil change).
Refer to the warranty and
maintenance record for details
of the checking interval for this
component.
Automatic gearbox
The gearbox does not require any
maintenance (no oil change).
Refer to the warranty and
maintenance record for details of
the level checking interval for this
component.
This system does not require any
routine servicing. However, in the event
of a problem, have the system checked
by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Electric parking brake
Only use products recommended by
PEUGEOT or products of equivalent
quality and specification.
In order to optimise the operation of
units as important as those in the
braking system, PEUGEOT selects and
offers very specific products.
After washing the vehicle, dampness,
or in wintry conditions, ice can form
on the brake discs and pads: braking
efficiency may be reduced. Make light
brake applications to dry and defrost
the brakes.
For more information, refer to the
"Electric parking brake - Operating
faults" section.
11
Practical information
213
Temporary puncture repair kit
Complete system consisting of a compressor
and a sealant cartridge which permits
temporary repair
of a tyre so that you can
temporary repair of a tyre so that you can temporary repair
drive to the nearest garage.
It is designed to repair most punctures which
could affect the tyre, located on the tyre tread
or shoulder.
List of tools
All of these tools are specific to your vehicle.
Do not use them for other purposes.
1.
12 V compressor.
Contains a sealant cartridge for the
temporary repair of a tyre and can be used
to adjust the tyre pressures.
2.
Two chocks to chock the vehicle.
3.
Socket for security bolts (located in the
glove box) * .
For adapting the wheelbrace to the special
security bolts.
Other accessory
4.
Removable towing eye.
Access to the kit
(5 SEAT VERSION) *
The kit is located in the boot under the
concertina board.
Tools
4
and
5
are located in the boot interior
trim, on the left-hand side.
Refer to the "Towing the vehicle"
section.
The vehicle's electric system allows the
connection of a compressor for long
enough to inflate a tyre after a puncture
repair or for inflating a small inflatable
accessory.
* Depending on destination country.
Practical information
214
Description of the kit
A.
"Sealant" or "Air" position selector.
B.
On
"I"
/ off
"O"
switch.
C.
Deflation button.
D.
Pressure gauge (in bar and p.s.i.).
E.
Compartment housing:
- a cable with adaptor for 12 V socket,
- various inflation adaptors for
accessories, such as balls, bicycle
tyres...
F.
Sealant cartridge.
G.
White pipe with cap for repair.
H.
Black pipe for inflation.
I.
Speed limit sticker.
The speed limit sticker
I
must be affixed
to the vehicle's steering wheel to remind
you that a wheel is in temporary use.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h) when driving with a tyre
repaired using this type of kit.
11
Practical information
215
Repair procedure
Switch off the ignition.
Uncoil the white pipe
G
fully.
Unscrew the cap from the white pipe.
Connect the white pipe to the valve of the
tyre to be repaired.
Connect the compressor's electric plug to
the vehicle's 12 V socket.
Start the vehicle and leave the engine
running.
1. Sealing
Turn the selector
A
to the
"sealant" position.
Check that the switch
B
is in
position
"O"
.
Take care, this product is harmful (e.g.
ethylene-glycol, colophony...) if swallowed
and causes irritation to the eyes.
Keep this product out of the reach of
children.
Avoid removing any foreign bodies
which have penetrated into the tyre.
Do not start the compressor before
connecting the white pipe to the tyre
valve: the sealant product would be
expelled through the pipe.
Practical information
216
Switch on the compressor by moving
the switch
B
to position
"I"
until the tyre
pressure reaches 2.0 bars.
The sealant is injected into the tyre under
pressure; do not disconnect the pipe from
the valve during this operation (risk of
splashing).
Remove the kit and screw the cap back on
the white pipe.
Take care to avoid staining your vehicle
with traces of fluid. Keep the kit to hand.
Drive immediately for approximately three
miles (five kilometres), at reduced speed
(between 15 and 35 mph (20 and
60 km/h)), to plug the puncture.
Stop to check the repair and the tyre
pressure using the kit.
Tyre under-infl ation detection
If the vehicle is fitted with tyre under-
inflation detection, the under-inflation
warning lamp will remain on after the
wheel has been repaired until the
system is reinitialised by a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
If after around 5 to 7 minutes the
pressure is not attained, this indicates
that the tyre is not repairable; contact
a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop for assistance.
11
Practical information
217
Connect the compressor's electric plug to
the vehicle's 12 V socket.
Start the vehicle again and leave the
engine running.
Turn the selector
A
to the "air"
position.
Uncoil the black pipe
H
fully.
Connect the black pipe to the
valve of the wheel.
2 . I n fl a t i o n
Adjust the pressure using the compressor
(to inflate: switch
B
in position
"I"
; to
deflate: switch
B
in position
"O"
and press
button
C
), in accordance with the vehicle's
tyre pressure label (located on the left
hand door aperture).
A loss of pressure indicates that the
puncture has not been fully plugged;
contact a PEUGEOT dealer or qualified
workshop for assistance.
Remove and stow the kit.
Drive at reduced speed (50 mph [80 km/h]
max) limiting the distance travelled to
approximately 120 miles (200 km).
As soon as possible, go to a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
You must inform the technician that you
have used this kit. After inspection, the
technician will advise you on whether
the tyre can be repaired or if it must be
replaced.
Practical information
218
Removing the cartridge
Stow the black pipe.
Detach the angled base from the white pipe.
Support the compressor vertically.
Unscrew the cartridge from the bottom.
Checking tyre pressures /
inflating accessories
You can also use the compressor, without
injecting any product, to:
- check or adjust the pressure of your tyres,
- inflate other accessories (balls, bicycle
tyres...).
Turn the selector
A
to the "Air"
position.
Uncoil the black pipe
H
fully.
Connect the black pipe to the
valve of the wheel or accessory.
If necessary, fit one of the adaptors
supplied with the kit first.
Connect the compressor's electrical
connector to the vehicle's 12 V socket.
Start the vehicle and let the engine run.
Adjust the pressure using the compressor
(to inflate: switch
B
in position
"I"
; to
deflate: switch
B
in position
"O"
and press
button
C
), according to the vehicle's tyre
pressure label or the accessory's pressure
label.
Remove the kit then stow it.
Beware of discharges of fluid.
The expiry date of the fluid is indicated
on the cartridge.
The sealant cartridge is designed for
single use; even if only partly used, it
must be replaced.
After use, do not discard the cartridge
into the environment, take it to an
authorised waste disposal site or a
PEUGEOT dealer.
Do not forget to obtain a new sealant
cartridge, available from PEUGEOT
dealers or from a qualified workshop.
11
Practical information
219
Temporary puncture repair kit
The kit is located in the boot, under the left
hand seat in the 3
rd
row.
Using the kit
* According to country of sale.
(7 SEAT VERSION) *
Complete system consisting of a compressor
and a bottle of sealant which permits
temporary repair
of the tyre so that you can
temporary repair of the tyre so that you can temporary repair
drive to the nearest garage.
Check that the switch
A
is tilted to
position
"0"
.
Connect the pipe of the bottle
1
to the valve
of the tyre to be repaired.
Unwind the pipe of the compressor
2
fully,
then connect it to the bottle.
Switch off the ignition.
Tick the wheel to be repaired on the speed
limitation sticker enclosed then affix the
sticker to the vehicle's steering wheel to
remind you that a wheel is in temporary
use.
Clip the bottle
1
on the compressor
2
.
This kit is available from a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
It is designed to repair holes of a
maximum diameter of 6 mm, only where
located on the tyre tread or shoulder.
Avoid removing any foreign bodies
which have penetrated the tyre.
Practical information
220
Switch on the compressor by tilting the
switch
A
to position
"1"
until the tyre
pressure reaches 2.0 bars.
Remove the compressor and store the
bottle in the plastic bag, supplied in the kit,
to avoid staining your vehicle with traces
of fluid.
Drive immediately for approximately two
miles (three kilometres), at reduced speed
(between 10 and 35 mph [20 and
60 km/h]), to plug the puncture.
Stop to check the repair and the pressure.
Connect the compressor's electric plug to
the vehicle's 12 V socket.
Start the vehicle and leave the engine
running.
11
Practical information
221
Connect the compressor pipe directly to
the valve of the repaired wheel.
If this pressure has not been reached
after approximately five to ten minutes,
the tyre cannot be repaired; contact a
PEUGEOT or a qualified workshop to
have your vehicle repaired.
Connect the compressor's electric plug to
the vehicle's 12 V socket again.
Start the vehicle again and leave the
engine running.
Adjust the pressure using the compressor
(to inflate: switch
A
in position
"1"
; to
deflate: switch
A
in position
"0"
and
press button
B
), in accordance with the
vehicle's tyre pressure label (located on
the door aperture on the driver's side), then
remember to check that the leak is plugged
correctly (no further loss of pressure after
several miles [kilometres]).
Remove the compressor, then store the
whole kit.
Drive at reduced speed (50 mph [80 km/h]
max) for no more than approximately
125 miles (200 km).
Visit a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop as soon as possible to have the
tyre repaired or replaced by a technician.
Practical information
222
Take care, the bottle of fluid contains
ethylene-glycol. This product is harmful
if swallowed and causes irritation to the
eyes. Keep it out of reach of children.
The expiry date of the fluid is indicated on
the base of the bottle.
The bottle is designed for a single use;
even if only partly used, it must be
replaced.
After use, do not discard the bottle into
the environment, take it to a PEUGEOT
dealer or an authorised waste disposal
site.
Do not forget to obtain a new bottle
of sealant product, available from
a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
If the vehicle is fitted with tyre under-
inflation detection, the tyre under-
inflation warning lamp will remain on
after the wheel has been repaired
until the system is reinitialised by
a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
11
Practical information
223
Changing a wheel *
The tools
2
to
4
are stowed in a box, in the
middle of the spare wheel, placed underneath
the vehicle.
The tools
1
and
6
to
9
are stowed under the
concertina boards, in the boot inner trim.
To gain access to them:
open the boot,
raise the concertina boards.
Access to the tools
Procedure for changing a faulty wheel for the spare wheel using the tools provided with the vehicle.
List of tools *
All of these tools are specific to your vehicle.
Do not use them for other purposes.
1.
Wheelbrace.
For removing the wheel trim and the wheel
fixing bolts.
2.
Jack with integral handle.
For raising the vehicle.
3.
Wheel bolt cover removal tool (according to
equipment).
For removing the wheel bolt head finishers
on alloy wheels.
4.
Centre guide.
For refitting an alloy wheel to the hub.
5.
Socket for the security bolts (located in the
glove box).
For adapting the wheelbrace to the special
security bolts.
6.
Two chocks to immobilise the vehicle
(depending on equipment).
7.
Wheelbrace extension.
For unscrewing/tightening the spare wheel
carrier drive.
* Depending on destination country.
Practical information
224
Other accessory
8.
Removable towing eye.
Wheel with trim
When removing the wheel
, detach the
trim first using the wheelbrace
1
pulling
at the valve passage hole.
When refitting the wheel
, refit the trim
starting by placing its notch facing the
valve and press around its edge with
the palm of your hand.
Refer to the "Towing the vehicle"
section.
11
Practical information
225
Access to the spare wheel *
The spare wheel is supported by a cable-driven
carrier underneath the vehicle.
Taking out the wheel
Raise the concertina board to reveal the
spare wheel carrier drive nut.
Turn this drive nut fully clockwise, using
the wheelbrace
1
and the extension
7
, to
7 , to 7
unwind the carrier cable.
Detach the wheel/box assembly from the
rear of the vehicle.
Remove the hook with its connection plate
to release the wheel/box assembly, as
shown in the illustration.
Pull out the wheel to gain access to the
box.
Slide the box cover to the centre and
remove it to gain access to the other tools.
* Depending on destination country.
Practical information
226
Putting the wheel back in place
Store the tools used in the box and close
the cover.
Position the box on the ground and centre
the spare wheel on it.
Pass the hook with its connection plate into
the wheel then the box, as illustrated.
Raise the wheel/box assembly underneath
the vehicle by turning the carrier drive nut
anticlockwise using the wheelbrace
1
and
the extension
7
.
7 . 7
Tighten fully and check that the wheel is
horizontally flush against the floor.
Tyre under-infl ation detection
The spare wheel (space-saver or steel
rim) does not have a sensor.
The punctured wheel must be repaired
by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
11
Practical information
227
Removing a wheel
List of operations
Remove the bolt cover from each of
the bolts using the tool
3
(according to
equipment).
Fit the security socket
5
on the
wheelbrace
1
to slacken the security bolt
(if your vehicle has them).
Slacken the other bolts using the
wheelbrace
1
only.
Parking the vehicle
Immobilise the vehicle where it does not
block traffic: the ground must be level,
stable and non-slippery ground.
Apply the parking brake unless it has
been programmed to automatic mode,
switch off the ignition and engage first
gear * to lock the wheels.
Check that the braking warning lamp
and the
P
warning lamp on the parking
brake control come on.
If necessary, place a chock under the
wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be changed.
The occupants must get out of the
vehicle and wait where they are safe.
Never go underneath a vehicle raised
using a jack; use an axle stand.
Place the jack
2
in contact with one of the
two front
A
or rear
B
locations provided on
the underbody, whichever is closest to the
wheel to be changed.
* Position
R
for an electronic gearbox;
P
for an
automatic gearbox.
Practical information
228
Fitting the "space-saver"
spare wheel
If your vehicle is fitted with alloy wheels,
when tightening the bolts on fitting it
is normal to notice that the washers
do not come into contact with the
"space-saver" spare wheel. The wheel
is secured by the conical contact of
each bolt.
After changing a wheel
To store the punctured wheel in the
boot correctly, first remove the central
cover.
When using the "space-saver" type
spare wheel, do not exceed 50 mph
(80 km/h).
Have the tightening of the bolts and the
pressure of the spare wheel checked
by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop without delay.
Have the punctured wheel repaired and
replace it on the vehicle as soon as
possible.
Position the base plate of the jack on the
ground and ensure that it is directly below
the location
A
or
B
used.
Extend the jack until its head is in contact
with
A
or
B
.
Raise the vehicle until there is sufficient
space between the wheel and the ground
to admit the spare (not punctured) wheel
easily.
Remove the bolts and store them in a clean
place.
Remove the wheel.
Ensure that the jack is stable. If the
ground is slippery or loose, the jack
might slip and drop.
Position the jack only at the locations
A
or
B
.
Ensure that the head of the jack is
positioned centrally on the jacking
location. Otherwise there is a risk of
damage to the vehicle and the jack may
drop.
11
Practical information
229
Fitting a wheel
Lower the vehicle fully.
Fold the jack
2
and detach it.
List of operations
Using the wheelbrace
1
fitted with the
security socket
5
, tighten the security bolt
(if your vehicle has them).
Tighten the other bolts using the
wheelbrace
1
only.
Refit the bolt covers to each of the bolts
(according to equipment).
Store the tools in the box.
Put the wheel in place on the hub using the
centre guide
4
.
Screw in the bolts by hand to the stop.
Using the wheelbrace
1
fitted with the
security socket
5
, pre-tighten the security
bolt (if your vehicle has them).
Pre-tighten the other bolts using the
wheelbrace
1
only.
Practical information
230
Snow chains
In wintry conditions, snow chains improve traction as well as the behaviour of the vehicle when
braking.
The snow chains must be fitted only
to the front wheels. They must never
be fitted to "space-saver" type spare
wheels.
Take account of the legislation in force
in your country on the use of snow
chains and the maximum running speed
authorised.
Advice on installation
If you have to fit the chains during a
journey, stop the vehicle on a flat surface
on the side of the road.
Apply the parking brake and position any
wheel chocks to prevent movement of your
vehicle.
Fit the chains following the instructions
provided by the manufacturer.
Move off gently and drive for a few
moments, without exceeding 30 mph
(50 km/h).
Stop your vehicle and check that the snow
chains are correctly tightened.
Avoid driving on roads that have been
cleared of snow, to avoid damaging
your vehicle's tyres and the road
surface. It is recommended that before
you leave, you practise fitting the snow
chains on a level and dry surface. If
your vehicle is fitted with alloy wheels,
check that no part of the chain or its
fixings is in contact with the wheel rim.
Use only the chains designed to be fitted to the
type of wheel fitted to your vehicle:
Original
tyre size
Maximum link
size.
215/55 R16
9 mm
215/50 R17
215/45 R18
For more information on snow chains, contact a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
11
Practical information
231
Changing a bulb
Model with halogen headlamps
1.
Direction indicators
(light-emitting diodes - LEDs).
2.
Main beam headlamps (HB3).
3.
Dipped beam headlamps (H7).
4.
Daytime running lamps/sidelamps
(light-emitting diodes - LEDs).
5.
Foglamps (PS24W).
1.
Direction indicators (light-emitting
diodes - LEDs).
2.
Dipped / main beam directional
headlamps (D1S).
3.
Daytime running lamps / sidelamps
(light-emitting diodes - LEDs).
4.
Foglamps (PS24W).
Model with xenon and directional
headlamps
Front lamps
The headlamps are fitted with
polycarbonate glass with a protective
coating:
do not clean them using a dry
or abrasive cloth, nor with a
detergent or solvent product,
use a sponge and soapy water or a
pH neutral product,
when using a high pressure washer
on persistent marks, do not keep
the lance directed towards the
lamps or their edges for too long,
so as not to damage their protective
coating and seals,
do not touch the bulb directly with
your fingers, use lint-free cloths.
Changing a bulb should only be done
after the headlamp has been switched
off for a few minutes (risk of serious
burns).
It is imperative to use only anti-
ultraviolet (UV) type bulbs in order not
to damage the headlamp.
Always replace a failed bulb with a
new bulb with the same type and
specification.
Risk of electrocution
Xenon bulbs (D1S) must be replaced
by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Practical information
232
Changing main beam headlamp bulbs
(halogen model)
Changing dipped beam headlamp bulbs
(models with halogen headlamps)
Remove the protective plastic cover by
pulling the tab.
Disconnect the bulb connector.
Extract the bulb by pulling and change it.
To refit, carry out these operations in reverse
order.
Remove the protective plastic cover by
pulling the tab.
Without disconnecting the connector, turn
the body of the bulb a quarter of a turn to
the left to disengage the assembly.
Disconnect the connector to release the
bulb.
To refit, carry out these operations in reverse
order.
Changing direction indicators
and daytime running lamps /
sidelamps
For the replacement of these LED (light
emitting diode) lamps, contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
11
Practical information
233
Changing foglamp bulbs
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Insert a screwdriver towards the centre of
the repeater between the repeater and the
base of the mirror.
Tilt the screwdriver to extract the repeater
and remove it.
Disconnect the repeater connector.
Changing integrated direction
indicator side repeaters
Changing dipped beam and
main beam headlamp bulbs
(models with xenon headlamps)
D1S xenon bulbs must be changed
by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop as there is a risk of
electrocution.
It is recommended that all D1S bulbs
are changed at the same time if one of
them fails.
You can also contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop to have
these lamps changed.
To refit, carry out these operations in reverse
order.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop to obtain a new repeater.
Practical information
234
Rear lamps
1.
Direction indicators
(PY21W-21W).
2.
Brake lamps
(P21W-21W).
3.
Sidelamps
(LEDs).
4.
Reversing lamp
(P21W).
5.
Foglamp
(P21W).
Remove the two lamp unit fixing nuts.
Pull the lamp rearwards (a positioning lug
retains the lamp).
Disconnect the lamp connector.
Press the four tabs and remove the bulb
holder.
Changing brake lamp and
direction indicator bulbs
11
Practical information
235
Turn the bulb a quarter of a turn and
change it.
To refit, carry out these operations in reverse
order.
For the replacement of this type of LED lamp,
contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Reach under the bumper.
Turn the bulb a quarter of a turn and
change it.
Changing sidelamps (LEDs)
Changing foglamp or reversing
lamp bulbs
Practical information
236
Press the pairs of clips
A
then
B
then
C
to
detach the bulb holders.
Open the boot and remove the upper
tailgate seal.
Remove the centre tailgate trim.
Unscrew the two nuts using a 10mm
spanner.
Press the threaded pins while supporting
the lamp from the outside.
Close the tailgate.
Disconnect the lamp connector then the
screenwash pipe to remove the lens.
Changing the third brake lamp bulb
(5W5)
Insert a thin screwdriver into one of the
outer holes of the lens.
Push it outwards to unclip.
Remove the lens.
Pull the bulb out and change it.
Changing the number plate lamp
bulbs (W5W)
11
Practical information
237
Changing a fuse
Access to the tools
Changing a fuse
Use the special tweezer to extract the fuse
from its housing.
Always replace the faulty fuse with a fuse
of the same rating.
Check that the number marked on the
fusebox, the rating marked on the fuse and
the following tables all agree.
Good
Failed
Before changing a fuse, the cause of the failure
must be identified and rectified.
Identify the failed fuse by checking the
condition of its filament.
Procedure for replacing a faulty fuse with a new fuse to rectify a failure of the corresponding
function.
PEUGEOT will not accept responsibility
for the cost incurred in repairing your
vehicle or for rectifying malfunctions
resulting from the installation of
accessories not supplied and not
recommended by PEUGEOT and
not installed in accordance with its
instructions, in particular when the
combined consumption of all of the
additional equipment connected
exceeds 10 milliamperes.
Installing electrical
accessories
Your vehicle's electrical system is
designed to operate with standard or
optional equipment.
Before installing other electrical
equipment or accessories on your
vehicle, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or
a qualified workshop.
The extraction tweezer is fitted to the back of
the dashboard fusebox cover.
To gain access to it:
Remove the cover completely.
Remove the tweezer.
The replacement of a fuse not
mentioned in the tables below may
cause a serious malfunction on your
vehicle.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Practical information
238
Dashboard fuses
The fusebox is placed in the lower dashboard.
Fuse tables
Fuse
N°
Rating
(A)
Functions
F1
15
Rear wiper.
F2
-
Not used.
F3
5
Airbag control unit.
F4
10
Electrochrome rear view mirror, air conditioning, switching and
protection unit, rear multimedia.
F5
30
Front one-touch electric windows.
F6
30
Rear one-touch electric windows.
F7
5
Front and rear courtesy lamps, map reading lamps, rear
reading lamps, sun visor lighting, glove box lighting, centre
armrest lighting, boot 12 V relay control.
11
Practical information
239
Access to the fuses
Refer to the paragraph "Access to the
tools".
Fuse
N°
Rating
(A)
Functions
F8
20
Audio equipment, audio/telephone, CD changer, multifunction
scren, tyre under-inflation detection, alarm siren, alarm control
unit, telematic unit.
F9
30
Front 12 V socket, cigarette lighter, rear 12 V socket.
F10
15
Steering mounted controls.
F11
15
Low current ignition switch.
F12
15
Trailer presence, rain / sunshine sensor, supply for
fuses F32, F34, F35.
F13
5
Engine fusebox, airbag control unit.
F14
15
Instrument panel, instrument panel screen, supply for fuse F33.
F15
30
Locking and deadlocking.
F17
40
Heated rear screen, supply for fuse F30.
Practical information
240
Fuse
N°
Rating
(A)
Functions
F30
5
Heated door mirrors.
F31
30
Boot 12 V socket.
F32
5
Electronic gearbox gear lever.
F33
10
Head-up display, Bluetooth system, air conditioning.
F34
5
Seat belt warning lamp display.
F35
10
Parking sensors, Hi-Fi amplifier authorisation.
F36
10
Trailer fusebox control unit, driver's door control pad.
F37
20
Hi-Fi amplifier.
F38
30
Driver's electric seat.
F39
20
Panoramic sunroof blind.
11
Practical information
241
Engine compartment fuses
The fusebox is placed in the engine
compartment near the battery.
Fuse
N°
Rating
(A)
Functions
F2
15
Horn.
F3
10
Front / rear wash-wipe.
F4
10
Daytime running lamps.
F5
15
Purge canister, turbine discharge and Turbo pressure
regulation electrovalves (1.6 litre THP), oil vapour heater
(1.6 litre THP), diesel heater (1.6 litre HDI).
F6
10
Diagnostic socket, directional headlamps, particle emission
filter pump (Diesel), Distance alert, mirror adjustment control.
F7
10
Power steering control unit, automatic gearbox, directional
headlamps height adjustment motor.
F8
20
Starter motor control.
F9
10
Clutch and brake pedal switches.
F11
40
Air conditioning fan.
Access to the fuses
Unclip the cover.
Change the fuse (see corresponding
paragraph).
When you have finished, close the cover
carefully to ensure correct sealing of the
fusebox.
Fuse table
Practical information
242
Fuse
N°
Rating
(A)
Functions
F12
30
Windscreen wipers slow / fast speed.
F14
30
Air pump.
F15
10
Right-hand main beam headlamp.
F16
10
Left-hand main beam headlamp.
F17
15
Left-hand dipped headlamp.
F18
15
Right-hand dipped headlamp.
11
Practical information
243
Fuse
N°
Rating
(A)
Functions
F2
5
Dual function brake switch.
F3
5
Battery charge unit.
F4
25
ABS/DSC electrovalves.
F6
15
Electronic / automatic gearbox.
Table of fuses above the battery
Practical information
244
1 2 V b a t t e r y
Access to the battery
The battery is located under the bonnet.
To gain access to it:
open the bonnet using the interior
release
lever, then the exterior safety catch,
secure the bonnet stay,
remove the plastic cover on the (+) terminal,
if necessary, unclip the fusebox to remove
the battery.
Disconnecting the (+) cable
Raise the locking tab
D
fully to release the
cable terminal clamp
E
.
Reconnecting the (+) cable
Position the open clamp
E
of the cable on
the positive post (+) of the battery.
Press vertically on the clamp
E
to position
it correctly on the battery.
Lock the clamp by spreading the
positioning lug and then lowering the tab
D
.
The presence of this label, in particular with the
Stop & Start system, indicates the use of a 12 V
lead-acid battery with special technology and
specification; the involvement of a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop is essential
when replacing or disconnecting the battery.
After refitting the battery, the Stop & Start system
will only be active after a continuous period of
immobilisation of the vehicle, a period which
depends on the climatic conditions and the state
of charge of the battery (up to about 8 hours).
With Stop & Start, the battery does not have to
be disconnected for charging.
Procedure for starting the engine using another
battery or charging a discharged battery.
Do not apply excessive force on the
tab as locking will not be possible if the
clamp is not positioned correctly; start
the procedure again.
11
Practical information
245
Starting using another
battery
When your vehicle's battery is discharged, the
engine can be started using a slave battery
(external or on another vehicle) and jump lead
cables.
Remove the plastic cover from
the (+) terminal, if your vehicle has one.
Connect the red cable to the positive
terminal (+) of the flat battery
A
, then to the
positive terminal (+) of the slave battery
B
.
Connect one end of the green or black
cable to the negative terminal (-) of the
slave battery
B
(or earth point on the other
vehicle).
Connect the other
end of the green or black
Connect the other end of the green or black Connect the other
cable to the earth point
C
on the broken
down vehicle (or on the engine mounting).
Start the engine of the vehicle with the
good battery and leave it running for a
few minutes.
Operate the starter on the broken down
vehicle and let the engine run
If the engine does not start straight away,
switch off the ignition and wait a few
moments before trying again.
Wait until the engine returns to idle then
disconnect the jump lead cables in the
reverse order.
Refit the plastic cover to the (+) terminal, if
your vehicle has one.
Do not try to start the engine by
connecting a battery charger.
Do not disconnect the (+) terminal when
the engine is running.
First check that the slave battery has a
nominal voltage of 12 V and a capacity
at least equal to that of the discharged
battery.
Practical information
246
Charging the battery using
a battery charger
Disconnect the battery from the vehicle.
Follow the instructions for use provided by
the manufacturer of the charger.
Connect the battery starting with the
negative terminal (-).
Check that the terminals and connectors
are clean. If they are covered with sulphate
(whitish or greenish deposit), remove them
and clean them.
The batteries contain harmful substances
such as sulphuric acid and lead. They
must be disposed of in accordance
with regulations and must not, in any
circumstances, be discarded with household
waste.
Take used remote control batteries and
vehicle batteries to a special collection point.
It is advisable to disconnect the battery
if the vehicle is to be left unused for
more than one month.
Before disconnecting the battery
Wait 2 minutes after switching off the ignition
before disconnecting the battery.
Close the windows and the doors before
disconnecting the battery.
Following reconnection of the
battery
Following reconnection of the battery, switch on
the ignition and wait 1 minute before starting to
permit initialisation of the electronic systems.
However, if problems remain following this
operation, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Referring to the corresponding section, you
must yourself reinitialise (depending on
version):
- the remote control key,
- the electric blind(s),
- ...
Protect your eyes and face before
handling the battery.
All operations on the battery must be
carried out in a well ventilated area and
away from naked flames and sources
of sparks, so as to avoid the risk of
explosion or fire.
Do not try to charge a frozen battery;
the battery must first be thawed out to
avoid the risk of explosion. If the battery
has been frozen, before charging have
it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop who will check that
the internal components have not been
damaged and the casing is not cracked,
which could cause a leak of toxic and
corrosive acid.
Do not reverse the polarity and use only
a 12 V charger.
Do not disconnect the terminals while
the engine is running.
Do not charge the batteries without
disconnecting the terminals first.
Wash your hands afterwards.
Do not push the vehicle to start the
engine if you have an electronic or
automatic gearbox.
Some functions are not available if the
battery is not sufficiently charged.
11
Practical information
247
Exiting economy mode
These functions are reactivated automatically
next time the vehicle is driven.
To restore the use of these functions
immediately, start the engine and let it run for at
least 5 minutes.
Load reduction mode Energy economy mode
Switching to economy mode
Once this time has elapsed, a message
appears in the screen indicating that the
vehicle has switched to economy mode and the
active functions are put on standby.
System which manages the use of certain
functions according to the level of charge
remaining in the battery.
When the vehicle is being driven, the load
reduction function temporarily deactivates
certain functions, such as the air conditioning,
the heated rear screen...
The deactivated functions are reactivated
automatically as soon as conditions permit.
System which manages the duration of use of certain functions to conserve a sufficient level of
charge in the battery.
After the engine has stopped, you can still use functions such as the audio and telematics
system, windscreen wipers, dipped beam headlamps, courtesy lamps, etc. for a maximum
combined duration of thirty minutes.
This period may be greatly reduced if the battery is not fully charged.
If the telephone is being used at this
time:
- it will be maintained for 5 minutes
with the hands-free kit of your
PEUGEOT
Connect Sound or
PEUGEOT
Connect Navigation,
- it will still be possible to finish the
call with the
PEUGEOT
Connect
Media.
Let the engine run for the duration
specified to ensure that the battery
charge is sufficient.
Do not repeatedly and continuously
restart the engine in order to charge the
battery.
A flat battery prevents the engine
from starting (refer to the "Battery"
paragraph).
Practical information
248
Changing a wiper blade
Removing
Raise the corresponding wiper arm.
Unclip the wiper blade and remove it.
Fitting
Put the corresponding new wiper blade in
place and clip it.
Fold down the wiper arm carefully.
Before removing a front
wiper blade
Within one minute after switching off
the ignition, operate the wiper stalk to
position the wiper blades vertically on the
windscreen.
After fitting a front wiper
blade
Switch on the ignition.
Operate the wiper stalk again to park the
wiper blades.
Towing the vehicle
Access to the tools
The towing eye is installed under the left-hand
concertina board, in the boot interior trim.
To gain access to it:
open the boot,
raise the concertina board,
remove the towing eye from the holder.
Procedure for having your vehicle towed or
for towing another vehicle using a removable
towing eye.
11
Practical information
249
Towing your vehicle
On the front bumper, unclip the cover by
pressing at the bottom.
Screw the towing eye in fully.
Install the towing bar.
Switch on the hazard warning lamps on the
towed vehicle.
On the rear bumper, unclip the cover by
pressing at the bottom.
Screw the towing eye in fully.
Install the towing bar.
Switch on the hazard warning lamps on the
towed vehicle.
Towing another vehicle
Put the gear lever into neutral
(position
N
for an electronic or
automatic gearbox).
Failure to follow this instruction could
lead to damage to certain components
(brakes, transmission, ...) and the
absence of braking assistance on
restarting the engine.
General
recommendations
Observe the legislation in force in your
country.
Ensure that the weight of the towing
vehicle is higher than that of the towed
vehicle.
The driver must remain at the wheel of
the towed vehicle and must have a valid
driving licence.
When towing a vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground, always use an approved
towing bar; rope and straps are prohibited.
When towing a vehicle with the engine off,
there is no longer any power assistance
for braking or steering.
In the following cases, you must always
call on a professional recovery service:
- vehicle broken down on a motorway
or fast road,
- 4 wheel drive vehicle,
- when it is not possible to put the
gearbox into neutral, unlock the
steering, or release the parking
brake,
- towing with only two wheels on the
ground,
- where there is no approved towing
bar available...
Practical information
250
Towing a trailer
Your vehicle is primarily designed for
transporting people and luggage, but it may
also be used for towing a trailer.
Driving advice
Towbar suitable for the attachment of a trailer or installation of a bicycle carrier, with additional lighting and signalling.
Distribution of loads
Distribute the load in the trailer so that the
heaviest items are as close as possible to
the axle and the nose weight approaches
the maximum permitted without
exceeding it.
Air density decreases with altitude, thus
reducing engine performance. Above
1 000 metres, the maximum towed load must
be reduced by 10 % for every 1 000 metres of
altitude.
We recommend the use of genuine
PEUGEOT towbars and their harnesses
that have been tested and approved
from the design stage of your vehicle,
and that the fitting of the towbar is
entrusted to a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
If the towbar is not fitted by a
PEUGEOT dealer, it is imperative that it
is fitted in accordance with the vehicle
manufacturer's instructions.
Driving with a trailer places greater
demands on the towing vehicle and the
driver must take particular care.
Refer to the "Technical data" section for
details of the weights and towed loads
which apply to your vehicle.
11
Practical information
251
Braking
Towing a trailer increases the braking distance.
To avoid overheating of the brakes on a long
mountain type of descent, the use of engine
braking is recommended.
Tyres
Check the tyre pressures of the towing
vehicle and of the trailer, observing the
recommended pressures.
Lighting
Check the electrical lighting and signalling
on the trailer.
If the warning lamp and the
STOP
warning lamp come on,
stop the vehicle and switch off
the engine as soon as possible.
Side wind
Take into account the increased sensitivity
to side wind.
Cooling
Towing a trailer on a slope increases the
temperature of the coolant.
As the fan is electrically controlled, its cooling
capacity is not dependent on the engine speed.
To lower the engine speed, reduce your
speed.
The maximum towed load on a long incline
depends on the gradient and the ambient
temperature.
In all cases, keep a check on the coolant
temperature.
The rear parking sensors will be
deactivated automatically if a genuine
PEUGEOT towbar is used.
Practical information
252
Fitting roof bars
When fitting transverse roof bars, use the four
quick-fit fixings provided for this purpose:
lift the concealing flaps,
open the fixing covers on each bar using
the key,
put each fixing in place and lock them on
the roof one by one,
ensure that roof bars are correctly fitted
(by shaking them),
close the fixing covers on each bar using
the key.
If your vehicle is fitted with roof
finishers, do not use them for carrying
loads.
Maximum authorised weight on the roof
rack, for a loading height not exceeding
40 cm (with the exception of bicycle
carriers):
65
kg.
If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt the
speed of the vehicle to the profile of the
road to avoid damaging the roof bars
and the fixings on the roof.
Be sure to refer to national legislation in
order to comply with the regulations for
transporting objects that are longer than
the vehicle.
11
Practical information
253
Removal
Unclip the upper part of the screen, starting
at the edges.
Take the screen by the lower edges and
detach it by pulling it towards you.
Very cold climate screen
Offer up the screen, placing the lower clips
in contact with lower section of the lower
grille, using the centre guide as an aid.
Clip first the lower part, then the upper
part, from the middle out towards the
edges.
Fitting
Removable protective screen which prevents the accumulation of snow at the radiator cooling fan.
Before fitting or removing the screen, ensure that the engine is off and the cooling fan has stopped. It is recommended that the screen be fitted and
removed by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Do not forget to remove the very cold
climate screen:
- when the ambient temperature
exceeds 10° C,
- when towing,
- at speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Practical information
254
"Protection"
Mats * , boot liner, luggage net, style mud
flaps ** , seat covers, pet range, boot sill
protector...
"Safety and security"
Anti-theft alarm, window etching, wheel
security bolts, child seats and booster
cushions, first aid kit, breathalyzer, warning
triangle, high visibility vest, stolen vehicle
tracking system, dog guard, winter equipment
(snow chains, non-slip covers...)...
Accessories
"Style"
Alloy wheels, door sill trims, chrome-plated
door handle shells, spoiler, gear lever knob...
"Transport solutions"
Roof bars, towbars, bicycle carrier on towbar,
bicycle carrier on roof bars, ski carrier, rigid
and flexible roof boxes...
Trailer towbar, which must be fitted by a
PEUGEOT dealer.
"Comfort"
Door deflectors, parking sensors, side window
blinds, coat-hanger, insulated module...
A wide range of accessories and genuine parts is available from the PEUGEOT dealer network.
These accessories and parts have been tested and approved for reliability and safety.
They are all adapted to your vehicle and benefit from PEUGEOT's recommendation and warranty.
* To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals:
- ensure that the mat is positioned and
secured correctly,
- never fit one mat on top of another.
** The configuration of the vehicle requires that
it be fitted with mud flaps at the rear.
11
Practical information
255
Installation of radio
communication
transmitters
Before installing any after-market radio
communication transmitter, you can
contact a PEUGEOT dealer for the
specification of transmitters which can
be fitted (frequency, maximum power,
aerial position, specific installation
requirements), in line with the Vehicle
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive
( 2 0 0 4 / 1 0 4 / E C ) .
The fitting of electrical equipment
or accessories which are not
recommended by PEUGEOT may result
in a failure of your vehicle's electronic
system and excessive electrical
consumption.
Please note this precaution. You
are advised to contact a PEUGEOT
representative to be shown the range
of recommended equipment and
accessories.
Depending on the legislation in force
in the country, it may be compulsory
to have a high visibility safety vest,
warning triangle and spare bulbs and
fuses available in the vehicle.
You can also obtain cleaning and
maintenance products (exterior and
interior), products for topping up
(screenwash fluid...) and refills (sealant
cartridge for the temporary puncture
repair kit...) from PEUGEOT dealers.
"Multimedia"
Portable satellite navigation systems, mapping
updates, Bluetooth hands-free system, DVD
player, USB Box, additional Bluetooth wireless
headphones, Bluetooth audio headphones
mains charger, multimedia support...
Technical data
256
Engine s
1.6 litre VTi
120 hp
1.6 litre THP
150 / 156 / 163 hp
Gearbox
Manual
(5-speed)
Manual
(6-speed)
Automatic
(6-speed)
Cubic capacity (cc)
1 5 9 8
1 5 9 8
Bore x stroke (mm)
77 x 85.8
77 x 85.8
Max power: EU standard (kW) *
88
110 / 115 / 120
Max power engine speed (rpm)
5 6 6 0
6 000-6 050 / 6 000 / 6 000
Max torque: EU standard (Nm)
1 6 0
2 4 0
Max torque engine speed (rpm)
4 2 5 0
1 4 0 0
Fuel
Unleaded
Unleaded
Catalytic converter
yes
yes
Engine oil capacity, with filter replacement
(in litres)
4 . 2 5
4 . 2 5
Petrol engines and gearboxes
* The maximum power corresponds to the type approved value on a test bed, under the conditions defined in European legislation
(directive 1999/99/CE).
12
Technical data
257
The GTW and towed load
values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for
each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient temperature is above 37 °C,
limit the towed load.
Engines
1.6 litre VTi
120 hp
1.6 litre THP
156 hp
1.6 litre THP
150 / 156 / 163 hp
Gearbox
Manual
(5-speed)
Manual
(6 speed)
Automatic
(6-speed)
Seats
5
7
5
7
5
7
- Unladen weight
1 4 0 5
1 4 3 0
1 4 6 0
1 4 9 0
1 5 1 0
1 5 4 0
- Kerb weight *
1 4 8 0
1 5 0 5
1 5 3 5
1 5 6 5
1 5 8 5
1 6 1 5
- Payload
5 9 5
7 6 0
5 9 0
7 3 5
5 6 5
7 1 0
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW)
2 0 0 0
2 1 9 0
2 0 5 0
2 2 2 5
2 0 7 5
2 2 5 0
- Gross train weight (GTW)
on a 12% gradient
3 3 0 0
3 2 9 0
3 4 0 0
3 4 2 5
2 875 / 3 525 /
2 875
3 050 / 3 550 /
3 050
- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)
on a 10% or 12% gradient
1 3 0 0
1 1 0 0
1 3 5 0
1 2 0 0
800 / 1 450
/ 800
800 / 1 300
/ 800
- Braked trailer ** (with load transfer within
the GTW limit)
1 5 0 0
1 4 0 0
1 5 5 0
1 5 0 0
800 / 1 650
/ 800
800 / 1 600
/ 800
- Unbraked trailer
7 4 0
7 5 0
7 5 0
- Recommended nose weight
7 0
7 0
* The kerb weight is equal to the unladen
weight + driver (75 kg).
** The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an equal amount; warning,
towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
Petrol weights and towed loads (in kg)
Technical data
258
Engines
1.6 litre Turbo e-HDi
115 hp
2 litre Turbo HDi
136 / 150 hp
2 litre Turbo HDi
163 hp
Gearbox
Manual
(6-speed)
Electronic
(6-speed)
Manual
(6-speed)
Automatic
(6-speed)
Cubic capacity (cc)
1 5 6 0
1 9 9 7
Bore x stroke (mm)
75 x 88.3
85 x 88
Max power: EU standard (kW) *
82 - 84
100 / 110
1 2 0
Max power engine speed (rpm)
3 6 0 0
4 000 / 3 750
3 7 5 0
Max torque: EU standard (Nm)
2 7 0
3 2 0 / 3 4 0
3 4 0
Max torque engine speed (rpm)
1 7 5 0
2 0 0 0
Fuel
Diesel
Diesel
Catalytic converter
yes
yes
Particle emission filter
yes
yes
Oil capacities (in litres)
Engine (with filter replacement)
3 . 7 5
-
Diesel engines and gearboxes
* The maximum power corresponds to the type approved value on a test bed, under the conditions defined in European legislation
(directive 1999/99/CE).
12
Technical data
259
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for
each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient temperature is above 37 °C,
limit the towed load.
* The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg).
** The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an equal amount; warning,
towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
Diesel weights and towed loads (in kg)
Engine
1.6 litre Turbo e-HDi
115 hp
Gearbox
Manual
(6-speed)
Electronic
(6-speed)
Seats
5
7
5
7
- Unladen weight
1 4 3 0
1 4 3 0
1 5 2 0
- Kerb weight *
1 5 0 5
1 5 0 5
1 5 9 5
- Payload
6 4 0
8 2 0
6 4 0
7 3 0
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW)
2 0 7 0
2 2 5 0
2 0 7 0
2 2 5 0
- Gross train weight (GTW)
on a 12% gradient
2 9 5 0
3 1 7 0
3 1 5 0
- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)
on a 10% or 12% gradient
880
7 0 0
1 1 0 0
9 0 0
- Braked trailer ** (with load transfer within
the GTW limit)
1 0 8 0
9 0 0
1 3 0 0
1 1 0 0
- Unbraked trailer
7 5 0
7 0 0
7 5 0
7 5 0
- Recommended nose weight
7 0
7 0
Technical data
260
The GTW and t
owed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for
each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient temperature is above 37 °C,
limit the towed load.
*
The ker
b weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg).
** The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an equal amount; warning,
towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
Diesel weights and towed loads (in kg)
Diesel engine
1.6 litre Turbo e-HDi
115
hp
2 litre Turbo
136 hp
Gearbox
Electronic
(6-speed) Score
Manual
(6-speed)
Seats
5
7
5
7
- Unladen weight
1 4 3 0
1 5 2 0
1 5 4 0
- Kerb weight *
1 5 0 5
1 5 9 5
1 6 1 5
- Payload
6 4 0
7 3 0
585
7 7 0
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW)
2 0 7 0
2 2 5 0
2 1 2 5
2 3 1 0
- Gross vehicle weight (MTRA)
on a 12% gradient
2 9 2 0
3 150 / 2 950
3 4 7 5
3 5 1 0
- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)
on a 10% or 12% gradient
850
900 / 700
1 3 5 0
1 2 0 0
- Braked trailer ** (with load transfer within
the GTW limit)
1 0 5 0
1 100 / 900
1 5 5 0
1 5 0 0
- Unbraked trailer
7 5 0
7 5 0
7 5 0
- Recommended nose weight
7 0
7 0
12
Technical data
261
The GTW and towed load valu
es indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for
each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient temperature is above 37 °C,
limit the towed load.
*
The kerb w
eight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg).
** The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an equal amount; warning,
towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
Diesel weights and towed loads (in kg)
Diesel engine
2 litre Turbo HDi
150 hp
2 litre Turbo HDi
163 hp
Gearbox
Manual
(6-speed)
Automatic
(6-speed)
Seats
5
7
5
7
- Unladen weight
1 5 4 0
1 5 8 9
1 6 1 9
- Kerb weight *
1 6 1 5
1 6 6 4
1 6 9 4
- Payload
585
7 7 0
5 3 6
7 1 1
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW)
2 1 2 5
2 3 1 0
2 1 2 5
2 3 3 0
- Gross train weight (GTW)
on a 12% gradient
3 4 7 5
3 5 1 0
3 5 2 5
3 5 3 0
- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)
on a 10% or 12% gradient
1 3 5 0
1 2 0 0
1 4 0 0
1 2 0 0
- Braked trailer ** (with load transfer within
the GTW limit)
1 5 5 0
1 5 0 0
1 6 0 0
1 5 0 0
- Unbraked trailer
7 5 0
7 5 0
- Recommended nose weight
7 0
7 0
Technical data
262
Engines
1.6 litre Turbo e-HDi
115 hp
2 litre Turbo HDi
150 hp
Gearbox
Manual
(6-speed)
Electronic
(6-speed)
Manual
( 6 - s p e e d )
Manual
(6-speed)
Model codes
9 H Z
9 H Z
9 H R
RHE
- Unladen weight
1 4 8 1
1 4 8 2
1 4 8 1
1 5 7 2
- Kerb weight *
1 5 5 6
1 5 5 7
1 5 5 6
1 6 4 7
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) **
2 2 2 5
2 2 3 0
2 2 0 0
2 3 1 0
- Gross train weight (GTW)
on a 12% gradient ***
3 1 2 0
3 1 7 0
3 4 7 5
- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)
on a 10% or 12% gradient ****
8 9 5
8 9 0
9 7 0
1 1 6 5
- Braked trailer (with load transfer within the
GTW limit)
X
X
X
X
- Unbraked trailer
7 5 0
7 5 0
- Recommended nose weight
7 0
7 0
* The kerb weight is equal t
o the unladen weight + driver (75 kg).
** Exceeding the maximum rear axle weight involves limiting the speed to 50 mph (80 km/h) as defined in point 2.7 of the Directive.
*** Exceeding the gross vehicle weight when the vehicle is towing involves limiting the speed to 50 mph (80 km/h) as defined in point 2.7 of the
Directive.
**** Maximum braked trailer weight within the GTW limit; warning, towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road
holding.
The GTW and towed load values indic
ated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for
each additional 1000 metres of altitude.
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient temperature is above 37 °C,
limit the towed load.
Diesel weights and towed loads (in kg) - commercial vehicles
12
Technical data
263
Dimensions (in mm)
Technical data
264
Identifi cation markings
A.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) under the bonnet.
This number is engraved on the bodywork near the
damper support.
B.
Vehicle identification Number (VIN) on the
windscreen lower crossmember.
This number is indicated on a self-adhesive label which is
visible through the windscreen.
C.
Manufacturer's label.
The VIN is indicated on a self-destroying
label affixed to the door aperture, on the
driver's side.
D.
Tyre/paint label.
This label is fitted to the middle pillar, on
the driver's side.
It bears the following information:
- the tyre inflation pressures with and without
load,
- the tyre sizes,
- the inflation pressure of the spare wheel,
- the paint colour code.
Various visible markings for the identification and tracing of your vehicle.
Low tyre pressures increase fuel
consumption.
The tyre pressures must be checked
when the tyres are cold, at least once
a month.
265
EMERGENCY OR ASSISTANCE CALL
266
EMERGENCY OR ASSISTANCE CALL
In an emergency, press this button for more than
2 seconds. Flashing of the green LED and a voice
message confi rm that the call has been made to the
"
PEUGEOT
Connect SOS" centre * .
The green LED remains on (without fl ashing) when communication is
established. It goes off at the end of communication.
When the ignition is switched on, the green
LED comes on for 3 seconds indicating that
the system is operating correctly.
Pressing this button again immediately cancels the request.
The cancellation is confi rmed by a voice message.
Press this button for more than 2 seconds to request
assistance if the vehicle breaks down.
A voice message confi rms that the call has been made ** .
Pressing this button again immediately cancels the request. The green
LED goes off. Cancellation is confi rmed by a voice message
To cancel a call, tell the "PEUGEOT Connect SOS" call centre that the call
was a mistake.
"
PEUGEOT
Connect SOS" immediately locates your vehicle, starts
communication with you in your language ** , and where necessary sends
the appropriate public emergency services ** . In countries where the
service is not available, or when the locating service has been expressly
declined, the call sent directly to the emergency services (112) without the
vehicle location.
If an impact is detected by the airbag control unit, and
independently of the deployment of any airbags, an emergency call
is made automatically.
* Subject to the general conditions for the service available from dealers
and to technological and technical limitations.
If the orange LED fl ashes: there is a system
fault.
If the orange LED is on continuously: the
backup battery must be replaced.
In either case, contact a PEUGEOT dealer.
If you purchased your vehicle outside the PEUGEOT dealer network,
we invite you to have a dealer check the confi guration of these services
and, if desired, modifi ed to suit your wishes. In a multi-lingual country,
confi guration is possible in the offi cial national language of your choice.
For technical reasons and in particular to improve the quality of
"PEUGEOT CONNECT services" services to customers, the manufacturer
reserves the right to carry out updates to the vehicle's on-board telematic
system.
PEUGEOT Connect SOS PEUGEOT Connect Assistance
Operation of the system
** Depending on the geographical cover of "
PEUGEOT
Connect SOS",
"
PEUGEOT
Connect Assistance" and the offi cial national language
selected by the owner of the vehicle.
The list of countries covered and PEUGEOT CONNECT services
services is available from dealers or at www.peugeot.co.uk.
267
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
EMERGENCY OR ASSISTANCE CALL USING
PEUGEOT CONNECT MEDIA NAVIGATION (NG4 3D)
In an emergency, press the SOS button until an audible
signal is heard and a "Confi rmation / Cancellation"
screen is displayed (if valid SIM card inserted).
A call is made to the PEUGEOT Emergency team
which receives locating information from the vehicle
and can send a detailed alert to the relevant emergency
services.
In countries in which the team is not operational, or
when the locating service has been expressly declined,
the call is sent to the emergency services (112).
Warning - the emergency call and the services are only active
if the internal telephone is used with a valid SIM card. With a
Bluetooth telephone and without a SIM card, these services are not
operational.
Press this button for access to PEUGEOT services.
Customer call
Select "Customer call" to request
any information about the PEUGEOT
marque.
Select "PEUGEOT Assistance"
to make a roadside assistance call.
PEUGEOT Assistance
This service is subject to conditions and availability. Consult a
PEUGEOT dealer. If you have purchased your vehicle outside the
PEUGEOT dealer network, we invite you to have a dealer check the
confi guration of these services and, if desired, modifi ed to suit your
wishes.
If an impact is detected by the airbag control unit, and independently
of the deployment of any airbags, an emergency call is made
automatically.
The message "Deteriorated emergency call" associated with
fl ashing of the orange indicator lamp indicates a malfunction.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer.
PEUGEOT Connect SOS PEUGEOT Connect Assistance
268
269
The system is protected in such a way that it will only
operate in your vehicle.
PEUGEOT
Connect Media Navigation
(NG4 3D)
For safety reasons, the driver must only carry out
operations which require prolonged attention while the
vehicle is stationary.
When the engine is switched off and to prevent
discharging of the battery, the system switches off
following the activation of the energy economy mode.
01 First steps
02 Voice commands and
steering mounted controls
03 General operation
04 Navigation - Guidance
05 Traffic information
06 Radio
07 Music media players
08 Using the telephone
09 Screen menu map
Frequently asked questions
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
270
272
275
280
289
291
292
297
302
307
CONTENTS
MULTIMEDIA AUDIO SYSTEM / BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE
GPS EUROPE
270
01
FIRST STEPS
PEUGEOT Connect Media Navigation (NG4 3D) control panel
Access to the Radio Menu
Display the list of stations in
alphabetical order (FM band) or
frequency order (AM band).
Access to the Media Menu
(audio CD, Jukebox,
Auxiliary input).
Display the list of tracks.
Change the audio source.
Access to the Navigation
Menu and display recent
destinations.
Abandon the current
operation.
Long press: return to main
display.
Access to the Traffi c Menu.
Access to the Address book
Menu.
Access to the "SETUP" menu
(confi guration).
Long press: GPS coverage.
Audio settings (Balance /
Fader, Bass / Treble, Musical
ambience...).
Adjust volume (each source
is independent, including
navigation messages and alerts).
Long press: reinitialise the
system.
Short press: mute.
Automatic search down/up for
radio frequencies.
Select previous/next CD or MP3
track.
SD card reader.
Short press: clears the last
character.
Enter the numbers or letters
using the alpha-numeric keypad.
Presetting 10 radio frequencies.
271
01
FIRST STEPS
PEUGEOT Connect Media Navigation (NG4 3D) navigator
Press to left / right:
With display of the "RADIO" screen:
select the previous / next frequency.
With display of the "MEDIA" screen:
select the previous / next track.
With display of the "MAP" or "NAV":
horizontal movement on the map.
Press up / down:
With display of the "RADIO" screen:
select the previous / next radio station
in the list.
With display of the "MEDIA" screen:
select the MP3 folder.
With display of the "MAP" or "NAV":
vertical movement on the map.
Go the the next or previous page in a
menu.
Movement on the virtual keypad
displayed.
OK: confi rm the highlighted item.
END CALL: access to the
Phone menu.
End a call in progress or reject
an incoming call, Bluetooth
connection.
Normal display or black screen.
Select successive display in
the screen of "MAP" / "NAV"
(if navigation in progress) / "TEL"
(if a call is in progress) /
"RADIO" or "MEDIA" being
played.
CALL: access to the Phone
menu.
Bluetooth connection, accept
an incoming call.
Rotate the dial:
With display of the "RADIO" screen:
select the previous / next radio station
in the list.
With display of the "MEDIA" screen:
select the previous / next CD or MP3
track.
With display of the "MAP" or "NAV":
zoom the map in/out.
Movement of the menu selection
cursor.
272
02
SETUP
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
NAV TRAFFIC
ADDR
BOOK
SETUP
Before using the system for the fi rst time, you are advised to listen
to, say and practice the tutorial.
Press the SETUP button and select
the "Language & Speech" function.
Turn the ring and select "Voice control".
Activate voice recognition.
Select "Tutorial".
Initiation of voice commands
Voice recognition
The phrases to be spoken according to the context are indicated in
the tables below.
Speak and PEUGEOT Connect Media Navigation (NG4 3D) acts.
Pressing the end of the lighting
control stalk activates voice
recognition.
CONTEXT
SAY
ACTION
GENERAL
Help address book
Help voice control
Help media
Help navigation
Help telephone
Help radio
Cancel
Correction
Access to the address book help
Access to the voice recognition help
Access to the media management help
Access to the guidance, navigation help
Access to the telephone help
Access to the radio help
To cancel a voice command which is in progress
Request to correct the last voice recognition
carried out
Request to correct the last voice recognition
carried out
Request to correct the last voice recognition
Clear
RADIO
Select station
Station <tts:stationName>
Read out station list
Enter frequency
Select wave band
AM
FM
TA on
TA off
Select a radio station
Select a radio station using its RDS
description <tts:station Name> from the
RADIO list
Listen to the list of stations available
Listen to the frequency of the current radio
station
Choose the frequency waveband (AM or FM)
Change the frequency waveband to AM
Change the frequency waveband to FM
Activate Traffi c Info (TA)
Deactivate Traffi c Info
NAVIGATION
Destination input
Voice advice off
Voice advice on
Save address
Start guidance
Abort guidance
Navigate entry
POI Search
Command to enter a new destination
address
Deactivate the spoken guidance instructions
Activate the spoken guidance instructions
Save an address in the address book
Start guidance (once the address has been
entered)
Stop the guidance
Start guidance to an entry in the address
book
Start guidance to a point of interest
VOICE COMMANDS AND STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS
273
02
Initiation of voice commands
Voice recognition
VOICE COMMANDS AND STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS
CONTEXT
SAY
ACTION
MEDIA
Media
Select media
Single slot
Jukebox
USB
External device
SD-Card
Track <1 - 1000>
Folder <1 - 1000>
Select the MEDIA source
Choose a source
Select the CD player source
Select the Jukebox source
Select the USB player source
Select the audio AUX input source
Select the SD card source
Select a specifi c track (number between
1 and 1 000) on the active MEDIUM
Select a Folder (number between 1 and
1 000) on the active MEDIUM
TELEPHONE
Phone menu
Enter number
Phone book
Dial
Save number
Accept
Reject
Open the Telephone Menu
Enter a telephone number to be called
Open the phone book
Make a call
Save a number in the phone book
Accept an incoming call
Reject an incoming call
ADDRESS
BOOK
Address book menu
Call <entry>
Navigate <entry>
Open the address book
Call fi le using its <fi le> description as
described in the address book
Start guidance to an address in the address
book using its <fi le> description
274
02
VOICE COMMANDS AND STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS
Steering mounted controls
Wiper stalk: display "RADIO" and "MEDIA".
Lighting stalk: activate voice commands with a short press; indication of the
current navigation instruction with a long press
Change audio source.
Start a call from the contacts list
Call/hang up the telephone.
Confi rm a selection.
Press for more than 2 seconds:
telephone menu.
Radio: automatic search for a lower frequency.
CD / SD CARD / JUKEBOX: select the previous track.
CD / SD CARD / JUKEBOX: continuous press: fast
backwards.
Radio: select the previous/next pre-set
station.
CD audio: select the previous/next track
If "MEDIA" is displayed in the screen:
MP3 CD / SD CARD / JUKEBOX: select the
previous/next folder.
Select the previous/next item in the contacts
list.
Radio: automatic search for a higher frequency.
CD / SD CARD / JUKEBOX: select the next track.
CD / SD CARD / JUKEBOX: continuous press: fast
forwards.
Volume increase.
Volume decrease.
Mute: press the volume
increase and decrease
buttons simultaneously.
The sound is restored by
pressing one of the two
volume buttons.
275
03
SETUP
TRAFFIC
MEDIA
GENERAL OPERATION
For a detailed global view of the menus available, refer to the
"Screen menu map" section of this handbook.
Press the MODE button several times in succession to gain access to the following displays:
Long press: access to the GPS coverage and to the demonstration
mode.
For maintenance of the screen, the use of a soft, non-abrasive cloth
(spectacles cloth) is recommended, without any additional product.
RADIO
/
/
/ /
MUSIC
MEDIA / VIDEO
TELEPHONE
(If a conversation is in progress)
FULL SCREEN MAP
NAVIGATION
(If guidance is in
progress)
SETUP:
access to the "SETUP" Menu: system language *
and voice functions * , voice initialisation (section 09),
date and time * , display, unit and system parameters.
TRAFFIC:
access to the Traffi c Menu: display of the current
traffi c alerts.
Contextual display
MEDIA:
"DVD-audio" menu
"DVD-Video" menu
* Available according to model.
276
03
GENERAL OPERATION
Pressing OK gives access to short-cut
menus according to the display on the
screen.
Contextual display
NAVIGATION (IF GUIDANCE IS IN
PROGRESS):
Abort guidance
1
1
1
Repeat advice
Block road
2
2
Unblock
More
2
Less
3
3
Route type
Avoid
3
Satellites
2
2
Calculate
Zoom/Scroll
2
Browse route
1
Route info
2
2
Show destination
Trip info
3
Stopovers
2
2
Browse route
Zoom/Scroll
1
1
Voice advice
Route options
2
2
Route type
Route dynamics
2
Avoidance criteria
2
Recalculate
TELEPHONE:
End call
1
1
1
1
Hold call
Dial
DTMF-Tones
1
Private mode
1
Micro off
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS:
TA
1
1
Play options
1
Select media
2
2
Normal order
Random track
2
Scan
277
03
GENERAL OPERATION
Contextual display
RADIO:
In FM mode
1
2
2
TA
RDS
2
Radiotext
2
Regional prog.
FULL SCREEN MAP:
Abort guidance / Resume guidance
1
1
1
1
Set destination / Add stopover
POIs nearby
Position info
2
Options
3
3
Navigate to
Dial
3
Save position
3
Zoom/Scroll
Map Settings
1
1
Zoom/Scroll
2
2
2D Map
2.5D Map
2
3D Map
2
North Up
2
Heading Up
AUDIO DVD (LONG PRESS):
1
Stop
2
Group
3
Group 1 .2/n
TA
1
2
Select media
2
Play options
3
Normal order / Random track / Scan
2
AM
In AM mode
1
2
2
TA
Refresh AM list
2
FM
278
03
3
3
DVD menu
DVD top menu
3
List of titles
3
List of chapters
VIDEO DVD (LONG PRESS):
Play
1
GENERAL OPERATION
Contextual display
2
2
Stop
DVD menus
3
3
Audio
Subtitles
3
Angle
2
DVD Options
Examples:
279
-
the map setting which allows the map to be displayed fl at, in perspective or in 3D.
-
confi guration of the system by means of voice commands.
Map in 3D
Flat map
Map in perspective
P
EUGEOT
Connect Media IS:
280
04
NAV
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Selecting a destination
Press the NAV button again or select
the Navigation Menu function and
press OK to confi rm.
Select the "Destination input"
function and press OK to confi rm.
Press the NAV button.
Select the letters of the town one
by one confi rming each time by
pressing OK.
Once the country has been selected,
turn the ring and select the town
function. Press OK to confi rm.
Navigation Menu
Navigation Menu
Destination input
Destination input
A pre-set list (by entering the fi rst few letters) of the towns in the
country selected can be accessed via the LIST button on the virtual
keypad.
Select the "Address input" function
and press OK to confi rm.
Address input
Address input
The list of the last 20 destinations appears under the Navigation
Menu function.
The "NAVIGATION" voice commands are listed in section 02.
During guidance, a long press on the end of the lighting stalk repeats the
last guidance instruction.
281
04
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
Repeat steps 5 to 7 for the "Street"
and "House number" functions.
To delete a destination; from steps 1 to 3, select "Choose from last
destinations".
A long press on one of the destinations displays a list of actions
from which you can select:
Select the "Save to address book" function to record the address
entered in a directory fi le. Press OK to confi rm the selection.
The PEUGEOT Connect Media allows more than 4 000 contact
records to be saved.
To speed up the process, the post code can be entered directly
after selecting the "Postal code" function.
Use the virtual keypad to enter the letters and digits.
Select the route type:
"Fast route", "Short route", or
"Optimized route" and press OK to
confi rm.
Then select "Start route guidance"
and the press OK to confi rm.
It is also possible to select a destination via "Choose from address
book" or "Choose from last destinations", by selecting a junction, a
town centre, geographic coordinates, or directly on the "Map".
Choose from address book
Choose from last destinations
Start route guidance
Start route guidance
It is possible to scroll the map using the 4-direction navigator. It is possible
to select its orientation via the short-cut menu of the "Full screen map".
Press OK then select "Map Settings" and confi rm.
Select the road with the colour
corresponding to the route chosen
and press OK to confi rm and start
guidance.
Turn the ring and select OK.
Press OK to confi rm.
Delete entry
Delete entry
Delete list
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
282
04
NAV
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Setting and navigating to my "Home
address"
Press the NAV button twice to display
the Navigation Menu.
To be set as the "Home address", an address must fi rst be
entered in the address book, for example from "Destination
input" / "Address input" then "Save to address book".
Select "Destination input" and confi rm.
Then select "Choose from address
book" and confi rm.
Select "Set as Home address" and
confi rm to save.
Select your home address and confi rm.
Then select "Edit entry" and confi rm.
To start navigation towards "Home", press NAV twice to display the
Navigation Menu, select "Destination input" and confi rm.
Then select "Navigate HOME" and confi rm to start guidance.
Navigation Menu
Destination input
Edit entry
Set as home address
283
04
NAV
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Route options
Select the "Route dynamics"
function.
This function provides access to
the "Traffi c independent", "Semi-
dynamic" and "Dynamic" options.
Select the "Avoidance criteria"
function. This function provides
access to the "Avoid" options
(motorways, toll roads, ferries,
tunnels).
Turn the ring and select the
"Recalculate" function to take into
account the route options selected.
Press OK to confi rm.
Press the NAV button.
Press the NAV button again or select
the Navigation Menu function and
press OK to confi rm.
Select the "Route type" function and
press OK to confi rm. This function
allows you to change the route type.
Select the "Route options" function
and press OK to confi rm.
Navigation Menu
Navigation Menu
Route options
Route options
Route type
Route type
Route dynamics
Route dynamics
Avoidance criteria
Recalculate
When the map is displayed on the screen, you can select "Map Settings"
then "2D Map / 2.5D Map / 3D Map / North Up / Heading Up". The display
of buildings in 3D mode depends on the progress in town mapping.
284
04
NAV
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
Adding a stopover
Enter a new address, for example.
Once the new address has
been entered, select "Start route
guidance" and press OK to confi rm.
Position the stopover on the list and
press OK to confi rm.
Press the NAV button.
Press the NAV button again or select
the "Navigation" Menu function and
press OK to confi rm.
Select the "Add stopover" function
(5 stopovers maximum) and press
OK to confi rm.
Select the "Stopovers" function and
press OK to confi rm.
"Navigation" Menu
"Navigation" Menu
Stopovers
Stopovers
Add stopover
Add stopover
Address input
Address input
To change the stopovers, repeat operations 1 to 3 and select
"Rearrange route" (select a stopover, delete it or move it on the
list using the ring to change the order, confi rm its new position and
fi nish with "Recalculate").
Stopovers can be added to or deleted from the route once the destination
has been selected.
Repeat operations 1 to 7 as many times as necessary then select
"Recalculate" and press OK to confi rm.
Start route guidance
Start route guidance
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
285
04
NAV
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Searching for points of interest (POI)
Press the NAV button.
Press the NAV button again or select
the Navigation Menu function and
press OK to confi rm.
Select the "POI nearby" function to
search for POIs around the vehicle.
Select the "POI search" function and
press OK to confi rm.
Navigation Menu
Navigation Menu
POI search
POI nearby
POI nearby
Select the "POI in city" function to
search for POIs in the city required.
Select the country then enter the
name of the city using the virtual
keypad.
Select the "POI near route" function
to search for POIs near the route.
Select the "POI in country" function
to search for POIs in the country
required.
Select the "POI near destination"
function to search for POIs near the
point of arrival of the route.
POI near destination
POI in country
POI in country
POI near route
A list of cities present in the country selected can be accessed via
the LIST button on the virtual keypad.
POI in city
POI in city
The points of interest (POIs) indicate all of the service locations in the
vicinity (hotels, various businesses, airports...).
286
04
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
List of principal points of interest (POI)
* According to availability in the country.
This icon appears when several POIs are grouped
together in the same area. Zooming in on this icon
shows details of the POIs.
Service station
LPG station
Garage
PEUGEOT
Motor racing circuit
Covered car park
Car park
Rest area
Hotel
Restaurant
Refreshment area
Picnic area
Cafeteria
Railway station
Bus station
Port
Industrial estate
Supermarket
Bank
Vending machine
Tennis court
Swimming pool
Golf course
Winter sports resort
Theatre
Airport
Theme parks
Hospital
Pharmacy
Police station
School
Post offi ce
Museum
Tourist information
Risk area *
Cinema
287
04
NAV
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Download the "POIs" update fi le onto an SD
card or USB memory stick from the Internet.
This service is available at
http://peugeot.navigation.com.
Updating POIs
Settings
The fi les must be copied to the root on the chosen medium.
Insert the medium (SD card or USB memory
stick) containing the POI database into the
system's SD card reader or USB port.
Select the medium ("USB" or
"SD-Card") used and press OK.
Press NAV, select Navigation Menu,
then "Settings", then "Update personal
POI".
Successful downloading is confi rmed by a message.
The system restarts.
The POIs version can be found in the SETUP \ System menu.
Update personal POI
Update personal POI
Navigation Menu
Navigation Menu
288
NAV
04
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MN
O
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MN
O
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MN
O
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Spoken instruction settings
Press the NAV button.
Press the NAV button again or select
the Navigation Menu function and
press OK to confi rm.
Select the "Settings" function and
press OK to confi rm.
Navigation Menu
Navigation Menu
Settings
When the navigation is displayed in
the screen, press OK then select or
deselect "Voice advice" to activate
or deactivate the spoken guidance
instructions.
Use the volume button to adjust the
volume.
Point of interest and risk area settings
The volume of the Risk Areas POIs alert can only be adjusted
during this type of alert.
POI categories on Map
POI categories on Map
Set parameters for risk areas
Set parameters for risk areas
Select "Set parameters for risk areas"
to gain access to the "Display on
map", "Visual alert" and "Sound alert"
functions.
Select the "POI categories on Map"
function to select the POIs to be
displayed on the map by default.
289
05
TRAFFIC
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
TRAFFIC INFORMATION
Configure the filtering and display of
TMC messages
When all of the messages on the route are selected, the addition
of a geographic fi lter is recommended (within a radius of 3 miles
(5 km) for example) to reduce the number of messages displayed
on the map. The geographic fi lter follows the movement of the
vehicle.
The fi lters are independent and their results are concealed.
We recommend:
- a fi lter over 6 miles (10 km) around the vehicle in heavy traffi c,
- a fi lter over 30 miles (50 km) around the vehicle or a fi lter on
the route on motorway journeys.
Press the TRAFFIC button again or
select the Traffi c Menu function and
press OK to confi rm.
Select "Geo. Filter".
The list of TMC messages appears under the Traffi c Menu sorted
in order of proximity.
Select the fi lter of your choice:
Messages on route
Messages on route
All warning messages
All warning messages
Only warnings on route
Only warnings on route
All messages
All messages
Traffi c Menu
Select "Select preferred list" and
press OK to confi rm.
The TMC (Traffi c Message Channel) messages provide information
relating to traffi c and weather conditions, received in real time and
transmitted to the driver audibly and visually on the navigation map.
The guidance system can then suggest an alternative route.
Press the TRAFFIC button.
Geo. Filter
290
05
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
TRAFFIC INFORMATION
Principal TMC symbols
Red and yellow triangle: traffi c information, for example:
Black and blue triangle: general information, for example:
Weather reports
Modifi ed signage
Risk of explosion
Traffi c reports
Narrow carriageway
Road closed
Wind
Slippery surface
Demonstration
Fog
Accident
Danger
Parking
Delay
No entry
Snow / ice
Roadworks
Traffi c jam
With the current audio source
displayed on the screen, press the
dial.
The shortcut menu for the source appears and gives access to:
Select Traffi c Announcements (TA)
and press the dial to confi rm and go
to the associated settings.
TA
The TA (Traffi c Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert
messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a
radio station transmitting this type of message. When a traffi c
report is transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, ...) is
interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback
of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of the
message.
Receiving TA messages
- the station transmits TA messages.
- the station does not transmit TA messages.
- TA messages are not activated.
291
06
RADIO
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
RADIO
NAV TRAFFIC
MEDIA
RADIO
NAV TRAFFIC
MEDIA
Selecting a station
When the current radio station is
displayed on the screen, press OK.
The radio source short-cuts menu appears and provides access to
the following short-cuts:
Select the function required and
press OK to confi rm to gain access
to the corresponding settings.
TA
RDS, if displayed, allows you to continue listening to the same
station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However,
in certain conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be
assured throughout the country as radio stations do not cover
100 % of the territory. This explains the loss of reception of the
station during a journey.
The external environment (hill, building, tunnel, underground car park...)
may interfere with the reception, including in RDS following mode. This
phenomenon is a normal result of the way in which radio waves are
transmitted and does not in any way indicate a failure of the audio equipment.
RDS - Regional mode
Press the RADIO button to display the
list of stations received locally sorted
in alphabetical order.
Press one of the buttons on the numeric keypad for more than
2 seconds to store the current station. A bleep confi rms that it has
been stored.
Press the button on the numeric keypad to recall the stored radio
station.
RDS
Radiotext
Regional prog.
Regional prog.
RADIO
When the "RADIO" screen is displayed, turn the
ring or use the 4-direction navigator to select the
previous or next station on the list.
While listening to the radio, press buttons
and
for the automatic search for a lower or higher
frequency.
Select the station required by turning
the ring and press to confi rm.
AM
292
07
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
CD, MP3 / WMA CD, MP3 / WMA SD card /
USB player
In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when
recording it is preferable to select the ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or Joliet
standard.
If the disc is recorded in another format it may not be played
correctly.
It is recommended that the same recording standard is always
used for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible
(4x maximum) for optimum sound quality.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is
recommended.
The audio equipment will only play audio fi les with the extension
".mp3" with a speed of between 8 Kbps and 320 Kbps and the
extension ".wma" with a speed of between 5 Kbps and 384 Kbps.
It also supports the VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
No other type of fi le (.mp4, .m3u...) can be played.
The MP3 format, an abbreviation of MPEG 1, 2 & 2.5 Audio Layer 3
and the WMA format, an abbreviation of Windows Media Audio and
the property of Microsoft, are audio compression standards which
permit the recording of several tens of music fi les on a single disc.
Connecting an iPod:
To play MP3 type fi les, connect the iPod using the USB port (limited
functions).
To play ITunes fi les, connect the iPod using the auxiliary socket
(AUX).
In order to be read, a USB memory stick must be formatted to
FAT 32.
It is advisable to restrict fi le names to 20 characters, without using
of special characters (e.g.: " " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing and
displaying problems.
During play, exit the "SD-Card" or "USB" source before removing
the SD card or the USB memory stick from its port.
To avoid any risk of theft, remove the SD card or the USB memory
stick when you leave your vehicle with the roof open.
Information and advice
293
07
MEDIA
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIOMEDIA
NAV ESC TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
RADIO
NAV TRAFFIC
MEDIA
Selecting / Playing
CD, MP3 / WMA CD, MP3 / WMA SD card /
USB player
The playing and displaying of an MP3/WMA compilation may
depend on the recording programme and/or the parameters used.
We recommend the ISO 9660 recording standard.
Press the MEDIA button.
Select the "Select media" function
and press OK to confi rm.
Press this button.
Select the music source required.
Press OK to confi rm. Play begins.
Select media
Press the MEDIA button again or
select the "Media" Menu function and
press OK to confi rm.
When the "MEDIA" screen is
displayed, turn the ring up or down to
select the previous or next compatible
source.
"Media" Menu
The list of tracks or MP3/WMA fi les appears under "Media" Menu.
Insert the audio or MP3 CD in the
player, the SD card in the card
reader or the USB peripheral
in the USB port. Play begins
automatically.
MP3 CDs, SD cards or USB peripherals are the compatible sources.
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
294
07
MEDIA
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIOMEDIA
NAV ESC TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
RADIO
NAV TRAFFIC
MEDIA
Select "Jukebox management" then
"Add fi les" and press OK at each step
to confi rm.
Press the MEDIA button. Press the
MEDIA button again or select Media
Menu and press OK to confi rm.
Insert an audio / MP3 CD, a USB
memory stick or an SD card.
Jukebox
Add fi les
Check that the active MEDIA source is that of the medium used
(CD, USB or SD card).
Select "Add fi les from MP3-Disc" for
example and press OK to validate.
Select the tracks required then "Rip
selection" or select all of the tracks using
"Rip all".
Select "[New folder]" to create a new
folder or select an existing folder
(created previously).
Add fi les from MP3-Disc
[New folder]
"Do you want to change the names of
the tracks that will be ripped?": select
"Yes" to change them or "No".
To copy an MP3 CD, then select "Real
time ripping", "Fast ripping" / "High
quality (192 kbit/sec)" or "Standard
quality (128 kbit/sec)" then select "Start
ripping".
Confi rm the warning message by
pressing "OK" to start the copy.
OK
Yes
No
When copying is in progress, switching off the ignition will interrupt the
process but it will resume directly when the ignition is switched on again.
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
Copying a CD, a USB memory stick or an SD card to
the hard disk
295
07
MEDIA
MEDIA
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
RADIO
NAV TRAFFIC
MEDIA
RADIO
NAV TRAFFIC
MEDIA
Press the MEDIA button.
Press the MEDIA button again or
select Media Menu and press OK to
confi rm.
Select "Jukebox management" and
press OK to confi rm.
Select "Play options" and press OK to
confi rm.
Select "Folders & Files" or "Playlists"
then press OK to confi rm.
Playing the jukebox
Jukebox management
Jukebox management
Press the MEDIA button.
Press the MEDIA button again or
select Media Menu and press OK to
confi rm.
Select "Jukebox management" and
press OK to confi rm.
Jukebox
Renaming or deleting an album
Activate the playing of a source other than the Jukebox (CD,
radio, etc...).
Check that the active source is not the Jukebox in order to be able
to rename or delete a track / folder.
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
Select "Modify content" and press
OK confi rm.
Press the ESC button to return to the fi rst fi le level.
Playlists can be created in the Jukebox.
Media Menu> Jukebox management> Create new playlist. Add the
tracks required one by one then save the change. The "Playlists"
play mode must then be selected.
Modify content
Modify content
296
07
MEDIA
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIOMEDIA
NAV ESC TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
MEDIA
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
RADIO
NAV TRAFFIC
MEDIA
RADIO
NAV TRAFFIC
MEDIA
Connect the portable device (MP3 player, camcorder, camera…) to
the RCA sockets (white and red for audio; yellow for video) in the
glove box using a JACK/RCA audio cable.
Press the MEDIA button then press
it again or select the Media Menu
function and press OK to confi rm.
Select the AUX music source and
press OK to confi rm. Play begins
automatically.
Select "Select media" then "External
device (AV)" and press OK to
activate it.
External device
The display and management of the controls is via the portable
device.
Using an external device (AUX)
If the external input is not activated, select "Ext. Device (Aux)
management" to activate it.
Viewing a video DVD
Select the video source required ("DVD-Video", "External device (AV)").
Press OK to confi rm. Play begins.
Press the MEDIA button to gain
access to the DVD menu at any time,
or to the functions of the Media Menu
which adjust the video (brightness/
contrast, image format...).
If the DVD does not appear on the
screen, press the MODE button to
gain access to the "MEDIA" screen
which displays the DVD screen.
Insert the DVD in the player. Play begins
automatically.
The 4-direction navigator and the chromed ring allow you to move
the DVD selection cursor. Change chapter by pressing the
or
button.
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
Audio / Video / RCA cable not supplied
297
08
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
Choosing between the bluetooth
telephone / internal telephone
To activate the Bluetooth telephone
or the internal telephone, press PICK
UP.
USING THE TELEPHONE
Select Phone menu, then "Select
phone" then choose between
"Telephone off", "Use Bluetooth
phone" or "Use internal phone". Press
OK at each step to confi rm.
The system can only be connected to one Bluetooth telephone and
one SIM card (Internal telephone) at the same time.
In this case, the phone book is synchronised with the Bluetooth
telephone.
298
08
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
* The services available via the telephone depend on the network, the SIM
card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth equipment used. Refer to your
telephone's manual and your operator to check which services you have
access to.
USING THE TELEPHONE
Pairing a bluetooth telephone
First connection
For safety reasons and because they require prolonged attention
on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Bluetooth
mobile telephone to the hands-free system of the PEUGEOT
Connect Media Navigation (NG4 3D) must be carried out with the
vehicle stationary and the ignition on.
Visit www.peugeot.co.uk for more information (compatibility, more
help, ...).
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function and
ensure that it is "visible to all" (refer to the telephone
instructions).
If no telephone has been paired, the
system prompts you to "Connect
phone". Select "Yes" and press OK to
confi rm.
Enter the authentication code on the
telephone. The code to be entered
is displayed on the screen of the
system.
To pair another telephone, press the
TEL button, then select Phone menu,
then "Select phone" then "Connect
Bluetooth phone" then select the
telephone required.
Press OK at each step to confi rm.
Once the telephone has been connected, the PEUGEOT Connect
Media Navigation (NG4 3D) can synchronise the address book and
the call list. This synchronisation may take a few minutes * .
Pairing can be started from the telephone (refer to the telephone
instructions).
Press the CALL button.
Select "Search phone" and press OK
to confi rm. Then select the name of
the telephone.
Search phone
Search phone
To delete a pairing, press TEL, select "Connect phone" then "Delete
pairing".
299
08
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MN
O
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
* The services available via the telephone depend on the network, the
SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth equipment used. Refer to
your telephone's manual and your operator to check which services you
have access to. A list of mobile telephones which offer the best range of
services is available from dealers.
USING THE TELEPHONE
Connecting a bluetooth telephone
For safety reasons and because they require prolonged attention
on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Bluetooth
mobile telephone to the hands-free system of the PEUGEOT
Connect Media Navigation (NG4 3D) must be carried out with the
vehicle stationary and the ignition on.
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function and
ensure that it is visible to all.
Once the telephone has been connected, the PEUGEOT Connect
Media Navigation (NG4 3D) can synchronise the address book and
the call list. This synchronisation may take a few minutes * .
Press the PICK UP button.
The list of telephones connected previously (4 maximum) appears
in the multifunction screen. Select the telephone required then
select "Connect phone" for a new connection. Select "Delete
pairing" to cancel the connection to the telephone.
300
08
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
NAV TRAFFIC
ADDR
BOOK
SETUP
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
Extract the holder by pressing the eject button.
Install the SIM card in the holder
and then insert it in the slot.
To remove the SIM card, repeat step 1.
For safety reasons and because they require prolonged attention
on the part of the driver, the SIM card installation operations must
be carried out when stationary.
Enter the PIN code on the keypad
then select OK and confi rm.
The system asks "Do you want
to switch to the internal phone?",
select "Yes" if you wish to use your
SIM card for your personal calls.
Otherwise, only the emergency call
and the services will use the SIM
card.
Remember PIN
When entering your PIN code, tick the "Remember PIN" tab to
allow use of the telephone without having to enter this code when it
is used subsequently.
Using the internal telephone with a SIM
card
USING THE TELEPHONE
Once the SIM card has been installed, the system can synchronise
the address book and the call list.
This synchronisation may take a few minutes.
If you have declined to use the internal telephone for personal calls, you
can still connect a Bluetooth telephone to receive your calls on the vehicle's
audio system.
301
08
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXYZ
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
4
GHI
6
MNO
8
TUV
7
PQRS
9
WXY
Z
0
*
#
1
RADIO MEDIA
NAV TRAFFIC
SETUP
ADDR
BOOK
Press the end of the steering mounted control to
accept the call or end the call in progress.
Select the "Yes" tab to accept or "No"
to refuse and confi rm by pressing
OK.
Receiving a call
Making a call
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed
display in the screen.
To hang up, press the HANG UP
button or press OK and select "End
call" then confi rm by pressing OK.
End call
Press the PICK UP button.
It is also possible to select a number from the address book. You
can select "Dial from address book". The PEUGEOT Connect
Media can record up to 4 096 entries.
Select "Dial number", then dial the
telephone number using the virtual
keypad.
Select the Phone menu function and
press OK to confi rm.
Dial number
Phone menu
The list of the last 20 calls made and received in the vehicle
appears under Phone menu. You can select a number and press
OK to make the call.
Yes
No
The PICK UP button accepts, the HANG UP button rejects the
incoming call.
USING THE TELEPHONE
It is always possible to start a call directly from the
telephone; park the vehicle as a safety measure.
Operating the telephone while driving is prohibited. It is recommended
that you park safely or use in preference the steering mounted controls.
Press the end of the steering mounted control for more than
two seconds to open the address book.
302
09
MEDIA
TRAFFIC
SCREEN MENU MAP(S)
MAIN FUNCTION
OPTION A
OPTION B...
option A1
option A2
1
2
3
2
3
"Traffic" Menu
Messages on route
Select preferred list
1
2
3
Deactivate PIN
4
Only warnings on route
3
All warning messages
3
All messages
3
Geo. Filter
3
Within 2 miles (3 km)
4
Within 3 miles (5 km)
4
Within 6 miles (10 km)
4
Within 30 miles (50 km)
4
On confi rmation
Read out settings
2
3
Incoming messages
3
TMC station information
2
"Media" Menu
Audio CD/MP3-Disc
/
Audio CD/MP3-Disc / Audio CD/MP3-Disc
DVD-Audio
/
DVD-Audio / DVD-Audio
DVD-Video
Select media
1
2
3
Jukebox (Folders & Files)
3
SD-Card
3
USB
3
External device (audio/AV)
3
Add fi les
Jukebox management
2
3
Folders & Files
4
Create folder
3
Modify content
3
Edit playlist
3
Play options
3
Playlists
4
Memory capacity
3
Refer to the "
Sound settings
"
menu details
of which are shown on the next page.
Sound settings
2
3
Aspect ratio
Video settings
2
3
Menu language
3
Display
3
Brightness
4
Contrast
4
Colour
4
303
NAV
RADIO
AUX standard
3
Reset video settings
3
Off/Audio/Audio and Video (AV)
Ext. Device (Aux) management
2
3
"Radio" Menu
Waveband
1
2
Manual tune
2
Refer to the "
Sound settings
" menu
below.
Sound settings
2
3
"Sound settings" Menu
Balance/Fader
1
2
Bass/Treble
2
Equalizer
2
Linear
3
Classic
3
Jazz
3
Rock/Pop
3
Techno
3
Vocal
3
Mute rear speakers
2
Loudness
2
Speed dependent volume
2
Reset sound settings
2
"Navigation" Menu
Abort guidance/Resume guidance
1
2
Destination input
2
Address input
3
Country
4
City
4
Street
4
House number
4
Start route guidance
4
Postal code
4
Save to address book
4
Intersection
4
City district
4
Geo position
4
Map
4
Navigate HOME
3
Choose from last destinations
3
Choose from address book
3
Stopovers
2
Add stopover
3
Address input
4
Navigate HOME
4
Choose from address book
4
Choose from last destinations
4
Rearrange route
3
Replace stopover
3
Delete stopover
3
FM
3
AM
3
304
ADDR
BOOK
Recalculate
3
Fast route
4
Short route
4
Optimized route
4
POI nearby
POI search
2
3
POI near destination
3
POI in city
3
POI in country
3
POI near route
3
Route type
Route options
2
3
POI near destination
4
Short route
4
Optimized route
4
Subscr. service
4
Route dynamics
Settings
2
3
Traffi c independent
4
Semi-dynamic
4
Dynamic
4
Avoidance criteria
3
Avoid motorways
4
Avoid toll roads
4
Avoid tunnels
4
Avoid ferries
4
Recalculate
3
"Address book" Menu
Create new entry
1
2
Show memory status
2
Export address book
2
Delete all voice entries
2
Delete all entries
2
Delete folder "My Addresses"
2
"Phone" menu
Dial number
1
2
Dial from address book
2
Call lists
2
Messages
2
Select phone
2
Search phone
4
Telephone off
3
Use Bluetooth phone
3
Use internal phone
3
Connect Bluetooth phone
3
Disconnect phone
5
Rename phone
5
Delete pairing
5
Delete all pairings
5
Show details
5
305
SETUP
Settings
2
Automatic answering system
3
Select ring tone
3
Phone/Ring tone volume
3
Enter mailbox number
3
Internal phone settings
3
Automatically accept call
3
Signal waiting call (?)
3
Show status
3
Activate waiting call
3
Deactivate waiting call
3
Call forward (?)
3
Show status
3
Activate call forward
3
Deactivate call forward
3
Suppress own number
3
Select network
3
Set network automatically
3
Set network manually
3
Search for networks
3
PIN settings
3
Change PIN
3
Activate PIN
4
Deactivate PIN
4
Remember PIN
3
SIM-card memory status
3
"SETUP" Menu
Menu language
Language & Speech
1
2
3
Deutsch
4
English
4
Español
4
Français
4
Italiano
4
Nederlands
4
Polski
4
Voice control
3
Voice control active
4
Tutorial
4
Portuguese
4
Basics
5
Examples
5
Tips
5
Speaker adaptation
4
New speaker adaptation
5
Delete speaker adaptation
5
Voice output volume
3
Date & Time
2
Set date & time
3
Date format
3
Time format
3
306
Display
2
Brightness
3
Colour
3
Steel
4
blue light (only in day mode)
4
Orange Ray
4
Blue Flame
4
Map colour
3
Day mode for map
4
Night mode for map
4
Auto. Day/Night for map
4
Units
2
Temperature
3
Celsius
4
Fahrenheit
4
Metric/Imperial
3
km
4
Miles
4
System
2
Factory reset
3
Software version
3
Automatic scrolling
3
307
The table below groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions concerning the PEUGEOT Connect Media Navigation (NG4 3D).
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION
ANSWER
SOLUTION
There is a difference in
sound quality between
the different audio
sources (radio, CD...).
For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treble,
Ambience, Loudness) can be adapted to the different sound sources,
which may result in audible differences when changing source (radio,
CD...).
Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass,
Treble, Ambience, Loudness) are adapted to
the sources listened to. It is advisable to set
the AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear
Balance, Left-Right Balance) to the middle
position, select the musical ambience "Linear" and
set the loudness correction to the "Active" position
in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio
mode.
The CD is ejected
automatically or is not
played by the player.
The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any
audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play.
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not
recognised by the audio equipment.
- Check that the CD is inserted in the player the
right way up.
- Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot
be played if it is too damaged.
- Check the content in the case of a recorded
CD: consult the advice in the "Audio" section.
- The audio equipment's CD player does not
play DVDs.
- Due to inadequate quality, certain recorded
CDs will not be played by the audio system.
The CD player sound is
poor.
The CD used is scratched or of poor quality.
Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable
conditions.
The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitable.
Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting
an ambience.
308
QUESTION
ANSWER
SOLUTION
The stored stations do
not function (no sound,
87.5 Mhz is displayed...).
An incorrect waveband is selected.
Press RADIO, select Radio Menu then
"Waveband" to return to the waveband on which
the stations are stored.
The quality of reception
of the radio station
listened to gradually
deteriorates or the stored
stations do not function
(no sound, 87.5 Mhz is
displayed...).
The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened
to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which
the vehicle is travelling.
Activate the "RDS" function by means of the
short-cut menu to enable the system to check
whether there is a more powerful transmitter in
the geographical area.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block
reception, including in RDS mode.
This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate
a failure of the audio equipment.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going
through a car wash or into an underground car park).
Have the aerial checked by a PEUGEOT dealer.
Sound cut-outs of 1 to
2 seconds in radio mode.
During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for any frequency
permitting better reception of the station.
Deactivate the "RDS" function by means of the
short-cut menu if the phenomenon is too frequent
and always on the same route.
With the engine off, the
system switches off after
a few minutes of use.
When the engine is switched off, the system's operating time depends on
the battery charge.
The switch-off is normal: the system switches to economy mode and
switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.
Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
charge.
309
QUESTION
ANSWER
SOLUTION
"TA" is selected.
However, certain traffi c
jams along the route are
not indicated in real time.
On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to receive the
traffi c information.
Wait until the traffi c information is being received
correctly (displaying of the traffi c information
symbols on the map).
In certain countries, only major routes (motorways...) are listed for the
traffi c information.
This phenomenon is normal. The system is
dependent on the traffi c information available.
The time taken to
calculate a route
sometimes seems longer
than usual.
The performance of the system may slow down temporarily if a CD/DVD
is being copied onto the Jukebox at the same time as a route is being
calculated.
Wait until the CD/DVD has been copied or stop
the copying before starting the guidance function.
The "Risk areas" audible
warning does not work.
The audible warning is not active.
Activate the audible warning on Navigation Menu,
Settings, Set parameters for risk areas.
The alert volume is set to minimum.
Increase the volume of the alert when passing a
"Risk area".
Does the emergency call
function work without a
SIM card?
No, as certain national regulations impose the presence of a SIM card in
order to make an emergency call.
Insert a valid SIM card in the slot.
The altitude is not
displayed.
On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes to
receive more than 4 satellites correctly.
Wait until the system has started up completely.
Check that there is a GPS coverage of at least
4 satellites (long press on the SETUP button, then
select "GPS coverage").
Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel...) or the weather,
the conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary.
This phenomenon is normal. The system is
dependent on the conditions of reception of the
GPS signal.
310
QUESTION
ANSWER
SOLUTION
The route calculation is
not successful.
The exclusion criteria may confl ict with the current location (exclusion of
toll roads on a toll motorway).
Check the exclusion criteria on the Navigation
Menu ("Route options" - "Avoidance criteria").
There is a long waiting
period following the
insertion of a CD.
When a new medium is inserted, the system reads a certain amount of
data (directory, title, artist, etc.). This may take a few seconds.
This phenomenon is normal.
I cannot connect my
Bluetooth telephone.
The telephone's Bluetooth function may be switched off or the equipment
may not be visible.
- Check that your telephone's Bluetooth
function is switched on.
- Check that your telephone is visible.
The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with the system.
A list of compatible Bluetooth mobile telephones is
available from the dealer network.
The volume of the
telephone connected
in Bluetooth mode is
inaudible.
The volume depends both on the system and on the telephone.
Increase the volume of the PEUGEOT Connect
Media Navigation (NG4 3D), to maximum
if required, and increase the volume of the
telephone if necessary.
The system does not play
the DVD.
The region protection may not be compatible.
Insert DVDs which have compatible region
protection.
I cannot copy the CD to
the Jukebox.
The wrong source is selected.
Change the active source to CD.
The CD is copy-protected.
It is normal that a protected CD cannot be copied.
311
QUESTION
ANSWER
SOLUTION
The system does not
receive SMS.
The Bluetooth mode does not permit sending of the SMS to the system.
Use your SIM card and the internal telephone.
The SIM card used is a twin card.
Use the original SIM card to receive the SMS.
I cannot update the risk
area POIs.
The Navigation Menu - "Update personal POI" is not displayed.
Check that the medium used for the update (SD
card or USB memory stick) is inserted correctly.
An error message is displayed at the end of the procedure.
- Start the procedure again in full.
- Consult a PEUGEOT dealer if the problem
persists.
- Check that the data on the MEDIUM is
supplied by an offi cial partner of PEUGEOT.
The voice frequencies
(DTMF) are not
active when I am
communicating and I
press numbers on the
keypad.
The numeric buttons on the keypad are only active for calls if the display
is in telephone mode.
To activate them, press the MODE button until the
telephone is displayed on the screen.
An risk area which
does not concern me is
displayed on the screen.
The risk areas are displayed near a point defi ned on the map and in
relation to a direction of travel.
The alert may be triggered when travelling under a
road or near a road which is a Risk area.
312
313
The system is protected in such a way that it will only
operate in your vehicle.
PEUGEOT C
onnect
N
onnect Nonnect
avigation
(RT6)
01 First steps - Control panel
For safety reasons, the driver must only carry out
operations which require prolonged attention while the
vehicle is stationary.
When the engine is switched off and to prevent
discharging of the battery, the system switches off
following the activation of the energy economy mode.
CONTENTS
02 Steering mounted controls
03 General operation
04 Navigation - Guidance
05 Traffic information
06 Using the telephone
07 Radio
08 Music media players
09 Audio settings
10 Configuration
11 Screen menu map
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
314
316
317
319
332
335
345
348
354
355
356
SATELLITE NAVIGATION SYSTEM
MULTIMEDIA BLUETOOTH
TELEPHONE AUDIO SYSTEM
Frequently asked questions
p.
360
314
01
Select:
- the next lower / higher radio
frequency automatically.
- the previous / next CD track, MP3
track or media.
- the left / right of the screen when a
menu is displayed.
Move left / right in "
Move the map
" mode.
Abandon the current
operation, up one level
in the menu.
Long press: return to
the permanent display.
Open the
"
Confi guration
" menu.
Long press: access
to the GPS coverage
and the navigation
demonstration mode.
Open the "
Traffi c
information
" menu
and display the current
traffi c alerts.
Select:
- the previous/next line in a list or menu.
- the previous / next media folder.
- step by step selection of the previous/
next radio frequency.
- the previous / next MP3 folder.
Move up/down, in "
Move the map
" mode.
FIRST STEPS
Access to the
"
Navigation - guidance
"
menu and display the
recent destinations.
Short press without the
engine running: on / off.
Short press with the engine
running: audio source off /
restore.
MODE
button: Selection
of the type of permanent
display.
Long press: black screen
(DARK).
Selection and confi rmation OK dial:
Selection of an item on the screen or in a list or a menu,
then confi rmation with a short press.
Other than for menus and lists, a short press displays a
contextual menu depending on the current screen.
Rotation with map displayed: zoom the map scale in and
out.
Volume adjustment (each
source is independent,
including TA messages and
navigation instructions).
315
01
Continuous press:
reinitialisation of the system.
Open the "
Telephone
" menu
and display the list of recent
calls or accept an incoming call.
FIRST STEPS
Short press: select pre-set radio station.
Long press: pre-set the current station.
Access to the "
MUSIC
" menu, and display of the CD/MP3/
Apple
®
tracks and folders.
®
tracks and folders.
®
Long press: display the audio settings screen for the
"
MEDIA
" (CD/USB/iPod/Streaming/AUX) sources.
Access to the "
RADIO
" menu and
display the list of stations received.
Long press: display the audio settings
screen for the radio tuner source.
316
02
RADIO: select the previous/next preset
station.
Select the next entry in the address book.
Select the next entry in the address book.
SRC/TEL
button:
change the audio source.
start a call from the address book.
call/end call on the telephone.
press for more than 2 seconds: access
to the address book.
RADIO: change to the previous radio
station in the list.
Long press: automatic search for a
lower frequency.
CD: select the previous track.
CD: continuous press: fast reverse.
RADIO: change to the next radio station in the list.
Long press: automatic search for a higher frequency.
CD: select the next track.
CD: continuous press: fast forward play.
Volume increase.
Volume increase.
Volume decrease.
Volume decrease.
Mute: press the volume
increase and decrease
buttons simultaneously.
Restore the sound by
pressing one of the two
volume buttons.
STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS
317
03
For the details of the menus, refer to the "Screen menu map"
section.
For cleaning the screen, the use of a soft, non-abrasive cloth
(spectacles cloth) is recommended, with no additional product.
"
RADIO
"
"
TELEPHONE
"
(If conversation in progress)
SETUP
: PARAMETERS
date and time, display confi guration, sound, vehicle
settings.
Changing the audio source:
RADIO
: RADIO broadcasts.
MUSIC
: playing MUSIC.
Press the
MODE
button several times in succession for access to the following displays:
"
FULL SCREEN MAP
"
"
MAP IN WINDOW
"
(If navigation guidance in
progress)
GENERAL OPERATION
318
03
A press on the knob gives access
to short-cut menus according to the
display in the screen.
Display according to context
RADIO:
Activate / Deactivate TA
Activate / Deactivate RDS
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS,
CD or USB (according to
media):
Play modes:
Normal
Random
Random on all media
Repetition
TELEPHONE (call in
progress):
Private mode
FULL SCREEN MAP OR IN A
NEW WINDOW:
Stop / Restore guidance
Select destination
Enter an address
Directory
GPS coordinates
Divert route
Move the map
Info. on location
Select as destination
Select as stage
Save this place (contacts)
Quit map mode
Guidance criteria
Put call on hold
DTMF ring tones
Hang up
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
Change waveband
FM
AM
2
2
1
TA
1
GENERAL OPERATION
319
04
List of recent destinations.
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
Navigation - guidance
Navigation - guidance
Navigation - guidance
Navigation - guidance
Navigation - guidance
Navigation - guidance
Navigation - guidance
Navigation - guidance
Navigation - guidance
Navigation - guidance
Navigation - guidance
Navigation - guidance
Navigation - guidance
Navigation - guidance
Navigation - guidance
Navigation - guidance
Navigation - guidance
Navigation - guidance
Navigation - guidance
Navigation - guidance
Navigation - guidance
Navigation - guidance
Navigation - guidance
Navigation - guidance
Navigation - guidance
Navigation - guidance
Navigation - guidance
Navigation - guidance
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
To delete the list of recent destinations, select "
Guidance
options
" in the navigation menu then select "
Delete last
destinations
" and confi rm. Select "
Yes
" and confi rm. Select " Yes " and confi rm. Select "
" then confi rm.
Deleting just one destination is not possible.
Go from the list to the menu (left/right).
"
Select destination
"
"
Journey leg and route
"
"
Guidance options
"
"
Map management
"
"
Stop / Restore guidance
"
Press
NAV
.
or
To make full use of all of the
functions of your navigation
system, update the mapping
regularly. Contact a
PEUGEOT dealer or order
your mapping update at
http://peugeot.navigation.com
A short press on the end of the
lighting control stalk repeats
the last navigation message.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Access to the "Navigation" menu
320
04
Press
NAV
to display the
"
Navigation - guidance
" menu.
Towards a new destination
Selecting a destination
Select "
Select destination
" and
confi rm, then select "
Enter an address
"
and confi rm.
Select the "
Country
" function then
confi rm.
Select the "
Town
" or "
Post code
"
function then confi rm.
Select the letters in the name of the
town or the characters in a post code
one at a time, confi rming each one with
the knob.
Selection the town from the list offered,
then confi rm
A pre-set list (by entering the fi rst few
letters) of the towns in the country selected
can be accessed directly by selecting and
confi rming "
List
" in the screen.
List " in the screen. List
If possible, enter the "
Road
" and "
N°/X
"
information in the same way.
Select "
Archive
" to save the address entered in a contact fi le.
The system allows up to 400 contact fi les to be recorded.
Confi rm "
OK
" to start guidance.
Select the guidance criteria: "
Fastest
route
", "
Shortest route
" or optimised
"
Distance/Time
", then select the
desired restriction criteria: "
With tolls
",
"
With Ferry
", or "
Traffi c info
" then
confi rm "
OK
".
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
321
04
Towards a recent destination
Press
NAV
to display the
"
Navigation - guidance
" menu.
Select the desired destination and
confi rm to start guidance.
Towards a contact in the contacts directory
Select "
Select destination
" and
confi rm, then select "
Directory
" and
confi rm.
Selection the desired destination from
your contacts and confi rm "
OK
" to start
the guidance.
Press
NAV
to display the
"
Navigation - guidance
" menu.
Navigation towards a contact is only possible if it has an address
entered in the audio navigation system.
Delete recent destinations
Press
NAV
to display the
"
Navigation - guidance
" menu.
Select "
Options
" and confi rm and then
"
Delete recent destinations
" and
confi rm.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
322
04
Select "
Select destination
" and
confi rm, then select "
GPS coordinates
"
and confi rm.
Enter the GPS coordinates and confi rm
"
OK
" to start the guidance.
Press
NAV
to display the
"
Navigation - guidance
" menu.
Towards GPS coordinates
Towards a point on the map
With the map displayed, press
OK
to
display the contextual menu. Select
"
Move the map
" and confi rm.
Press
OK
to display the contextual
menu for "
Move the map
" mode.
Select "
Select as destination
" or
"
Select as stage
" and confi rm.
Move the cursor using the control to
identify the desired destination.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
323
04
Towards points of interest (POI)
The points of interest (POI) indicate all of the service locations in the vicinity
(hotels, various businesses, airports...).
Select the "
Enter an address
" function
and confi rm, then select
Select
destination
and confi rm.
To select a POI close to your current
location, select "
POI
" and confi rm, then
select "
Around the current place
" and
confi rm.
To select a POI as a stage on the route,
select "
POI
" and confi rm, then select "
On
the route
" and confi rm.
To select a POI as a destination, fi rst
enter the country and town (see "Towards
a new destination"), select "
POI
" and
confi rm, fi nally select "
Near
" and confi rm.
Near " and confi rm. Near
Search for POIs in the categories
suggested in the following pages.
Select "
Search by Name
" to search for POIs by name and not by
proximity.
Select the POI and confi rm "
OK
" to start
the guidance.
Press
NAV
to display the
"
Navigation - guidance
" menu.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
324
04
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
This icon appears when several POIs are grouped
together in the same area. Zooming in on this icon
shows details of the POIs.
Service station
Garage
PEUGEOT
Covered car park
Car park
Rest area
Hotel
Restaurant
Cafeteria
Bed and breakfast
Railway station
Bus station
Port
Industrial estate
Supermarket
Vending machine
Sports complex, sports centre,
sports ground
Swimming pool
Winter sports resort
Airport
Theme parks
Hospital, Chemist, Vet
Police station
Town hall
Post offi ce
Museum, Culture, Theatre,
Historic monument
Tourist information, Tourist
attraction
Risk areas / Danger areas *
List of principal points of interest (POI)
*
According to availability in the country.
School
An annual mapping update allows new points of interest to be presented to you.
You can also update the Risk areas / Danger areas every month.
The detailed procedure is available on:
http://peugeot.navigation.com.
Cinema
325
04
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Select:
- "Visual alert"
- "Audible alert"
- "Alert only in guidance"
- "Overspeed alarm only".
The choice of time of notifi cation defi nes
how long in advance that Risk area
warnings are given.
Select "
OK
" to confi rm the screen.
Select "
Guidance options
" and confi rm,
then select "
Set parameters for risk
areas
" and confi rm.
These functions are only available if risk areas have been
downloaded and installed on the system.
The detailed procedure for updating risk area POIs can be found at
http://peugeot.navigation.com.
Press
NAV
to display the "
Navigation -
guidance
" menu.
Settings for risk area / danger area alerts
326
04
Adding a stage
Press
NAV
to display the
"
Navigation - guidance
" menu.
Select "
Journey leg and route
" then
confi rm.
Select "
Close to
" a route passing
close to the stage or "
Strict
" for a route
passing through the stage.
Confi rm "
OK
" to start the guidance, and
give a general indication of the guidance
route.
Select "
Add a stage
" then confi rm.
The address of the stage is entered as
a destination, by "
Enter an address
",
a contact in "
Directory
", or "
Previous
destinations
".
Organising stages
To organise stages, carry out
operations 1 to 2 again, then select
"
Order/delete journey legs
" and
confi rm.
Select and confi rm to save the
modifi cations.
Select the stage that you want to move
in the order.
Select "
Delete
" to delete the stage.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
327
04
Route options
Calculation criteria
Select "
Guidance options
" and confi rm.
Select "
OK
" and confi rm to save the
modifi cations.
Select "
Defi ne calculation criteria
" and
confi rm.
This function allows modifi cation of:
- the guidance criteria: ("
Fastest
route
", "
Shortest route
",
"
Distance/Time
"),
- the exclusion criteria: ("
With tolls
"
or "
With Ferry
"),
- traffi c avoidance: ("
Traffi c info
").
Press
NAV
to display the
"
Navigation - guidance
" menu.
If traffi c avoidance (Traffi c info) is selected, the system suggests
an alternative route if there is a delay on the guidance route.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
328
04
Press
NAV
to display the
"
Navigation - guidance
" menu.
Map management
Selecting the points of interest displayed on the map
Select "
Map management
" and confi rm.
Select from the various categories the
ones that you want to display on the
screen.
Select "
Map details
" and confi rm.
Select "
Default
" to have only "
Filling stations, garages
" and
"
Risk areas
" appear on the map (if installed in the system).
Select "
OK
" then confi rm and select
"
OK
" again then confi rm to save the
modifi cations.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
329
04
Select "
Map management
" and confi rm.
Select:
- "
Vehicle direction
" to have the map
follow the direction of travel,
- "
North direction
" to keep the map
always North up,
- "
Perspective view
" to display a
perspective view.
Select "
Map orientation
" and confi rm.
The colour of the map, different from the day and night mode, is
confi gured in the "
SETUP
" menu.
Map orientation
Press
NAV
to display the
"
Navigation - guidance
" menu.
Street names are visible on the map from the 100 m scale.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
330
04
Press
NAV
to display the
"
Navigation - guidance
" menu.
Navigation voice synthesis
Select "
Guidance options
" and confi rm.
Adjusting the volume / Deactivation
Select "
Set speech synthesis
" and
confi rm.
Select the volume graph and confi rm.
Select "
Deactivate
" to deactivate voice messages.
Select "
OK
" and press the dial to
confi rm.
Adjust the volume to the desired level
and confi rm.
The volume of messages can be adjusted during the transmission
of the message using the volume adjustment control.
The volume setting of guidance messages is also accessible via
the "
SETUP
" / "
Voice synthesis
" menu.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
331
04
Male voice / Female voice
Press
SETUP
to display the
confi guration menu.
Select "
Select male voice
" or "
Select
female voice
" then confi rm "
Yes
" then confi rm " Yes " then confi rm "
" to
activate a male or female voice. The
system restarts.
Select "
Voice synthesis
" and confi rm.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
332
05
Access to the "Traffic information" menu
List of TMC messages in order
of distance from the vehicle.
Go from the list to the menu (left/right).
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
Traffi c information
Traffi c information
Traffi c information
Traffi c information
Traffi c information
Traffi c information
Traffi c information
Traffi c information
Traffi c information
Traffi c information
Traffi c information
Traffi c information
Traffi c information
Traffi c information
Traffi c information
Traffi c information
Traffi c information
Traffi c information
Traffi c information
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
Geographic fi lter
"
Geographic fi lter " Geographic fi lter
"
Select TMC station
"
(automatic, manual)
"
Display/Do not display
messages
"
or
Press "
TRAFFIC
".
TRAFFIC INFORMATION
333
05
Configure the filtering and display of TMC messages
TMC (Traffi c Message Channel) messages contain information on traffi c and weather conditions, received in real time and transmitted to the
driver in the form of audible announcements and symbols on the navigation map.
The navigation system can then suggest an alternative route to avoid a traffi c problem.
Press the
TRAFFIC
button to display the
"
Traffi c information
" menu.
Select the "
Geographic fi lter
" function
Geographic fi lter " function Geographic fi lter
and confi rm.
The system offers a choice of:
- "
Retain all the messages
",
or
- "
Retain the messages
"
- "
Around the vehicle
", (confi rm
the mileage to modify and select
the distance),
- "
On the route
".
Confi rm "
OK
" to save the modifi cations.
We recommend:
- a fi lter on the route and
- a fi lter around the vehicle of:
- 12 miles (20 km) in urban areas,
- 30 miles (50 km) on motorways.
TRAFFIC INFORMATION
334
05
Principal TMC symbols
Red and yellow triangle: traffi c information, for example:
Black and blue triangle: general information, for example:
Weather reports
Modifi ed signage
Risk of explosion
Traffi c reports
Narrow carriageway
Road closed
Wind
Slippery surface
Demonstration
Fog
Accident
Danger
Parking
Delay
No entry
Snow / ice
Roadworks
Traffi c jam
Receiving TA messages
The TA (Traffi c Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert
messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a
radio station transmitting this type of message. When a traffi c report
is transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, USB, ...) is
interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback
of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of the
message.
Press
RADIO
to display the "
FM / AM
band
" menu.
Select "
Guidance options
" then
confi rm.
Activate or deactivate "
TA
" then confi rm.
The volume setting for TA messages can be adjusted only during the
transmission of this type of alert.
Activate or deactivate the function at any time by pressing
the button.
During a message, press the button to interrupt it.
TRAFFIC INFORMATION
335
06
Access to the "Telephone" menu
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
Telephone
Telephone
Telephone
Telephone
Telephone
Telephone
Telephone
Telephone
Telephone
Telephone
Telephone
Telephone
Telephone
Telephone
Telephone
Telephone
Telephone
Telephone
Telephone
Telephone
Telephone
Telephone
Telephone
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
Dial
"
"
Directory of contacts
"
"
Contacts management
"
"
Phone functions
"
"
Bluetooth functions
"
"
Hang up
"
Go from the list to the menu (left/right).
or
List of recent calls sent and
received with the telephone
connected to the system.
Press
PHONE
.
To make a call, select a number in the list and confi rm "
OK
"
to start the call.
Connecting a different telephone deletes the list of
recent calls.
No telephone connected.
Telephone connected.
Incoming call.
Outgoing call.
Synchronisation
of address book in
progress.
Telephone call in
progress.
In the top bar of the permanent
display
USING THE TELEPHONE
336
06
USING THE TELEPHONE
Pairing a Bluetooth telephone
First connection
For reasons of safety and because they require prolonged attention
on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Bluetooth
mobile telephone to the hands-free system of the audio unit must be
carried out with the
vehicle stationary
.
In the Bluetooth menu of your telephone, select
the name of the system from the list of devices
detected.
Press this button.
Select "
Bluetooth functions
" and
confi rm.
Select "
Peripherals search
" and
confi rm.
The list of peripheral devices detected
is displayed. Wait until the "
Connect
"
button is available.
You can check the compatibility of your telephone at
www.peugeot.co.uk (services).
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function
and ensure that it is "visible to all" (telephone
confi guration).
Quick procedure from the telephone
Enter a minimum 4 fi gure code in the telephone and
confi rm.
Enter the same code in the system,
select "
OK
" and confi rm.
Procedure from the system
337
06
USING THE TELEPHONE
Select "
Connect
" and confi rm.
The system offers to connect the
telephone:
- in "
Hands-free mode
"
(telephone only),
- in "
Audio
" mode (streaming: playing
music fi les on the telephone),
- or "
All
" (for selection of both
modes).
Select "
OK
" and confi rm.
Then accept automatic connection on the telephone to allow the
telephone to reconnect automatically every time the vehicle is
started.
The ability of the system to connect in only one mode depends on
the telephone. The two modes may both connect by default.
The "
Hands-free mode
" should be used in preference if
"Streaming" is not desired.
The services available depend on the network, the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth telephone used. Check the telephone
manual and with your network provider for details of the services available to you.
Depending on the type of telephone, the system will ask you to
accept or not the transfer of your contacts.
On return to the vehicle,the last telephone connected
automatically reconnects, within around 30 seconds after
switching on the ignition (Bluetooth activated and visible).
To modify the automatic connection mode, remove the pairing
and pair the telephone again with the desired mode.
Enter a minimum 4 fi gure code in the telephone
and confi rm.
Enter the same code in the system,
select "
OK
" and confi rm.
Select the name of the desired
peripheral from the list of devices
detected then confi rm.
338
06
USING THE TELEPHONE
Directory configuration / Synchronisation with the telephone
Press
PHONE
then select "
Contacts
management
" and confi rm.
Select "
New contact
" to enter a new
contact.
Select "
Sort by Name/First name
" to
choose the order in which they appear.
Select "
Delete all contacts
" to delete
the contacts saved in the system.
Select "
Synchronization options
":
- No synchronization: only the
contacts saved in the system
(always present).
- Display telephone contacts: only the
contacts saved in the telephone.
- Display SIM card contacts: only the
contacts saved on the SIM card.
- Display all phone contacts:
contacts on the SIM card and in the
telephone.
Select "
Import all the entries
" to import
all the contacts in the telephone and
save them in the system.
Once imported, a contact remains visible
whatever telephone is connected.
Select "
Contact mem. status
" to see the
number of contacts saved in the system
or imported, and the free memory.
339
06
Editing, importing or deleting a contact
Press
PHONE
then select "
Directory of
contacts
" and confi rm.
Select the desired contact and confi rm.
Select "
Open
" to view a contact on the
telephone or modify a contact saved in
the system.
Select "
Import
" to copy a contact from
the telephone to the system.
Select "
Delete
" to delete a contact
recorded in the system.
USING THE TELEPHONE
Select
OK
or press the back button to exit
this menu.
Once the contact has been imported, the Bluetooth symbol
disappears, replaced by the telephone symbol which shows that the
contact has been saved in the system.
It is not possible to modify or delete contacts in the telephone or the
SIM card via the Bluetooth connection.
In the "
Directory of contacts
" menu, the import and deletion of
contacts is done one by one.
340
06
USING THE TELEPHONE
Press
PHONE
twice.
Select "
Dial
" then confi rm.
Select "
Directory of contacts
" then
confi rm.
Dial the telephone number using the
virtual keypad selecting each number
in turn.
Confi rm "
OK
" to make the call.
Press
TEL
or twice on
PHONE
.
Calling a new number
Calling a contact
Select the desired contact and confi rm.
If access was via the
PHONE
button,
select "
Call
" and confi rm.
Select the number and confi rm to start
the call.
Making a call
Use of the telephone is not recommended while driving. We
recommended that you park safely or make use of the steering
mounted controls.
341
06
USING THE TELEPHONE
Calling a recently entered number
Press
TEL
, select "
Call list
" and
confi rm,
Select the desired number and confi rm.
To erase the calls log, press
PHONE
twice, select "
Phone
functions
" and confi rm then select "
Delete calls log
" and confi rm.
Ending a call
Press
PHONE
then select "
OK
" to end
the call.
Or make a long press on
TEL
at the
steering mounted controls.
Or make two short presses on
TEL
at
the steering mounted controls.
Or press the
MODE
button, as many
times as necessary, until the telephone
screen is displayed.
press
PHONE
to display the calls log.
or
Press "
OK
" to display the contextual
menu then select "
Hang up
" and
confi rm.
It is always possible to start a call directly from the telephone; park
the vehicle as a safety measure.
342
06
USING THE TELEPHONE
Receiving a call
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display
on the screen.
"
Yes
" to accept the call is selected by
default.
Press "
OK
" to accept the call.
Select "
No
" and confi rm to reject the
call.
A short press on
TEL
accepts an
incoming call.
A long press on
TEL
rejects an incoming
call.
343
06
Options during a call *
During a call, press the
MODE
button
several times to select display of the
telephone screen, then press "
OK
" to
open the contextual menu.
Select "
Private mode
" and confi rm to
take the call on the handset.
Or select "
Hands-free mode
" and
confi rm to take the call via the vehicle's
speakers.
Select "
Put call on hold
" and confi rm to
put the current call on hold.
Or select "
Resume the call
" and
confi rm to resume the call on hold.
Select "
DTMF ring tones
" to use the
numerical keypad, so as to navigate
through the menu of an interactive vocal
server.
Select "
Hang up
" to end the call.
* Depending on the compatibility of the phone and your service plan.
it is possible to hold a 3-way conference
call by making 2 calls in succession*.
Select "
Conference
mode call
" in the
contextual menu accessible using this
button.
Or make a short press on this button.
USING THE TELEPHONE
344
06
Press
PHONE
twice.
Select "
List of the paired peripherals
"
and confi rm.
It is possible to:
- "
Connect
" or "
Disconnect
" the
selected telephone,
- delete the pairing of the selected
telephone.
It is also possible to select all pairings.
Managing paired telephones
Changing the ringtone
Press
PHONE
twice.
Select "
Phone functions
" and confi rm.
Select "
Ring options
" and confi rm.
You can adjust the volume and the type
of ringtone.
Select "
Bluetooth functions
".
Select "
OK
" and confi rm to save the
changes.
USING THE TELEPHONE
345
07
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
FM / AM band
FM / AM band
FM / AM band
FM / AM band
FM / AM band
FM / AM band
FM / AM band
FM / AM band
FM / AM band
FM / AM band
FM / AM band
FM / AM band
FM / AM band
FM / AM band
FM / AM band
FM / AM band
FM / AM band
FM / AM band
FM / AM band
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
Change Waveband
" ("
AM / FM
")
"
Guidance options
" ("
TA, RDS
")
"
Audio settings
" (see this
section)
"
Update radio list
"
Alphabetical list of stations
received.
Press
or
or use the rotary control to select the
previous or next station in the list.
Go from the list to the menu (left/right).
or
Press
RADIO
.
RADIO
Access to the "Radio" menu
346
07
By alphabetical list
Press
RADIO
, select the station of your
choice and confi rm.
By automatic frequency search
Press
or
for the automatic search
for a lower or higher radio frequency.
Or turn the thumb wheel at the steering
mounted controls.
By manual frequency search
Press
or
to adjust the radio
frequency step by step.
Selecting a station
The external environment (hill, building, tunnel, underground car park...) may interfere with the reception, including in RDS station tracking mode. This
phenomenon is a normal result of the way in which radio waves are transmitted and does not in any way indicate a fault with the audio system.
The quality of reception is represented by the number of
active waves in this symbol.
Press
RADIO
or
OK
to display the
contextual menu.
Changing waveband
Select "
Change waveband
".
Select "
AM / FM
" and confi rm.
RADIO
347
07
Press the button on the numerical keypad to recall a
preset station.
Or press then turn the thumb wheel at the steering
mounted controls.
Presetting a station
After selecting a station, press one of the buttons
on the numerical keypad for 2 seconds to preset the
current station.
An audible signal confi rms that the station has been
preset.
Press
RADIO
.
Activate / Deactivate RDS
RDS, if activated, allows you to continue listening to the same station
by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However, in certain
conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be assured throughout
the entire country as radio stations do not cover 100 % of the territory.
This explains the loss of reception of the station during a journey.
Select "
Guidance options
" then
confi rm.
Activate or deactivate "
RDS
" then
confi rm.
RADIO
348
08
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
MEDIA
MEDIA
MEDIA
MEDIA
MEDIA
MEDIA
MEDIA
MEDIA
MEDIA
MEDIA
MEDIA
MEDIA
MEDIA
MEDIA
MEDIA
MEDIA
MEDIA
MEDIA
MEDIA
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
Change media
"
"
Eject USB device
"
(if USB connected)
"
Play mode
" ("
Normal
",
"
Random
", "
Random on all
media
", "
Repetition
")
"
Audio settings
" (see this section)
"
Activate / Deactivate AUX input
"
List of the current media
tracks.
Go from the list to the menu (left/right).
or
Press
MUSIC
.
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
Access to the "Music media player" menu
349
08
CD, MP3 CD / USB player
The audio equipment will only play audio fi les with ".wma, .aac, .fl ac,
.ogg and .mp3" fi le extensions and with a bit rate of between 32 Kbps
and 320 Kbps.
It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
No other type of fi le (.mp4, .m3u...) can be played.
WMA fi les must be of the standard wma 9 type.
The sampling rates supported are greater than 32 KHz.
It is advisable to restrict fi le names to 20 characters, without using of
special characters (e.g.: " " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing and displaying
problems.
In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when recording
it is preferable to select the ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or Joliet standard.
If the disc is recorded in another format (udf, ...), it may not be played
correctly.
It is recommended that the same recording standard is always used
for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum)
for optimum sound quality.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is
recommended.
Information and advice
The system supports USB mass storage or iPod
devices via the USB port (suitable cable not supplied).
If a partitioned USB memory key is connected to the
system, only the fi rst partition is recognised.
Control of the peripheral device is with the audio
system controls.
The number of tracks is limited to 2000 maximum,
999 tracks per folder.
If the current consumption at the USB port exceeds
500 mA, the system goes into protection mode and
deactivates the port.
Other peripherals, not recognised on connection, must
be connected to the auxiliary socket using a Jack cable
(not supplied).
In order to be read, a USB memory stick must be formatted FAT 16 or 32.
The system does not support the operation of an Apple
®
player and a
®
player and a
®
USB memory stick connected at the same time.
It is recommended that offi cial Apple
®
USB cables are used to ensure
®
USB cables are used to ensure
®
correct operation.
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
350
08
Insert the CD in the player, insert the USB
memory stick in the USB player or connect the
USB peripheral to the USB port using a suitable
cable (not supplied)
The system builds playlists (in temporary
memory), an operation which can take from
a few seconds to several minutes at the fi rst
connection.
Reduce the number of non-music fi les and the
number of folders to reduce the waiting time.
The playlists are updated every time the ignition
is switched off or connection of a USB memory
stick. However, the system memorises these
lists and if they are not modifi ed, the loading
time will be shorter.
Play starts automatically after a period which
depends on the capacity of the USB memory
stick.
Selection of source
The
SOURCE
button on the steering mounted controls allows a
direct change to the next media source.
"
CD / CD MP3
"
"
USB, iPod
"
"
AUX
"
"
STREAMING
"
"
RADIO
"
Press
MUSIC
to display the "
MEDIA
"
menu.
Select "
Following media source
" and
confi rm.
Repeat the operation as many times as necessary to obtain the
desired media source (except for radio which is accessible either
with
SOURCE
or
RADIO
).
Sources
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
351
08
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
+
/
/
/
Selecting a track
Previous track.
Next track.
Previous folder.
Next folder.
Fast forward.
Fast backward.
Pause: long press on
SRC
.
MUSIC: List of USB or CD tracks or
folders
Up or down in the list.
Confi rm, next menu level.
Up one menu level.
Long press
Long press
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
352
08
Audio streaming
Streaming allows audio fi les on your telephone to be played via the
vehicle's speakers.
Connect the telephone: see "
USING THE TELEPHONE
".
Select "
Audio
" or "
All
" profi le.
If play does not start automatically, it may be necessary to start the
audio playback from the telephone.
Control is from the peripheral device or by using the audio system
buttons.
Once connected in streaming mode, the telephone is considered to be
a media source.
It is recommended that you activate "
Repeat
" on the Bluetooth
peripheral.
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
Connecting APPLE
®
Connecting APPLE
®
Connecting APPLE
players
®
players
®
Connect the Apple
®
player to the USB port using a suitable cable (not
®
player to the USB port using a suitable cable (not
®
supplied).
Play starts automatically.
Control is via the audio system.
The classifi cations available are those of the portable device
connected (artists / albums / genres / playlists / audiobooks /
podcasts).
The default classifi cation used is by artist. To modify the classifi cation
used, return to the fi rst level of the menu then select the desired
classifi cation (playlists for example) and confi rm to go down through
the menu to the desired track.
The "Shuffl e tracks" mode on an iPod
®
corresponds to the "Random"
®
corresponds to the "Random"
®
mode on the audio system.
The "Shuffl e albums" mode on an iPod
®
corresponds to the "Random
®
corresponds to the "Random
®
all" on the audio system.
"Shuffl e tracks" is restored by default on each connection.
The version of software in the audio system may not be compatible
with the generation of your Apple
®
player.
®
player.
®
353
08
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
Using the auxiliary input (AUX)
JACK/USB audio cable not supplied
Connect the portable device
(MP3, WMA player…) to the
JACK auxiliary audio socket or
USB port using a suitable cable.
Press
MUSIC
to display the "
MUSIC
"
menu.
Select "
Activate / Deactivate AUX
input
" and confi rm.
First adjust the volume of your portable
device (to a high level). Then adjust the
volume of your audio system.
Display and management of the controls are via the portable device.
354
09
AUDIO SETTINGS
They are accessible by the
MUSIC
button in the control panel or by a long
press on
RADIO
according to the source
in use.
- "
Equalizer
" (choice of 6 musical ambiences)
Equalizer " (choice of 6 musical ambiences) Equalizer
- "
Bass
"
- "
Treble
"
- "
Loudness
" (Activate/Deactivate)
- "
Distribution
" ("
Driver
", "
Driver ", " Driver
All passengers
")
- "
Le-Ri balance
" (Left/Right)
- "
Fr-Re balance
" (Front/Rear)
- "
Auto. Volume
" depending on road speed (Activate/Deactivate)
The audio settings (
Equalizer
,
Equalizer , Equalizer
Bass
,
Treble
and
Loudness
) are
different and independent for each sound source.
The settings for distribution and balance are common to all sources.
The distribution (or spatialisation using the Arkamys
©
system) of sound
©
system) of sound
©
is an audio process that allows the audio quality to be adapted to the
number of listeners in the vehicle.
On-board audio: Arkamys
©
Sound Staging.
©
Sound Staging.
©
With Sound Staging, the driver and passengers are immersed in an
"audio scene" recreating the natural atmosphere of an auditorium:
truly a part of the scene and its surroundings.
This new sensation is made possible by software in the audio system
which processes the digital signals from the media players (radio,
CD, MP3…) without changing the audio settings. This processing
takes account of the characteristics of the passenger compartment to
produce optimum results.
The Arkamys
©
software installed in your audio system processes
©
software installed in your audio system processes
©
the digital signal from the media players (radio, CD, MP3, ...) and
recreates a natural musical scene, with harmonious placement of
instruments and voices in the space in front of passengers, level with
the windscreen.
355
10
CONFIGURATION
Press
SETUP
to display the
"
Confi guration
" menu.
Select "
Choose colour
" and confi rm to
Choose colour " and confi rm to Choose colour
select the screen colour harmony and
the map presentation mode:
- day mode,
- night mode,
- automatic day/night mode,
according to whether the
headlamps are on.
Select "
Adjust luminosity
" and confi rm
to adjust the screen brightness.
Press "
OK
" to save the changes.
The settings for day and night are
independent.
Select "
Display confi guration
" and
confi rm.
Display configuration
356
11
SCREEN MENU MAP(S)
"Navigation - guidance"
MENU
Enter an address
Select destination
Directory
GPS coordinates
Journey leg and route
Add a stage
Enter an address
Directory
Previous destinations
Order/delete journey legs
Divert route
Chosen destination
Guidance options
Defi ne calculation criteria
Delete last destinations
Map management
Map orientation
MAIN FUNCTION
Option A1
Option A11
Option A
Option B...
Map details
Move the map
Mapping and updating
Description of risk areas database
Stop / Restore guidance
1
2
3
1
3
3
2
2
2
2
1
3
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
Set parameters for risk areas
2
Fastest route
2
Shortest route
Distance/Time
With tolls
2
2
2
With Ferry
2
Traffi c info
2
Set speech synthesis
Fastest route
Shortest route
3
3
2
Distance/Time
With tolls
3
3
With Ferry
Traffi c info
3
3
3
3
3
North direction
Vehicle direction
Perspective view
357
11
Select TMC station
Automatic TMC
Manual TMC
List of TMC stations
Display / Do not display
messages
"TRAFFIC INFORMATION"
MENU
Geographic filter
Retain all the messages:
Retain the messages:
Around the vehicle
On the route
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
3
3
1
SCREEN MENU MAP(S)
Dial
Directory of contacts
Call
Open
Import
"TELEPHONE" MENU
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
2
3
3
3
2
2
2
1
1
1
3
3
3
2
3
2
2
3
List of the paired peripherals
Connect
Disconnect
Delete
Delete all
Contact mem. status
Phone functions
Ring options
Delete calls log
Bluetooth functions
Peripherals search
Rename radiotelephone
Hang up
Display all phone contacts
Delete
Contacts management
New contact
Delete all contacts
Import all the entries
Synchronization options
Display telephone contacts
No synchronization
Display SIM card contacts
2
Cancel
2
Sort by First name/Name
3
Cancel
358
11
SCREEN MENU MAP(S)
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
2
2
2
1
Random on all media
Repetition
Audio settings
Activate / Deactivate AUX
input
"MUSIC" MENU
Change Media
Read mode
Normal
Random
All passengers
Le-Ri balance
Fr-Re balance
Auto. Volume
Update radio list
Bass
Treble
Loudness
Distribution
Driver
1
2
2
1
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
Equalizer
"RADIO" MENU
Change Waveband
Guidance options
TA
RDS options
Audio settings
None
Classical
Jazz
Rock
Techno
Vocal
2
2
2
2
USB/iPod
AUX
CD
Bluetooth streaming
2
AM / FM
3
Activated / Deactivated
3
Activated / Deactivated
359
11
2
3
3
1
4
2
2
1
4
4
2
2
Night mode
Auto Day/Night
Adjust luminosity
Set date and time
"SETUP" MENU
Display configuration
Choose colour
Harmony:
Cartography:
Day mode
Speech synthesis setting
Guidance instructions volume
Select male voice/Select female voice
2
Select units
2
3
3
2
Lighting confi guration
Parking assistance
Rear wiper in reverse
Guide-me-home lighting time
1
Define vehicle parameters *
2
Wiper operation
3
Directional headlamps
3
Mood lighting
3
Daytime running lamps
* The settings vary according to the vehicle.
2
Alert log
1
Trip computer
2
Status of functions
2
Français
1
Select language
2
English
2
Italiano
2
Portuguese
2
Español
2
Deutsch
2
Nederlands
2
Turkish
2
Polski
2
Русский
SCREEN MENU MAP(S)
360
The following table groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions concerning your audio system.
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION
ANSWER
SOLUTION
The route calculation is
not successful.
The guidance criteria may confl ict with the current location (exclusion of
toll roads on a toll motorway).
Check the guidance criteria on the Navigation
Menu, "Guidance options"\ "Defi ne calculation
criteria".
I am unable to enter my
post code.
The system only accepts post codes of up to 5 characters.
The POIs do not appear.
The POIs have not been selected.
Select the POIs in the list of POIs.
The risk areas audible
warning does not work.
The audible warning is not active.
Activate audible warnings in the Guidance options
menu, "Navigation - guidance", "Set parameters
for risk areas".
The system does not
suggest a detour around
an incident on the route.
The guidance criteria do not take account of TMC messages.
Select the "Traffi c info" function in the list of
guidance criteria.
I receive a Risk area alert
which is not on my route.
Other than guidance, the system announces all Risk areas positioned in a
cone located in front of the vehicle. It may provide an alert for a Risk area
located on nearby or parallel roads.
Zoom in on the map to view the exact position of
the Risk area. Select "On the route" to no longer
receive alerts other than guidance or to reduce the
time for the announcement.
361
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION
ANSWER
SOLUTION
Certain traffi c jams
along the route are not
indicated in real time.
On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to receive the
traffi c information.
Wait until the traffi c information is being received
correctly (display of the traffi c information icons on
the map).
The fi lters are too restrictive.
Modify the "Geographic fi lter" settings.
In certain countries, only major routes (motorways...) are listed for the
traffi c information.
This phenomenon is normal. The system is
dependent on the traffi c information available.
The altitude is not
displayed.
On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes to
receive more than 4 satellites correctly.
Wait until the system has started up completely.
Check that there is a GPS coverage of at least
4 satellites (long press on the SETUP button, then
select "GPS coverage").
Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel...) or the weather,
the conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary.
This phenomenon is normal. The system
is dependent on the GPS signal reception
conditions.
I am unable to connect
my Bluetooth telephone.
The telephone's Bluetooth function may be switched off or the telephone
may not be visible.
- Check that your telephone's Bluetooth
function is switched on.
- Check in the telephone settings that it is
"visible to all".
The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with the system.
You can check the compatibility of your telephone
on www.peugeot.co.uk (services)
The volume of the
telephone connected
in Bluetooth mode is
inaudible.
The volume depends both on the system and on the telephone.
Increase the volume of the audio system, to
maximum if required, and increase the volume of
the telephone if necessary.
The ambient noise level has an infl uence on the quality of telephone
communication.
Reduce the ambient noise level (close the windows,
reduce the booster fan speed, slow down, ...).
362
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION
ANSWER
SOLUTION
Some contacts are
duplicated in the list.
The options for synchronizing contacts are synchronizing the contacts
on the SIM card, the contacts on the telephone, or both. When both
synchronizations are selected, some contacts may be duplicated.
Select "Display SIM card contacts" or "Display
telephone contacts".
Contacts are not shown
in alphabetical order.
Some telephones offer display options. Depending on the settings
chosen, contacts can be transferred in a specifi c order.
Modify the display setting in the telephone
directory.
The system does not receive
SMS text messages.
The Bluetooth mode does not permit sending SMS text messages to the
system.
The CD is ejected
automatically or is not
played by the player.
The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any
audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play.
- Check that the CD is inserted in the player the
right way up.
- Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot
be played if it is too damaged.
- Check the content in the case of a recorded
CD: refer to the information and advice in the
"MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS" section.
-
The audio system's CD player does not play DVDs.
- Some recorded CDs will not be played by
the audio system because they are not of the
correct quality.
The CD has been recorded in a format that is not compatible with the
player (udf, ...).
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not
recognised by the audio system.
There is a long waiting
period following the insertion
of a CD or connection of a
USB memory stick.
When a new medium is inserted, the system reads a certain amount of
data (directory, title, artist, etc.). This may take from a few seconds to a
few minutes.
This phenomenon is normal.
The CD player sound is
poor.
The CD used is scratched or of poor quality.
Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable
conditions.
The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitable.
Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting
an ambience.
363
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION
ANSWER
SOLUTION
Some characters in the
media information are not
displayed correctly while
playing.
The audio system does not display some types of characters.
Use standard characters to name tracks and
folders.
Playing of streaming fi les
does not start.
The peripheral device connected does not support automatic play.
Start the playback from the device.
The names of tracks and
the track length are not
displayed on the screen
when streaming audio.
The Bluetooth profi le does not allow the transfer of this information.
The quality of reception
of the radio station
listened to gradually
deteriorates or the stored
stations do not function
(no sound, 87.5 Mhz is
displayed...).
The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened
to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the
vehicle is travelling.
Activate the "RDS" function by means of the
short-cut menu to enable the system to check
whether there is a more powerful transmitter in the
geographical area.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block
reception, including in RDS mode.
This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate
a fault with the audio system.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going
through a car wash or into an underground car park).
Have the aerial checked by a PEUGEOT dealer.
I cannot fi nd some radio
stations in the list of
stations received.
The station is not received or its name has changed in the list.
Some radio stations send other information in place of their name
(the title of the song for example).
The system interprets this information as the name of the station.
The name of the radio
station changes.
364
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION
ANSWER
SOLUTION
In changing the setting
of treble and bass the
equalizer setting is
deselected.
The selection of an equalizer setting imposes the balance settings.
Modifying one without the other is not possible.
Modify the balance or equalizer settings to obtain
the desired musical ambience.
In changing the equalizer
setting, treble and bass
return to zero.
When changing the
balance settings, the
distribution setting is
deselected.
The selection of a distribution setting imposes the balance settings.
Modifying one without the other is not possible.
Modify the balance or distribution settings to
obtain the desired musical ambience.
When changing an
distribution setting,
the balance setting is
deselected.
There is a difference in
sound quality between
the different audio
sources (radio, CD...).
For optimum sound quality, the audio settings for Volume, Bass, Treble,
Equalizer and Loudness can be adapted to the different sound sources,
which may result in audible differences when changing source (radio,
CD...).
Check that the audio settings for (Volume, Bass,
Treble, Equalizer, Loudness) are adapted to
the sources listened to. It is advisable to set the
AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Fr-Re balance,
Le-Ri balance) to the middle position, select the
"None", musical ambience and set the loudness
correction to the "Active" position in CD mode or
to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.
365
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION
ANSWER
SOLUTION
With the engine off, the
system switches off after
a few minutes of use.
When the engine is switched off, the system's operating time depends on
the battery charge.
The switch-off is normal: the system switches to economy mode and
switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.
Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
charge.
Playback of my USB
memory stick starts only
after a very long wait
(around 2 to 3 minutes).
Some fi les supplied with the memory stick may greatly slow down access
to reading the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the catalogue time).
Delete the fi les supplied with the memory stick
and limit the number of sub-folders in the fi le
structure on the memory stick.
When I connect my
iPhone as telephone and
to the USB port at the
same time, I am unable
to play the music fi les.
When the iPhone connects automatically as a telephone, it forces the
streaming function. The streaming function takes the place of the USB
function which is then not useable, there is a period without sound of the
track being played with Apple
®
players.
®
players.
®
Disconnect and reconnect to the USB port (the
USB function takes priority over streaming).
When I connect my
Apple
®
player or my
®
player or my
®
BlackBerry
®
to the
®
to the
®
USB port, I have alert
messages on the current
consumption by the USB
port.
When charging, the current consumption of these smartphones is greater
than the rating of the USB port, which is 500 mA.
366
367
PEUGEOT Connect Sound (RD5)
Your
PEUGEOT
Connect Sound (RD5) is coded in such
a way that it will only operate in your vehicle.
For safety reasons, the driver must only carry out
operations which require prolonged attention while the
vehicle is stationary.
When the engine is switched off and to prevent
discharging of the battery, the audio equipment may
switch off after a few minutes.
AUDIO SYSTEM / BLUETOOTH
®
01 First steps
02 Steering mounted controls
03 Main menu
04 Audio
05 PEUGEOT Connect USB
06 Bluetooth
07 Screen menu map(s)
Frequently asked questions
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
368
369
370
371
374
377
380
385
CONTENTS
368
01
FIRST STEPS
Eject CD.
Select source:
radio, audio CD / MP3 CD, USB,
Jack connection, Streaming,
AUX.
Select the screen display
mode:
Date, audio functions, trip
computer, telephone.
Automatic frequency search
down/up.
Select previous/next CD, MP3
or USB track.
Audio settings: front/
rear fader, left/right
balance, bass/treble,
loudness, audio
ambiences.
Display the list of
local stations.
Long press: CD
tracks or MP3
folders (CD / USB).
TA (Traffi c Announcements)
on/off.
Long press: PTY * (radio
Programme TYpe) mode.
Display main menu.
The DARK button changes the screen display
for improved driving comfort at night.
1
st
press: upper bar only illuminated.
2
nd
press: black screen.
3
rd
press: return to standard display.
On/off, volume setting.
Buttons 1 to 6:
Select a pre-set radio station.
Long press: pre-set a station.
Select next frequency down/up.
Select previous/next MP3 folder.
Select previous/next folder / genre /
artist / playlist (USB).
Confi rm.
Select wavebands
FM1, FM2, FMast and
AM.
Abandon the current
operation.
*
Available according to version.
369
02
STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS
Radio: automatic search for a higher frequency.
CD / MP3 / USB: selection of the next track.
CD / USB: continuous press: fast forwards play.
Move in the list.
Change audio source.
Confi rm a selection.
Call/end call on the telephone.
Press for more than 2 seconds:
telephone main menu.
Radio: automatic search for a lower
frequency.
CD / MP3 / USB: selection of the
previous track.
CD / USB: continuous press: fast
reverse.
Move in the list.
Radio: select the previous/next pre-set
station.
USB: select genre / artist / folder from the
USB: select genre / artist / folder from the
classifi cation list.
Select the previous/next item in a menu.
Volume increase.
Volume increase.
Volume decrease.
Volume decrease.
Mute: press the volume
increase and decrease
buttons simultaneously.
The sound is restored by
pressing one of the two
volume buttons.
370
03
MAIN MENU
AUDIO FUNCTIONS
:
radio, CD, USB, options.
Screen C
For a detailed global view of
the menus available, refer to
the "Screen menu map" in this
section.
TELEPHONE
:
Bluetooth hands-free,
pairing, management
of a call.
PERSONALISATION-
CONFIGURATION
:
vehicle parameters,
display, languages.
TRIP COMPUTER
: entering
of distances, alerts, status of
functions.
Screen A
371
04
AUDIO
Press the SOURCE button several
times in succession and select the
radio.
Press the BAND AST button to select
a waveband: FM1, FM2, FMast, AM.
Briefl y press one of the buttons to
carry out an automatic search of the
radio stations.
Press one of the buttons to carry out
a manual search up / down for radio
frequencies.
Press the LIST REFRESH button to
display the list of stations received
locally (30 stations maximum).
To update this list, press for more
than two seconds.
The external environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks, ...)
may block reception, including in RDS mode. This is a normal effect of the
way in which radio waves are transmitted and does not indicate any failure
of the audio system.
RDS
Radio
Selecting a station
Press the MENU button.
Select AUDIO FUNCTIONS then
press OK.
Select the FM WAVEBAND
PREFERENCES function then
press OK.
Select ACTIVATE RDS then press
OK. RDS appears on the screen.
In radio mode, press OK directly to activate/deactivate RDS mode.
The RDS, if displayed, enables you to continue listening to the same
station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However, in certain
conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be assured throughout the
country as radio stations do not cover 100 % of the territory. Under conditions
of very weak reception, the system may change to a regional station.
372
04
AUDIO
Insert circular compact discs only.
Some anti-pirating systems, on original discs or CDs copied using a
personal recorder, may cause faults which are no refl ection on the
quality of the original player.
Without pressing the EJECT button, insert a CD in the player, play
begins automatically.
CD
Playing a CD
To play a disc which has already been
inserted, press the SOURCE button
several times in succession and
select CD.
Press one of the buttons to select a
track on the CD.
Press the LIST REFRESH button to display the list of tracks
on the CD.
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fast forwards or fast backwards.
Receiving TA messages
Press the TA button to activate or
deactivate traffi c messages.
The TA (Traffi c Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert
messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a
radio station transmitting this type of message. When a traffi c
report is transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, ...) is
interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback
of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of the
message.
373
04
The MP3 format, an abbreviation of MPEG 1.2 & 2.5 Audio Layer 3,
is an audio compression standard which permits the recording of
several tens of music fi les on a single disc.
In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when
recording, the ISO 9660 level 1.2 or Joliet fi le format is
recommended.
If the disc is recorded in another format, it may not be played
correctly.
It is recommended that the same recording format is always used
for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible
(4x maximum) for optimum sound quality.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet format is
recommended.
The audio system will only play fi les with the extension ".mp3" with
a sampling rate of 22.05 KHz or 44.1 KHz. No other type of fi le
(.wma, .mp4, .m3u...) can be played.
It is advisable to restrict fi le names to 20 characters without using
special characters (e.g. " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing or displaying
problems.
MP3 CD
Information and advice
AUDIO
Empty CDs are not recognised and may damage the system.
Insert an MP3 compilation in the player.
The audio equipment searches for all of the music tracks, which
may take anything between a few seconds and several tens of
seconds, before play begins.
MP3 CD
Playing an MP3 compilation
On a single disc, the CD player can read up to 255 MP3 fi les
spread over 8 folder levels. However, it is advisable to keep to
a limit of two levels to reduce the access time before the CD is
played.
While the CD is being played, the folder structure is not followed.
All of the fi les are displayed on a single level.
To play a disc which has already
been inserted, press the SOURCE
button several times in succession
and select CD.
Press one of the buttons to select a
folder on the CD.
Press the LIST REFRESH button to display the list of directories of
the MP3 compilation.
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fast forward or backward play.
Press one of the buttons to select a
track on the CD.
374
05
USB PLAYER - PLUG
The system puts together playlists (temporary memory) created
over a period which depends on the capacity of the USB device.
The other sources are available during this time.
The playlists are updated each time the ignition is switched off or
each time a USB memory stick is connected.
When connecting for the fi rst time, the classifi cation suggested
is by folder. When you reconnect, the classifi cation selected
previously is retained.
Connect the memory stick to the port, directly or
using a lead. If the audio equipment is switched
on, the USB source is detected as soon as it
is connected. Play begins automatically after a
delay which depends on the capacity of the USB
memory stick.
The fi le formats supported are .mp3 (mpeg1
layer 3 only) and .wma (standard 9 only,
128 kbits/sec compression).
Certain playlist formats are supported (.m3u, ...)
On reconnection of the previous memory stick
used, play is resumed automatically with the last
track played.
This unit consists of a USB port and an auxiliary
Jack socket * . The audio fi les are transmitted
from a portable device - digital player or a USB
memory stick - to your PEUGEOT Connect
Sound (RD5) and heard via the vehicle's
speakers.
USB memory stick (1.1, 1.2 and 2.0) or Apple
®
player of generation 5 or later:
- USB memory sticks should be formatted FAT
or FAT 32 (NTFS not supported),
- the Apple
®
player lead is essential,
®
player lead is essential,
®
- navigation through the fi le database is also
possible by means of the steering mounted
controls.
Using the PEUGEOT CONNECT USB
Connecting a USB memory stick
Other Apple
®
players of earlier generations and
®
players of earlier generations and
®
players using the MTP protocol * :
- play via Jack-Jack lead only (not supplied),
- navigation through the fi le database is from
the portable device.
* According to vehicle.
375
05
Using the PEUGEOT CONNECT USB
Press LIST briefl y to display the
previously selected classifi cation.
Navigate through the list using the left/
right and up/down buttons.
Confi rm the selection by pressing OK.
The lists available are Artist, Genre and Playlist (as defi ned in
the Apple
®
player).
®
player).
®
Selection and Navigation are described in steps 1 to 4 above.
Do not connect a hard disk or USB connection device other
than audio equipment to the USB port. This could damage your
installation.
Connecting an Apple
®
Connecting an Apple
®
Connecting an Apple
player via the USB port
®
player via the USB port
®
Press one of these buttons to gain
access to the previous / next track on
the classifi cation list currently being
played.
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fast forward or backward play.
Press one of these buttons to
gain access to the previous / next
Genre, Folder, Artist or Playlist on
the classifi cation list currently being
played.
Press and hold LIST to display the
different classifi cations.
Select by Folder / Artist / Genre / Playlist,
press OK to select the classifi cation
required, then press OK again to confi rm.
- by Folder: all folders containing audio
fi les recognised on the peripheral
device.
- by Artist: all of the artist names
defi ned in the ID3 Tags, classifi ed in
alphabetical order.
- by Genre: all of the genres defi ned in
the ID3 Tags.
- by Playlist: in accordance with the
playlists recorded on the USB device.
USB PLAYER - PLUG
376
05
The display and control is via the portable device.
First adjust the volume of your portable device.
Then adjust the volume of your audio
system.
Using the auxiliary input (AUX)
Adjusting the volume of the auxiliary source
JACK socket or USB port (according to vehicle)
USB PLAYER - PLUG
Do not connect a device to both the JACK socket and the USB
port at the same time.
Connect the portable device
(MP3 player…) to the JACK
socket or to the USB port,
using a suitable cable (not
supplied).
Press the SOURCE button several
times in succession and select AUX.
The auxiliary input, JACK or USB, allows the connection of a
portable device (MP3 player...).
377
06
BLUETOOTH
For safety reasons and because they require prolonged attention
on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing of the Bluetooth
mobile telephone with the Bluetooth hands-free system of your
audio equipment must be carried out with the vehicle stationary
and the ignition on.
Press the MENU button.
A window is displayed with a message that a search is in progress.
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function
and ensure that it is "visible to all" (telephone
confi guration.
In the menu, select:
- Bluetooth telephone function -
Audio
- Bluetooth confi guration
- Perform a Bluetooth search
The services offered depend on the network, the SIM card and the
compatibility of the Bluetooth equipment used.
Consult your telephone's manual and your operator to fi nd out which
services are available to you.
Bluetooth telephone
Screen C
The TELEPHONE menu permits access to the following functions
in particular: Directory * , Call list, Pairing management.
The fi rst 4 telephones recognised are displayed in this window.
A virtual keypad is displayed in the screen:
enter a code with at least 4 digits.
Confi rm by pressing OK.
A message that the pairing has been successful appears in the screen.
Select the telephone to be connected from the list. Only one
telephone can be connected at a time.
A message is displayed in the screen of the
telephone chosen. To accept the pairing, enter the
same code on the telephone, then confi rm with OK.
The automatic connection authorised is only active after the
telephone has been confi gured.
The directory and the call list can be accessed after the
synchronisation period.
(Available according to model and version)
* If your telephone is fully compatible.
If pairing fails, the number of attempts is not limited.
Go to www.peugeot.co.uk for more information (compatibility,
more help, ...).
Pairing a telephone / First connection
378
06
Receiving a call
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed
display in the vehicle's screen.
Select the YES tab on the display
using the buttons and confi rm by
pressing OK.
Press this button to accept the call.
Making a call
From the Bluetooth telephone function Audio menu, select Manage
the telephone call then Call, Call list or Directory.
Press this button for more than two seconds for
access to your directory, then navigate with the
thumb wheel.
Or
To dial a number, use your telephone's keypad,
with the vehicle stationary.
BLUETOOTH
The system accesses the telephone's contacts directory, depending
on compatibility, and while the Bluetooth connection with it is
maintained.
With certain telephones connected by Bluetooth you can send a
contact to the directory of the audio system.
Contacts imported in this way are saved in a permanent directory
visible to all, whatever the telephone connected.
The menu for the directory is not accessible if it is empty.
379
06
Initiate the pairing between the telephone and
the vehicle. This pairing can be initiated from
the vehicle's telephone function menu or via the
telephone's keypad. Refer to the steps in "Pairing
a telephone" on the previous pages. During the
pairing phase, the vehicle must be stationary with
the key in the ignition.
Select the telephone to be connected from the telephone function
menu.
The audio system connects to a newly paired telephone automatically.
Bluetooth audio streaming *
Wireless transmission of music fi les on the telephone, played via
the audio equipment. The telephone must be able to manage the
appropriate Bluetooth profi les (Profi les A2DP / AVRCP).
* Depending on the compatibility of the telephone.
** In certain cases, playing of the Audio fi les must be initiated from the
keypad.
*** If the telephone supports the function.
Activate the streaming source by
pressing the SOURCE button ** .
The tracks to be played can be
controlled as usual via the buttons on
the audio system control panel and
the steering mounted controls *** .
The contextual information can be
displayed on the screen.
During a call, press this button for more than
2 seconds.
Confi rm with OK to end the call.
Ending a call
BLUETOOTH
380
07
SCREEN MENU MAP(S)
Radio-CD
* The settings vary according to vehicle.
REG mode
CD repeat
Shuffl e play
Vehicle config *
R wiper in rev
Options
Guide lighting
Diagnostic
RDS options
View
Abandon
1
2
3
3
1
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
S
creen
A
MAIN FUNCTION
Option A1
Option A11
Option A
Option B...
1
2
3
1
381
07
Units
Temperature: °Celsius / °Fahrenheit
Fuel consumption:
KM/L - L/100 - MPG
1
2
2
SCREEN MENU MAP(S)
Display adjust
Month
Day
Hour
Minutes
Year
12 H/24 H mode
Language
Italiano
Nederlands
Portuguès
Portuguès-Brazil
Français
Deutsch
English
Español
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
382
07
SCREEN MENU MAP(S)
activate / deactivate RDS
activate / deactivate REG mode
activate / deactivate radiotext
RADIO
activate / deactivate Intro
CD / MP3 CD
activate / deactivate track repeat (the
entire current CD for CD, the entire
current folder for MP3 CD)
activate / deactivate random play (the
entire current CD for CD, the entire
current folder for MP3 CD)
activate / deactivate track repeat (of the
current folder / artist / genre / playlist)
USB
activate / deactivate random play
(of the
current folder / artist / genre / playlist)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
S
creen
C
Press the OK dial for access to short-cut menus according
to the display on the screen:
383
07
SCREEN MENU MAP(S)
Audio functions
Alternative frequencies (RDS)
activate / deactivate
FM
preferences
Regional mode (REG)
activate / deactivate
Radio-text information (RDTXT)
activate / deactivate
1
2
3
4
3
4
3
4
Play modes
Album repeat (RPT)
activate / deactivate
Track random play (RDM)
activate / deactivate
2
3
4
3
4
Trip computer
Distance: x miles
Enter distance to destination
Diagnostics
Alert log
Systems activated or deactivated
State of systems
*
1
2
3
3
2
3
2
* The settings vary according to vehicle.
S
creen
C
Pressing the MENU button displays:
384
07
SCREEN MENU MAP(S)
Bluetooth telephone
Connect/Disconnect an equipment
Consult the paired equipment
Bluetooth confi guration
Telephone function
Audio Streaming function
Delete a paired equipment
Perform a Bluetooth search
Calls list
Call
Directory
Terminate the current call
Manage the telephone call
Activate secret mode
1
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
2
3
4
2
3
3
Video-brightness adjustment
Display confi guration
Defi ne vehicle settings
*
Personalisation-Configuration
normal video
inverse video
brightness (- +) adjustment
Setting the date and time
setting day/month/year
hour/minute adjustment
choice of 12 h / 24 h mode
Choice of units
l/100 km - mpg - km/l
°Celsius / °Fahrenheit
Choice of language
1
2
4
3
2
4
4
3
4
4
2
3
4
4
4
* The settings vary according to vehicle.
385
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION
ANSWER
SOLUTION
There is a difference in
sound quality between
the different audio
sources (radio, CD...).
For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treble,
Ambience, Loudness) can be adapted to the different sound sources,
which may result in audible differences when changing source (radio,
CD...).
Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass,
Treble, Ambience, Loudness) are adapted to
the sources listened to. It is advisable to set
the AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear
Balance, Left-Right Balance) to the middle
position, select the musical ambience "None" and
set the loudness correction to the "Active" position
in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio
mode.
The CD is ejected
automatically or is not
played by the player.
The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any
audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play.
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not
recognised by the audio equipment.
- Check that the CD is inserted in the player the
right way up.
- Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot
be played if it is too damaged.
- Check the content in the case of a recorded
CD: consult the advice in the "Audio" section.
- The audio equipment's CD player does not
play DVDs.
- Due to their quality level, certain writeable
CDs will not be played by the audio system.
The message "USB
peripheral error" is
displayed on the screen.
The Bluetooth connection
is cut.
The battery of the peripheral may not be suffi ciently charged.
Recharge the battery of the peripheral device.
The USB memory stick is not recognised.
The memory stick may be corrupt.
Reformat the memory stick.
386
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION
ANSWER
SOLUTION
I am unable to access my
voicemail.
Few telephones or service providers allow the use of this function.
The CD player sound is
poor.
The CD used is scratched or of poor quality.
Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable
conditions.
The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitable.
Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting
an ambience.
The stored stations do
not function (no sound,
87.5 Mhz is displayed...).
An incorrect waveband is selected.
Press the BAND AST button to return to the
waveband (AM, FM1, FM2, FMAST) on which the
stations are stored.
The traffi c announcement
(TA) is displayed. I do
not receive any traffi c
information.
The radio station is not part of the regional traffi c information network.
Tune to a radio station which broadcasts traffi c
information.
The quality of reception
of the radio station
listened to gradually
deteriorates or the stored
stations do not function
(no sound, 87.5 Mhz is
displayed...).
The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened
to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the
vehicle is travelling.
Activate the RDS function to enable the system
to check whether there is a more powerful
transmitter in the geographical area.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block
reception, including in RDS mode.
This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate
a failure of the audio equipment.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going
through a car wash or into an underground car park).
Have the aerial checked by a PEUGEOT dealer.
387
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION
ANSWER
SOLUTION
Sound cut-outs of 1 to
2 seconds in radio mode.
During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for any frequency
permitting better reception of the station.
Deactivate the RDS function if the phenomenon is
too frequent and always on the same route.
With the engine off,
the audio equipment
switches off after a few
minutes of use.
When the engine is switched off, the audio equipment operating time
depends on the battery charge.
The switch-off is normal: the audio equipment switches to economy mode
and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.
Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
charge.
The message "the audio
system is overheated"
appears on the display.
In order to protect the installation if the surrounding temperature is too
high, the audio equipment switches to an automatic thermal protection
mode leading to a reduction of the volume or stopping of the playing of
the CD.
Switch the audio system off for a few minutes to
allow the system to cool.
Alphabetical index
388
Accessories
..................................................
254
Accessory socket, 12V
..................
117, 120, 130
Accessory socket, 12 volt
.....................
125, 126
Access to the 3rd row
.....................................
74
Adjusting headlamps
....................................
107
Adjusting head restraints
..........................
68, 71
Adjusting seat belt height
.............................
158
Adjusting the steering wheel
..........................
80
Airbags
............................................................
38
Airbags, curtain
.....................................
164, 165
Airbags, front
.........................................
162, 165
Airbags, lateral
......................................
164, 165
Air conditioning
...............................................
25
Air conditioning, automatic
.............................
59
Air conditioning, digital
...................................
63
Air conditioning, manual
...........................
59, 60
Air filter
..........................................................
Air filter ..........................................................Air filter
211
Air flow
............................................................
25
Air vents
..........................................................
58
Alarm
...............................................................
87
Anti-pinch
................................................
89, 124
Anti-theft
.........................................................
84
Armrest, rear
.................................................
Armrest, rear .................................................Armrest, rear
126
Assistance call
.....................................
265, 266
Audible warning
............................................
152
Audio streaming (Bluetooth)
.................
352, 379
Audio systems
.................................................
53
Audio/video sockets
......................................
296
Automatic illumination
of headlamps
......................................
101, 106
Automatic operation
of hazard warning lamps
............................
152
Automatic rain sensitive windscreen
wipers
.................................................
109, 112
Auxiliary socket
.....................
296, 353, 374, 376
Backup starting
.............................................
245
Battery
............................................
211, 244-246
Battery, charging
...........................................
246
Battery, remote control
.............................
85, 86
Blind for panoramic sunroof
..........................
Blind for panoramic sunroof ..........................Blind for panoramic sunroof
124
Blinds
.............................................................
131
Bluetooth (hands-free)
..........
297-299, 336, 377
Bluetooth (telephone)
....................
297-299, 336
Bonnet
...........................................................
204
Bonnet stay
...................................................
204
Boot
.................................................................
94
Boot lamp
..............................................
116, 131
Brake discs
....................................................
212
Brake lamps
..................................................
234
Brake pads
....................................................
212
Brakes
...........................................................
212
A
D
Checks
..................................
206, 207, 211, 212
Child lock
.......................................................
151
Children
.........................................
140, 145, 146
Child seats
...........................
132, 133, 137, 150
Child seats, conventional
......................
139, 140
Closing the boot
........................................
82, 94
Closing the doors
......................................
82, 91
Cold climate screen
......................................
253
Colour screen, retractable
........................
51, 53
Concertina boards
..........................
75, 125, 126
Connectors, audio
..................
118, 119, 374, 376
Control for panoramic sunroof blind
.............
124
Coolant level
...........................................
39, 210
Coolant temperature indicator
........................
Coolant temperature indicator ........................Coolant temperature indicator
39
Courtesy lamps
.............................................
114
Courtesy mirror
.............................................
Courtesy mirror .............................................Courtesy mirror
118
Cruise control
................................................
181
Cup holder
......................................
Cup holder ......................................Cup holder
117, 125, 126
Date (setting)
......................................
44, 46, 48
Deactivating ESP
..........................................
157
Deactivating the passenger airbag
...............
162
Deadlocking
....................................................
82
Defrosting
............................................
60, 62, 78
Demisting
........................................................
60
Dials and gauges
............................................
27
Diesel additive level
......................................
210
Dimensions
...................................................
263
Dipped beam
.................................
100, 231-233
Dipstick
....................................................
42, 208
Directional lighting
........................................
108
Capacity, fuel tank
..........................................
96
CD MP3
.........................................................
373
Central locking
..........................................
82, 92
Centre console
..............................................
119
Changing a bulb
............................
231, 234-236
Changing a fuse
............................................
237
Changing a wheel
................................
223, 225
Changing a wiper blade
........................
113, 248
Changing the date
..............................
44, 46, 48
Changing the remote control battery
..............
85
Changing the time
..............................
44, 46, 48
Checking levels
.....................................
208-210
Checking the engine oil level
..........................
42
Checking tyre pressures (using the kit)
........
213
B
C
.
Alphabetical index
389
Eco-driving
.....................................................
25
Eco-driving (advice)
........................................
25
Economical driving
........................................
25
Economy mode
.............................................
247
Electric window controls
.................................
89
Electronic engine immobiliser
...................
84, 86
Electronic gearbox system
......................
25, 27,
32, 166, 169, 170, 186, 195, 212, 246
Electronic stability control (ESC)
..................
155
Emergency boot release
.................................
95
Emergency call
.....................................
265-267
Emergency warning lamps
...........................
152
Energy economy mode
.................................
247
Engine compartment
............................
206, 207
Engine compartment fusebox
.......................
237
Engine, Diesel
........
98, 205, 207, 258, 259, 262
Engine oil level indicator
.........................
Engine oil level indicator .........................Engine oil level indicator
42, 208
Engine, petrol
.........................
98, 206, 256, 257
Engines
................................................
256, 258
Environment
..............................................
25, 86
Equipment settings
................
28, 44, 46, 48, 51
ESC/ASR
.......................................................
155
Gearbox, automatic
.................................
27, 32,
166, 169, 170, 191, 212, 246
Gearbox, manual
.................................
166, 169,
170, 184, 185, 195, 212
Gear lever
.......................................................
Gear lever .......................................................Gear lever
25
Gear lever, automatic gearbox
.....................
191
Gear lever, manual gearbox
.........................
184
Gear shift indicator
.......................................
Gear shift indicator .......................................Gear shift indicator
185
Glove box
...............................................
117, 118
G. P.S .
....................................................
280, 322
Grab handles
................................................
117
Guidance
......................................
280, 320, 327
Guide-me-home
............................................
106
E
G
F H
Direction indicators
...............
152, 231, 232, 234
Distance alert
................................................
175
Doors
...............................................................
91
Doors emergency control
...............................
93
Door trays
......................................................
117
Dynamic emergency braking
........................
169
Dynamic stability control (DSC)
......
36, 156, 169
Filling with fuel
...................................
96, 98, 99
Fitting a wheel
...............................................
227
Fitting roof bars
.............................................
252
Fittings, boot
.........................................
125, 126
Flashing indicators
........................................
152
Foglamps, rear
..............................................
Foglamps, rear ..............................................Foglamps, rear
102
Folding the rear seats
.........................
72, 74, 75
Folding/unfolding the door mirrors
.................
78
Front foglamps
..............................
102, 231, 233
Front seats
..........................................
66, 67, 70
Fuel
.....................................................
25, 96, 98
Fuel consumption
............................................
25
Fuel filler cap
...................................................
96
Fuel filler flap
.............................................
96, 99
Fuel gauge
......................................................
96
Fuel tank
....................................................
96, 99
Fusebox, dashboard
.....................................
237
Fuses
.............................................................
237
Halogen headlamps
..............................
231, 232
Hands-free kit
.......................................
336, 377
Hazard warning lamps
..................................
152
Headlamp adjustment
...................................
107
Headlamps, directional
.........................
108, 231
Headlamp wash
............................................
111
Headlamp wash reservoir
.............................
Headlamp wash reservoir .............................Headlamp wash reservoir
210
Head restraints, front
......................................
68
Head restraints, rear
.......................................
Head restraints, rear .......................................Head restraints, rear
71
Head-up display
............................
173, 178, 181
Heated seats
...................................................
69
Heating
................................................
25, 59, 60
Height and reach adjustment,
steering wheel
..............................................
80
High load retaining net
..................................
128
Hill start assist
...............................................
170
Hooks
....................................................
126, 130
Horn
...............................................................
152
I
Identification plates
.......................................
264
Indicator lamps, status
....................................
31
Indicators, direction
......................................
152
Inflating accessories (using the kit)
..............
213
Inflating tyres
..................................................
25
Inputs for audio system
.........
296, 353, 374, 376
Instrument panel lighting
................................
43
Instrument panels
.....................................
27, 28
Instrument panel screen
.........................
27, 185
Intelligent Traction Control
............................
155
Interior fittings
...............................................
117
Interior mood lighting
....................................
115
ISOFIX
..........................................................
145
Alphabetical index
390
Jack
......................................................
223, 225
JACK socket
..........................
119, 353, 374, 376
Jukebox (copy)
..............................................
294
Jukebox (playing)
..........................................
295
Labels, identification
.....................................
264
Lamps, warning and indicator
...........
Lamps, warning and indicator ...........Lamps, warning and indicator
30, 33, 34
LED daytime running lamps
.........
104, 231, 232
LEDs - light-emitting diodes
.................
231, 232
Level, brake fluid
...........................................
209
Level, headlamp wash
...........................
111, 210
Level, power steering fluid
............................
209
Levels and checks
................................
206-210
Light-emitting diodes - LEDs
................
231, 232
Keeping children safe
..........................
132, 133,
137, 145, 146, 150, 162
Key with remote control
................
81, 82, 84, 86
Main beam
....................................
100, 231-233
Maintenance
...................................................
25
Map reading lamps
.......................................
114
Markings, identification
.................................
264
Mat
................................................................
120
Menu, main
...................................................
370
Mini fuel level
..................................................
96
Mirror, rear view
..............................................
79
Mirrors, door
....................................................
78
Misfuel prevention
...........................................
99
Modularity, seats
.............................................
77
Motorway function (direction indicators)
......
152
Mountings for ISOFIX seats
.........................
144
MP3 CD
.........................................................
373
Multimedia, rear
....................................
Multimedia, rear ....................................Multimedia, rear
119, 122
Music media players
............................
292, 348
K
J
L
M
Navigation
.....................................
280, 319, 320
Net
.................................................................
127
Number plate lamps
.............................
235, 236
N
Oil filter
..........................................................
Oil filter ..........................................................Oil filter
211
Oil level
....................................................
42, 208
Opening the bonnet
......................................
204
Opening the boot
......................................
81, 94
Opening the doors
....................................
81, 91
Opening the panoramic sunroof blind
..........
124
Opening the retractable screen
......................
53
Operation indicator lamps
........................
30-33
Paint colour code
..........................................
264
Panoramic glass sunroof
..............................
Panoramic glass sunroof ..............................Panoramic glass sunroof
124
Parking brake
................................................
212
Parking brake, electric
....................
35, 166, 169
Parking sensors, audible and visual
.............
198
Parking sensors, front
...................................
198
Parking sensors, rear
....................................
198
Parking space sensor
..................................
201
Particle emission filter
..................
Particle emission filter ..................Particle emission filter
204, 210, 211
Passenger compartment filter
......................
Passenger compartment filter ......................Passenger compartment filter
211
PEUGEOT call button
...................................
267
PEUGEOT Connect Assistance
..........
266, 267
O
P
ISOFIX child seats
.................................
144-146
ISOFIX mountings
.........................................
144
Lighting
..........................................................
116
Lighting bulbs (replacement)
........
231, 234-236
Lighting control stalk
.....................................
100
Lighting dimmer
..............................................
Lighting dimmer ..............................................Lighting dimmer
43
Lighting, guide-me home
......................
104, 106
Lighting, interior
....................................
Lighting, interior ....................................Lighting, interior
114, 115
Loading
.............................................
25, 77, 252
Load reduction mode
....................................
247
Load space cover
...................................
Load space cover ...................................Load space cover
125-127
Locating your vehicle
......................................
83
Locking from the inside
...................................
92
Long objects, transporting
........................
70, 77
Luggage retaining net
...................................
129
.
Alphabetical index
391
Screenwash, front
.........................................
111
Screen-wash reservoir
.................................
Screen-wash reservoir .................................Screen-wash reservoir
210
Seat adjustment
..................................
66, 67, 72
Seat belts
..............................
126, 158, 160, 161
Seat configurations
.........................................
77
Seats, electric
.................................................
67
Seats, rear
...........................................
Seats, rear ...........................................Seats, rear
72, 74, 75
Serial number, vehicle
..................................
264
Service indicator
.............................................
Service indicator .............................................Service indicator
40
Service warning light
......................................
34
Servicing
.........................................................
25
Setting the clock
................................
44, 46, 48
Short-cut menus
...................................
276, 318
Sidelamps
.............................
100, 231, 232, 234
Side repeater
................................................
Side repeater ................................................Side repeater
233
SIM card
................................................
118, 300
Snow chains
..................................................
230
Spare wheel
.................................
223, 225, 226
Spectacles storage
.......................................
117
Speed limiter
.................................................
Speed limiter .................................................Speed limiter
178
Speedometer
..................................................
Speedometer ..................................................Speedometer
27
Spotlamps, side
............................................
115
Start
...............................................................
245
Starting the vehicle
.........................
84, 186, 191
Steering mounted controls, audio
........
274, 369
Stopping the vehicle
.......................
84, 186, 191
Stop & Start
...
57, 61, 65, 97, 195, 204, 211, 244
Storage
...........................
117, 119, 121, 125, 126
Storage box
...................................................
118
Storage drawer
.............................................
Storage drawer .............................................Storage drawer
121
Storage wells
........................................
125, 126
Stowing rings
........................................
125, 126
Sun visor
........................................
Sun visor ........................................Sun visor
117, 118, 131
Synchronising the remote control
...................
85
Synthesiser, voice
.........................................
330
System, navigation
................................
280, 320
Radio
....................................
291, 345, 346, 371
RCA sockets
.................................................
296
Reading lamps, rear
......................................
Reading lamps, rear ......................................Reading lamps, rear
114
Rear foglamp
........................................
234, 235
Rear screen (demisting)
............................
62, 78
Recharging the battery
.................................
246
Reduction of electrical load
..........................
247
Regeneration of the particle
emissions filter
............................................
emissions filter ............................................emissions filter
211
Reinitialising the electric windows
..................
89
Reinitialising the remote control
.....................
85
Remote control
....................................
81, 82, 86
Removable screen (snow shield)
..................
253
Removing a wheel
........................................
227
Safety for children
...........................
89, 140, 151
Screen, colour 16/9
...............................
275, 302
Screen, colour and mapping
.................
317, 356
Screen menu map
................
302, 356, 380, 382
Screen, monochrome
..................
370, 380, 382
Screen, monochrome C
..................................
55
Screen, multifunction
(with audio equipment)
...............
46, 48, 51, 53
Screen, multifunction
(without audio equipment)
............................
44
Screenwash fluid level
...........................
111, 210
Removing the mat
.........................................
120
Repair kit, puncture
...............................
213, 219
Replacing bulbs
............................
231, 234-236
Replacing fuses
............................................
237
Replacing the air filter
...................................
Replacing the air filter ...................................Replacing the air filter
211
Replacing the oil filter
...................................
Replacing the oil filter ...................................Replacing the oil filter
211
Replacing the passenger
compartment filter
......................................
compartment filter ......................................compartment filter
211
Replacing wiper blades
.........................
113, 248
Resetting the service indicator
.......................
Resetting the service indicator .......................Resetting the service indicator
41
Resetting the trip recorder
..............................
Resetting the trip recorder ..............................Resetting the trip recorder
43
Rev counter
.....................................................
Rev counter .....................................................Rev counter
27
Reversing camera
.........................................
200
Reversing lamp
.............................................
234
Rigid panel
......................................................
74
Risk areas (update)
...............................
287, 324
Roof bars
.......................................................
252
Routine checks
.....................................
211, 212
Running out of fuel (Diesel)
..........................
205
R
S
PEUGEOT Connect Media Navigation
(NG4 3D)
............................
269, 272, 275, 302
PEUGEOT Connect Navigation (RT6)
...
51, 313
PEUGEOT Connect SOS
....................
266, 267
PEUGEOT CONNECT SOS
.........................
267
PEUGEOT Connect Sound
(RD5)
...................................
48, 367, 380, 382
PEUGEOT services
......................................
267
PIN code
.......................................................
300
Player, CD MP3
.............................................
373
POIs (updating)
.............................................
287
Port, USB
..............................
119, 353, 374, 376
Priming the fuel system
................................
205
Protecting children
.......................
132, 133, 137,
140, 145, 146, 150, 162
Puncture
................................................
213, 219
Alphabetical index
392
Table of weights
............................
257, 259, 262
Tables, aircraft
..............................................
121
Tables of engines
.................................
256, 258
Tables of fuses
..............................................
237
Tank, fuel
.........................................................
99
Technical data
...............................
256-259, 262
Telephone
.....................
267, 297-299, 336, 340
Telephone, hands-free
..........................
297-299
Temperature control
for heated seats
............................................
69
Temperature, coolant
......................................
39
Temporary tyre repair kit
...............................
213
Third brake lamp
..................................
235, 236
TMC (Traffic info)
.................................
289, 333
Tools
..............................................
213, 223, 225
Torch
.....................................
116, 125, 126, 131
Total distance recorder
...................................
Total distance recorder ...................................Total distance recorder
43
Towbar
...........................................................
Towbar ...........................................................Towbar
250
Towed loads
..................................
257, 259, 262
Towing another vehicle
.........................
248, 249
Traction control
(ASR)
............................................................
36
Traffic information
(TA)
.....................................
290, 334, 347, 372
Traffic information
(TMC)
.................................
289, 290, 333, 334
Trailer
............................................................
Trailer ............................................................Trailer
250
Trip computer
.....................................
Trip computer .....................................Trip computer
54, 55, 57
Trip distance recorder
.....................................
Trip distance recorder .....................................Trip distance recorder
43
Tyre pressures
..............................................
264
Tyres
................................................................
25
Tyre under-inflation detection
...............
153, 226
Vehicle configuration
.............
28, 44, 46, 48, 51
Vehicle identification
.....................................
264
Ventilation
.................................................
58-60
Voice commands
..........................................
272
Warning lamps
....................................
31, 34, 35
Washing (advice)
...........................................
200
Wash-wipe, rear
............................................
Wash-wipe, rear ............................................Wash-wipe, rear
110
Weights
.........................................
257, 259, 262
Welcome lighting
...................................
105, 115
Window controls
.............................................
89
Wiper control stalk
........................
109, 110, 112
Wiper, rear
.....................................................
110
Wipers
...................................................
109, 112
Xenon headlamps
.........................................
231
V
W
X
UT
Under floor storage
.......................................
130
Under-inflation (detection)
............................
153
Unlocking
........................................................
81
Unlocking from the inside
...............................
92
Update risk areas
..................................
287, 324
Updating POIs
...............................................
287
USB (PEUGEOT Connect)
...................
119, 374
.
Visual search
393
Exterior
Remote control key 81-86
- opening / closing
- anti-theft protection
- starting
- battery
Fuel tank 96-98
Misfuel prevention 99
W i p e r 1 0 9 - 1 1 3
Changing a wiper blade 113, 248
Demisting-defrosting the rear screen 62
B o o t 9 4 - 9 5
- opening / closing
- emergency release
Temporary puncture repair kit 213-222
Changing a wheel 223-229
- tools
- removing
Parking sensors 198-199
Reversing camera 200
Parking space sensors 201-202
Towing 248-249
T o w b a r 2 5 0 - 2 5 1
Accessories 254-255
Roof bars, finishers 252
Panoramic sunroof 124
Door mirrors 78
Exterior welcome lighting 105
Door mirror spotlamps 115
Exterior (lighting, automatic,
directional) 106-108
Headlamp height adjustment 107
Changing bulbs 231-233
- front lamps
- foglamps
- direction indicator repeaters
Very cold climate screen 253
D o o r s 9 1 - 9 3
- opening / closing
- central locking
- emergency control
Alarm 87-88
Electric windows 89-90
ESC: ABS, EBFD, EBA, ASR,
DSC 155-157
CTI (traction on snow) 155
Tyre under-inflation detection 153-154
Tyre pressures 153, 218, 264
Snow chains 230
Changing rear bulbs 234-236
- rear lamps
- 3rd brake lamp
- number plate lamps
- foglamps
Visual search
394
Interior
Rear seats, 2nd row 72-73
Rigid panel 74
Access to the 3rd row 74
Rear seats, 3rd row 75-76
Aircraft style table 121
Storage compartments under
the footwells 121
Side blinds 131
Boot fittings 125-130
- load space roller cover
- high load retaining net
- luggage retaining net
- hooks
- 12 V accessory socket
- storage box
Boot lamp, torch 116, 131
Rear multimedia 122-123
Conventional child seats 132-143
ISOFIX child seats 144-150
Child lock 151
Seat belts 158-161
M a t s 1 2 0
Storage drawer 121
A i r b a g s 1 6 2 - 1 6 5
Deactivating the passenger's front
airbag 134, 163
Front seats 66-69
- manual
- electric
- head restraints
- lumbar
- heated
Seat in table position, transporting
long objects 70
.
Visual search
395
Instruments and controls
Courtesy lamps 114, 115
Seat belt / passenger's front airbag
warning lamps display 159-160, 163
Rear view mirror 78
Centre console
119
PEUGEOT Connect USB
119, 292, 348, 374
Sun visor 118
Electric parking brake 166-169, 171-172
Dashboard fuses 237-240
Opening the bonnet 204
6-speed manual gearbox 184
Gear shift indicator 185
Electronic gear control gearbox 186-190
Automatic gearbox 191-194
Stop & Start 195-197
Hill start assist 170
E c o - d r i v i n g 2 5 - 2 6
PEUGEOT Connect Media
navigation (RT6) 269-312
Setting the date/time 52
PEUGEOT Connect
Navigation (RT6) 313-366
Setting the date/time 52
PEUGEOT Connect Sound
(RD5) 367-387
Setting the date/time 50
Ventilation 58-59
Rear ventilation 59
Manual air conditioning 60-61
Digital air conditioning 63-65
Demisting-defrosting
the rear screen 62
Interior fittings 117-118, 120
- sun visor
- driver's storage compartments
- glove box
- mat
12 V accessory socket 120
Visual search
396
Instruments and controls (continued)
Head-up display 173-174
Distance alert 175-177
Lighting controls 100-106
Direction indicators 152
Speed limiter 178-180
Cruise control 181-183
Door mirrors 78
Electric windows, deactivating 89-90
Switch panel 16
Stop & Start 195-197
Headlamp height adjustment 107
Instrument panels, screens 27-29
Warning lamps 30-38
Indicators 39-42
Gear shift indicator 185
Buttons 41, 43
- check / service indicator /
trip distance recorder
- lighting dimmer
Steering wheel adjustment 80
H o r n 1 5 2
Multifunction screens 44-52
- Screen A
- Screen C
- 16/9 colour screen
Retractable screen 53
Screen A (setting the date/time) 44-47
Hazard warning lamps 152
Head-up display 173-174
Distance alert 175-177
Wiper controls 109-113
Trip computer 54-57
P a n o r a m i c s u n r o o f 1 2 4
Ignition switch 84
.
Visual search
397
Maintenance - Technical data
Checking components 211-212
- air filter
- passenger compartment filter
- oil filter
- brake pads / discs
Running out of fuel, Diesel 205
Checking levels 208-210
- oil
- brake fluid
- power steering fluid
- coolant
- screenwash/headlamp wash fluid
Changing bulbs 231-236
- front
- rear
Petrol weights 257
Diesel weights 259-261
Diesel weights - LCV 262
Opening the bonnet 204
Under the bonnet, petrol 206
Under the bonnet, Diesel 207
Petrol engines 256
Diesel engines 258
12 V battery 244-246
Load reduction, economy mode 247
Engine compartment
fuses 237, 241-243
Identification markings 264
D i m e n s i o n s 2 6 3
08-13
Printed in the EU Anglais
This handbook describes all of the
equipment available in the whole
range.
This document is an integral part of
your vehicle. It should be passed on
to the new user in the event of sale or
transfer.
Reproduction or translation of all or
part of this handbook is prohibited
without written authorisation from
Automobiles PEUGEOT.
Your vehicle will be fi tted with some
of this equipment described in this
document, depending on its trim level,
version and the specifi cation for the
country in which it is sold.
The descriptions and illustrations
are given without any obligation.
Automobiles PEUGEOT reserves
the right to modify the technical
specifi cations, equipment and
accessories without having to update
the current handbook.
Automobiles PEUGEOT declares,
by application of the provisions of
the European regulation (Directive
2000/53) relating to End of Life
Vehicles, that it achieves the
objectives set by this regulation and
that recycled materials are used in
the manufacture of the products that
it sells.
For any work on your vehicle, use
a qualifi ed workshop that has the
technical information, competence and
equipment required, which a PEUGEOT
dealer is able to provide.
Anglais
14588.0040
www.peugeot.com
